InventaPro

Trend Analysis Insights

Leverage the power of historical sales data and seasonal trends with Trend Analysis Insights to provide retailers with in-depth analytics that highlight purchasing patterns. This feature enables users to identify peak sales periods, slow-moving items, and seasonal fluctuations, empowering them to make informed stocking decisions and optimize inventory levels.

Requirements

Sales Trend Visualization

"As a retail manager, I want to visualize sales trends over time so that I can identify peak sales periods and adjust my inventory accordingly to maximize sales and minimize stockouts."

Description

The Sales Trend Visualization requirement involves creating an interactive dashboard feature that allows users to view graphical representations of historical sales data over various time periods. This visualization helps retailers easily identify trends, peak sales periods, and seasonal fluctuations. By integrating this with the existing analytics tools in InventaPro, users can gain immediate insights into their sales performance, making it easier to adjust their inventory strategies accordingly. This feature enhances decision-making and empowers users to act proactively in managing their stock levels, ultimately leading to increased sales and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Interactive Dashboard Access by Retail Users

Given that the user logs into InventaPro, When they navigate to the Trend Analysis Insights section, Then they should see an interactive dashboard displaying historical sales data with graphical representations.

Time Period Selection for Trend Analysis

Given that the user is on the Sales Trend Visualization dashboard, When they select different time periods (daily, weekly, monthly), Then the dashboard should update to reflect sales trends for the selected period accurately.

Identification of Peak Sales Periods

Given the historical sales data visualized on the dashboard, When the user hovers over significant peaks in the graph, Then the tooltips should display the exact sales figures and dates corresponding to those peaks.

Display of Slow-Moving Items

Given that the user utilizes the Trend Analysis Insights feature, When they filter the sales trend data for slow-moving items, Then the dashboard should highlight these items distinctly with proper analytics.

Seasonal Fluctuations Visibility

Given that the user accesses the Sales Trend Visualization, When they view the sales data over various seasons (e.g., Q1, Q2), Then they should see distinct visual representation of fluctuations during those periods, differentiating between high and low sales seasons clearly.

Integration with Existing Analytics Tools

Given that the user accesses the Sales Trend Visualization feature, When they attempt to use the dashboards in conjunction with other analytics tools in InventaPro, Then there should be seamless integration, allowing data interchange without errors.

Overall User Satisfaction and Feedback Collection

Given that the feature has been released, When users utilize the Sales Trend Visualization for a month, Then a feedback survey should be issued to assess user satisfaction and identify any areas for improvement.

Automated Inventory Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated alerts when inventory levels are low or when certain items are trending, so that I can take prompt action to restock and avoid missed sales opportunities."

Description

The Automated Inventory Alerts requirement calls for the implementation of a notification system that alerts users when stock levels fall below predefined thresholds or when specific items are trending based on sales patterns. This feature is pivotal in ensuring that users are informed in real-time about potential stockouts, enabling timely reordering of products. The integration of AI-driven analysis will refine the accuracy of alerts, making them not only timely but also contextually relevant. Enhanced alert capabilities can lead to better inventory control, reduced lost sales, and improved customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automated notification when an item's stock level falls below the predefined threshold set by the inventory manager.

Given the stock level of an item is at or below the predefined threshold, when the inventory monitoring system checks the stock levels, then an automated notification should be sent to the user.

User receives alerts for trending items based on sales patterns to ensure timely reordering.

Given that a specific item exhibits a significant increase in sales compared to historical data, when the system detects this trend, then an alert should be generated and sent to the user indicating that reordering is recommended.

The system allows the user to customize threshold levels for different inventory items.

Given that the user has access to the inventory alert settings, when the user modifies the threshold for an item, then the new threshold should be saved and used for future stock level monitoring.

Automated alerts are logged for review by the user, providing a history of notifications received.

Given that an alert has been sent to the user, when the user accesses the notification history, then a record of the alert should be available with details such as item name, alert reason, and timestamp.

User can receive alerts via multiple communication channels (e.g., email, mobile app, SMS).

Given that the user has set up their notification preferences, when the stock level falls below the threshold or an item trends, then the user should receive the alert through all preferred communication channels.

The system ensures that alerts are only sent if there is a critical stock level concern to reduce alert fatigue.

Given the stock level falls below a minor threshold without a trend, when checked, then no alert should be sent to the user unless it is categorized as critical.

Admin can view the effectiveness of the automated alerts through performance metrics.

Given that the admin accesses the analytics dashboard, when viewing alert effectiveness, then the system should provide metrics such as alert response times, stockout occurrences after alerts, and user engagement with alerts.

Custom Reporting Tools

"As a business owner, I want to create customized reports based on my specific inventory metrics so that I can make more informed strategic decisions about my stock."

Description

The Custom Reporting Tools requirement is aimed at providing users with the ability to create tailored reports based on specific metrics, such as sales trends, item performance, and customer purchasing behaviors. This feature allows retailers to generate insights that are most relevant to their operational needs. By offering customizable filters and templates, users can focus on data that matters to them, thus enhancing their analytical capabilities and supporting strategic decision-making. Ultimately, this functionality will contribute to a more responsive and data-driven inventory management solution.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a custom report to analyze monthly sales trends over the last year, filtering by product category and setting a date range.

Given the user has selected a date range and product category, when they click 'Generate Report', then a report is displayed showing monthly sales trends, including total sales and units sold for each month within the selected category.

User saves a customized report for future use, ensuring the chosen filters and layout are retained for later access.

Given the user has customized a report with specific filters and layout, when they click 'Save Report', then the report is saved and retrievable with the same filters and layout as initially set by the user.

User shares a custom report with team members via email directly from the reporting tool.

Given the user is viewing a custom report, when they click on 'Share Report' and enter team member email addresses, then an email is sent with the report attached or a link to the report, confirming successful sharing.

User applies multiple filters to a report, including date range, product category, and sales channel, to refine the data analysis.

Given the user has set up multiple filters, when they click 'Apply Filters', then the report updates to reflect only the data that meets all specified filter criteria without errors.

User exports a custom report to a CSV file for offline analysis.

Given the user is viewing a custom report, when they click on 'Export to CSV', then a CSV file is generated and downloaded to the user's device containing all report data in a structured format.

User receives an error message for invalid report configurations while attempting to generate a report.

Given that the user has configured a report with invalid parameters (e.g., a date range that does not make sense), when they click 'Generate Report', then an appropriate error message is displayed explaining the issue and suggesting corrections.

Historical Data Comparison

"As a store manager, I want to compare current sales data with historical performance so that I can identify trends over time and better manage my inventory strategies."

Description

The Historical Data Comparison requirement focuses on the capability to compare current sales data with historical data, allowing users to assess performance over time. This feature enables retailers to identify long-term trends, evaluate the impact of seasonal changes, and implement effective inventory strategies accordingly. By incorporating intuitive comparison tools, users can effortlessly switch between different time frames and visualize changes in performance. This will enhance their understanding of market dynamics and assist in improving overall inventory management performance.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to compare this month's sales data with the same month last year to evaluate performance week by week, so I can identify any significant changes in purchasing patterns.

Given current sales data for January 2025, when I compare it with sales data for January 2024, then I should be able to view performance metrics for each week of January side by side, highlighting percentage changes in sales compared to the previous year.

As a retailer, I need to look at quarterly sales trends to assess how seasonal promotions impacted my sales performance over the past four quarters.

Given quarterly sales data for the last four quarters, when I generate a comparison report, then I should receive a visual representation (chart or graph) of sales trends for each quarter, including key percentage increases or decreases due to promotional activities.

As a store manager, I want to assess slow-moving items in my inventory by comparing last quarter's sales data to this quarter's current sales data, so I can make informed decisions on stock clearance or adjustment.

Given last quarter's sales data and current sales data for select items, when I run a comparison analysis, then I should see a list of items that have decreased in sales, with the fluctuations clearly indicated in the report.

As a business owner, I want to analyze year-over-year sales data to understand broader trends and seasonality in my sales performance. This will help me plan my inventory for the upcoming year.

Given year-over-year sales data from the last two years, when I visualize this data using a trend line graph, then the graph should accurately represent the sales growth or decline, allowing me to make year-based forecasting decisions.

As an inventory manager, I need to identify the peak sales periods within the last three years to adequately prepare for future demand spikes.

Given sales data for the last three years, when I analyze the data to identify peak periods, then the analysis should return a clear indication of which months or weeks consistently generated the highest sales, with accompanying percentage increases compared to off-peak periods.

As a finance analyst at the retail store, I want to evaluate the impact of specific marketing campaigns on sales by comparing sales data from campaign periods to non-campaign periods.

Given sales data from the specific periods of marketing campaigns, when I run a comparison with sales data from comparable non-campaign periods, then the results should provide an analysis of the performance fluctuations attributable to the marketing efforts, with highlighted statistical significance.

Seasonal Forecasting Module

"As a retailer, I want to use an AI-driven forecasting tool to anticipate seasonal sales trends so that I can optimize my inventory levels and meet customer demand effectively."

Description

The Seasonal Forecasting Module requirement entails the development of a robust forecasting tool that leverages AI algorithms to analyze historical sales data and predict future sales patterns during different seasons. This feature is fundamental for retailers to better prepare for seasonal demands and optimize their inventory accordingly, ensuring they have the right products available at the right time. By accurately forecasting demand, retailers can mitigate risks associated with overstock and stockouts, driving efficiency in inventory management practices.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer utilizes the Seasonal Forecasting Module to analyze past sales data at the start of a new season, aiming to prepare for expected demand.

Given the retailer inputs historical sales data, When the Seasonal Forecasting Module is activated, Then it should provide a forecast report indicating expected sales trends for the upcoming season with at least 85% accuracy based on historical performance.

After activating the Seasonal Forecasting Module, the retailer decides to modify their inventory levels based on the provided insights

Given the retailer has accessed the Seasonal Forecasting Module report, When the retailer adjusts inventory levels based on the recommendations, Then the system should reflect these changes in the inventory dashboard within 5 minutes of modification.

The retailer reviews the performance of the Seasonal Forecasting Module after a seasonal period to evaluate its effectiveness in preventing overstock and stockouts.

Given the retailer examines the inventory levels at the end of the season, When comparing actual sales data with the Seasonal Forecasting Module's predictions, Then the forecast should demonstrate a stockout rate reduction of at least 20% compared to the previous season without the module.

A retailer prepares for an upcoming holiday season using the Seasonal Forecasting Module and expects to view actionable insights.

Given the holiday season is approaching, When the retailer queries the Seasonal Forecasting Module for predictions, Then it should provide a list of top 5 predicted best-selling items along with recommended order quantities.

Retailers need to validate how the Seasonal Forecasting Module integrates with their existing inventory management practices and systems.

Given the retailer has integrated the Seasonal Forecasting Module with their inventory management system, When sales predictions are generated, Then the system should automatically adjust re-order points and notify the user of low stock items based on these predictions.

A retailer uses the Seasonal Forecasting Module and wants to track performance against the forecast.

Given a retailer generates a report after the season ends, When they analyze performance metrics, Then it should include a comparison chart that shows forecasted sales versus actual sales for each product category by week.

Real-Time Demand Alerts

With Real-Time Demand Alerts, retailers receive timely notifications about significant shifts in demand within their inventory. This feature enables users to quickly respond to unexpected trends or changes in purchasing behavior, helping prevent stockouts and ensuring that popular items remain available to meet customer expectations.

Requirements

Real-Time Alert Configuration

"As a retailer, I want to configure my demand alert thresholds so that I can receive notifications that are specifically relevant to my inventory, enabling me to respond effectively to market changes."

Description

This requirement enables users to customize the thresholds for triggering demand alerts based on individual inventory items. Users can set parameters for stock levels, sales trends, and seasonal demand variations, allowing for a tailored approach to inventory management. This flexibility ensures that retailers can receive alerts that are pertinent to their unique operations and market conditions, thus enhancing responsiveness to changing customer preferences and optimizing stock levels accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

User defines threshold settings for specific inventory items to customize the Real-Time Demand Alerts functionality based on their unique market conditions and sales patterns.

Given a user with appropriate permissions, when they access the Real-Time Demand Alerts configuration page and set specific thresholds for inventory items, then the system should save these threshold settings accurately and reflect them on the dashboard.

A retailer receives a demand alert notification when the sales volume for a specific item exceeds the pre-defined threshold during a promotional event.

Given an item with pre-configured sales thresholds, when the sales volume exceeds that threshold, then the system should trigger a real-time notification to the retailer via email and within the application.

A user modifies the alert settings for seasonal items based on historical sales data and trends.

Given a user has access to the Real-Time Demand Alerts configuration, when they edit the parameters for seasonal items, then all changes should be validated, accurately saved, and effective in triggering alerts during the next relevant sales season.

Users want to deactivate the alert for a specific inventory item due to a temporary halt in sales.

Given a user is on the alert configuration page, when they select an item and choose to deactivate the alert, then the system should update the status of the alert to inactive and confirm this change to the user.

A retailer wants to receive alerts only for low stock levels rather than all demand changes.

Given a user is in the Real-Time Demand Alerts settings, when they choose to set alerts only for low stock levels, then the system should modify the alert parameters accordingly and notify them of this successful update.

Users require a report on the past week's demand alerts to evaluate their effectiveness and make further adjustments.

Given a user requests a report of past demand alerts for the previous week, when they initiate this request, then the system should generate a comprehensive report summarizing all demand alerts triggered, including item details and alert reasons.

A retailer wants an alert when stock levels reach a critical threshold based on a combination of sales trends and seasonal demand.

Given the retailer has set multiple criteria for triggering alerts, when the system detects that the stock level meets the critical threshold as per sales and seasonal trends, then an alert should be generated and sent to the user's registered contact methods.

Multi-Channel Demand Monitoring

"As a retailer, I want to monitor demand across all my sales channels in real time so that I can make informed inventory decisions based on a complete overview of my performance."

Description

This requirement provides the capability to monitor demand across multiple sales channels in real time, including online, offline, and marketplaces. By integrating data from various sources, retailers can gain a holistic view of their inventory performance, allowing them to identify trends that may impact stock availability. The benefit of this feature is that it helps retailers adapt their inventory strategies based on comprehensive performance metrics, ultimately ensuring customer satisfaction and reducing the risk of stockouts or overstock situations.

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-Channel Demand Monitoring for Seasonal Promotions

Given that a seasonal promotion is launched across online and offline channels, when demand monitoring is activated, then the retailer receives real-time alerts if demand for promoted items exceeds a predefined threshold.

Integration with E-Commerce Platforms

Given that the retailer has connected their e-commerce platforms to InventaPro, when monitoring demand in real-time, then the system accurately aggregates sales data from all channels and displays it on the dashboard within 5 minutes of the transaction.

Response to Stockout Alerts

Given that a popular item is at risk of stockout based on real-time demand data, when the alert is triggered, then the retailer receives a notification via email and in-app to take necessary action, such as restocking or offering alternatives.

Performance Metric Reporting

Given that the demand monitoring feature is in use, when the retailer generates a report, then the report displays comprehensive performance metrics for each sales channel, including total sales, stock levels, and demand trends over the past month.

Demand Predictive Analytics Integration

Given that the demand monitoring system is assessing real-time data, when the retailer views demand forecasts, then the system uses predictive analytics to suggest optimal stock levels based on historical trends and current data.

User Access Control for Demand Alerts

Given that there are multiple users accessing the InventaPro dashboard, when demand alerts are set up, then the administrator can designate which users receive specific alerts based on their roles.

Automated Stock Adjustment Suggestions

"As a retailer, I want the system to suggest stock adjustments when demand shifts occur so that I can easily align my inventory levels with customer needs without manual analysis."

Description

This requirement introduces a feature that suggests actionable stock adjustments based on demand alerts and forecasting data. When significant shifts in demand are detected, the system will propose recommendations for restocking or reducing inventory levels for specific items. By leveraging AI-driven insights, this feature simplifies decision-making for retailers, ensuring that they can take prompt actions that align with customer needs and enhance operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated stock adjustment notifications are sent to the retailer when a significant increase in demand for a specific product is detected after a sales spike from an online promotion.

Given the retailer has set threshold values for demand alerts, when a significant sales increase occurs, then the system should generate and send a stock adjustment suggestion notification to the retailer.

Retailers review stock adjustment suggestions during a weekly inventory review meeting to make data-driven decisions.

Given that stock adjustment suggestions are available, when the retailer accesses the suggestion list, then they should see actionable recommendations with clear metrics indicating why adjustments are advisable.

A retailer implements the suggested stock adjustments and monitors the product availability over the following month.

Given the retailer has acted on the stock adjustment suggestions, when the inventory level is assessed after one month, then it should show an improvement in product availability and a reduction in stockouts.

Retailer customizing alert preferences to only receive notifications for high-demand items based on sales data analysis.

Given the retailer has access to the alert settings, when they customize their preferences to receive alerts for specific products, then the system should only send alerts for those selected items during demand shifts.

A user logs into their InventaPro dashboard and checks for any missed stock adjustment suggestions over the past week.

Given the retailer logs into the dashboard, when they check the notifications section, then they should see all missed stock adjustment suggestions clearly displayed with timestamps for immediate action.

User Role-Based Notification Settings

"As a store manager, I want to receive real-time alerts about demand changes so that I can respond immediately to ensure we meet customer needs effectively."

Description

This requirement allows different user roles within a retail organization to have distinct notification settings for demand alerts. For instance, store managers might receive real-time alerts while financial managers could opt for daily summary notifications. This ensures that the right information reaches the appropriate team members efficiently, improving collaboration and responsiveness throughout the organization, thereby enhancing the overall effectiveness of inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Store manager receiving immediate alert for a sudden increase in demand for a popular product.

Given a store manager is assigned to receive real-time demand alerts, when there is a significant increase in demand for a product, then the manager should receive a notification within 5 minutes of the demand shift occurring.

Financial manager opting for a daily summary of demand alerts instead of real-time notifications.

Given a financial manager selects a daily summary notification setting, when the day ends, then the manager should receive a consolidated report summarizing the demand alerts for that day by email, including key metrics and insights.

Admin user configuring notification settings for various roles in the organization.

Given an admin user accesses the notification settings panel, when they configure different notifications for each role (store manager, financial manager, and inventory analyst), then the changes should save successfully, and each user role should receive the specified notifications accordingly when demand changes occur.

Inventory analyst receiving alerts for low stock levels of critical items.

Given an inventory analyst is set to receive notifications for low stock, when an item's quantity falls below the predefined threshold, then the analyst should receive an immediate alert to take appropriate action.

Testing the functionality of user role-specific notification settings.

Given multiple user roles have been created with distinct notification preferences, when demand changes occur, then each role should receive only the alerts they are subscribed to, demonstrating the functionality works as intended without cross-notifications.

Retailer testing the real-time demand alerts feature during peak sales periods.

Given a retailer is in a peak sales period, when a high volume of sales occurs resulting in demand alerts, then the retailer should see that notifications are received without delays or errors, ensuring their ability to respond promptly to changes in demand.

User modifying notification settings post-initial setup.

Given a user has initial notification settings configured, when they modify their alert preferences, then the system should update the settings and confirm the changes in a user-friendly manner, ensuring the user's preferences are respected for future alerts.

Dashboard Insights and Analytics

"As a retailer, I want an analytics dashboard that visualizes demand alert trends so that I can quickly assess and react to inventory changes."

Description

This requirement entails the development of an insightful dashboard that presents analytics and trends generated from demand alerts. The dashboard will provide visual representations of data such as alert frequency, the category of affected items, and sales trends over time. By presenting data visually, retailers can quickly assess their inventory situation, make strategic decisions, and enhance overall operational efficiency. This feature aligns with the goal of providing a comprehensive view of inventory dynamics and performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives real-time demand alerts for a trending product during a holiday sales event.

Given that the retailer's dashboard is operational, when a significant increase in demand for a specific product occurs, then the retailer receives a notification on the dashboard within 5 minutes of the alert being triggered.

Retailer analyzes demand alert trends over a weekly sales period for adjustments in inventory strategy.

Given that the retailer accesses the analytics dashboard, when they select the 'demand alert trends' view, then they can visualize alert frequency, affected item categories, and trends over time for the past week with no data discrepancies.

Retailer interprets sales trends data to make informed purchasing decisions.

Given that sales trends are displayed on the dashboard, when the retailer reviews the sales data for the last month, then they should see clear visual representations (graphs/charts) that allow them to identify top-selling items and potential stockout risks.

Retailer receives alerts for products nearing stockout status due to increased demand.

Given that the real-time demand alert system is functional, when a product's inventory level drops below the predefined threshold due to increased demand, then an alert is displayed prominently on the dashboard indicating a stockout risk within the next 48 hours.

Retailer sets custom parameters for receiving alerts based on their specific inventory needs.

Given that the retailer is in the settings menu, when they adjust the parameters for receiving demand alerts (e.g., item categories, alert frequency), then the settings are saved and applied correctly without errors, and alerts are sent accordingly based on the new criteria.

Retailer evaluates the historical performance of demand alerts over a selected period.

Given that the dashboard includes historical data, when the retailer selects a specific time frame (e.g., last three months) for demand alerts, then they are presented with a comprehensive report that includes the number of alerts triggered, products affected, and sales impact during that period.

Retailer receives user-friendly guidance on interpreting dashboard analytics for decision-making.

Given that the dashboard features tooltips and help sections, when the retailer hovers over data points or metrics, then they receive clear, concise explanations that help them understand the significance of the data in making inventory decisions.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a retailer, I want to integrate demand alerts with my e-commerce platform so that I can ensure my online inventory reflects real-time sales and stock levels."

Description

This requirement establishes seamless integration capabilities with major e-commerce platforms used by retailers. By integrating demand alerts with e-commerce systems, retailers can synchronize online sales data directly with inventory management processes. This allows for immediate adjustments in the inventory based on real-time sales, contributing to better stock availability and optimizing fulfillment strategies, ultimately leading to an improved customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with e-commerce platforms successfully captures real-time sales data from a retailer's online store.

Given an active integration with a supported e-commerce platform, when a sale is made online, then the inventory levels should be automatically updated in InventaPro within 5 minutes.

Retailers receive alerts for inventory levels in cases of unexpected high-demand items.

Given that a product's sales exceed the average by 50% within a 24-hour period, when this occurs, then a real-time demand alert should be sent to the retailer's application and email.

Inventory is synced across online and offline channels after integration is established.

Given an integration with multiple sales channels, when stock levels are updated in the e-commerce platform, then the same updates should reflect in InventaPro without manual intervention within 10 minutes.

Users can customize the threshold for receiving demand alerts based on their specific inventory items.

Given an admin setting in the app, when a retailer sets a custom demand alert threshold for an item, then the alert system should activate based on this custom threshold.

Sales data from the e-commerce platform reflects accurately in inventory management layer post-integration.

Given that the data sync has occurred, when a retailer checks their inventory levels in InventaPro, then the amounts should exactly match the e-commerce reporting panel for the same items.

Retailers have the option to enable or disable the demand alert feature based on their operational preferences.

Given user permission settings, when a retailer chooses to disable the demand alert feature, then no alerts should be generated for any products until enabled again.

Historical sales data is analyzed for better forecasting and alert generation.

Given the system has access to at least 3 months of sales data, when an analysis is conducted, then demand alerts should be predictive of trends with at least 80% accuracy based on previous data.

Automated Stock Adjustment

Automated Stock Adjustment simplifies inventory management by automatically recalculating and adjusting order quantities based on predictive data. This feature helps retailers maintain optimal stock levels effortlessly, reducing the manual workload and minimizing the risk of human error in reordering processes.

Requirements

Predictive Order Quantity Calculation

"As a retailer, I want the system to automatically calculate order quantities based on predictive analytics so that I can minimize overstock and stockouts, ensuring I meet customer demand without manually adjusting orders."

Description

This requirement involves the development of an algorithm that analyzes historical sales data, customer behavior, and market trends to calculate the optimal order quantity for each product. The predictive algorithm will take into account seasonal fluctuations, promotions, and other external factors affecting demand, ensuring retailers can maintain optimal stock levels and reduce the risk of stockouts or excess inventory. By automating this process, the feature significantly enhances the efficiency of stock management within InventaPro and allows retailers to make data-driven decisions for their inventory orders.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer utilizes InventaPro dashboard to generate predictive order quantities for the upcoming month, allowing for data-driven decisions for stock replenishment.

Given that the retailer has entered historical sales data and set specific parameters, when they request predictive order quantity calculations, then the system should return optimal order quantities for each product based on the analysis of that data.

During a promotional period, a retailer observes a spike in sales and uses the predictive order quantity calculation to adjust their stock ahead of the expected demand.

Given that the retailer is in a promotional event timeframe, when the predictive order quantity calculation is executed, then it must adjust order quantities to reflect a 20% increase in predicted sales due to the promotion.

A retailer needs to check the accuracy of the predictive order quantity calculations over the past quarter to identify any discrepancies between predicted and actual sales.

Given that the retailer accesses the reports from the last quarter, when they compare predicted order quantities to actual sales data, then discrepancies should not exceed 10%, ensuring high accuracy of the predictive algorithm.

Retailer modifies the parameters used in the predictive algorithm to test how changes in sales velocity impact order quantities.

Given that the retailer changes the parameters such as seasonality and sales trends, when they run the predictive order calculation again, then the system should produce updated order quantities reflective of the new input values.

After implementing the predictive order quantity feature, the retailer reports observed changes in stock levels over several months of usage.

Given that the retailer uses the predictive order quantity calculation for three months, when they review stock levels, they should observe a 30% reduction in stockouts and a 25% reduction in excess inventory.

A retailer integrates InventaPro with an e-commerce platform to ensure online and offline sales data are utilized in predictive order calculations.

Given that the integration is set up, when the retailer looks at predicted order quantities, then the calculations should include data from both online and offline sales channels for accuracy.

Retailer conducts a training session for staff on interpreting the results of the predictive order quantity calculations provided by InventaPro.

Given that the training is underway, when staff members ask questions about the results, then they should correctly interpret at least 80% of the predictive order quantity insights.

Seamless Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a retailer, I want the inventory data to sync in real-time with my e-commerce platform so that I can ensure my stock information is always accurate and avoid losing sales due to overselling or stockouts."

Description

This requirement entails creating robust API connections to popular e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento. This integration will ensure that stock levels are continuously updated in real-time across both online and offline sales channels. By providing seamless synchronization of inventory data, retailers can avoid discrepancies between actual stock levels and those reflected on their sales platforms, thus optimizing the overall inventory management process and improving customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User connects InventaPro to Shopify to synchronize inventory levels.

Given that the user has authenticated and connected their Shopify store, when a product's stock level is updated in InventaPro, then the stock level in Shopify should reflect this change within 5 minutes.

Retailer updates stock levels through InventaPro after an offline sale.

Given that a sale occurred offline and was recorded in InventaPro, when the stock level is adjusted accordingly, then the stock levels across all connected e-commerce platforms should be updated to reflect this change.

User seeks to check the inventory status across multiple platforms after integrating InventaPro.

Given that the user has initiated an inventory check after integration, when they view the real-time dashboard, then the dashboard should display accurate stock levels synchronized across all connected e-commerce platforms without discrepancies.

User experiences a stockout situation and uses InventaPro to reorder products.

Given that the stock level for a product has reached zero, when the user initiates an automatic reordering process, then the system must generate a purchase order for that product based on the predefined reorder quantity settings.

Retailer wants to ensure that stock levels are accurate during peak shopping times.

Given that high sales traffic is expected, when the retailer reviews their inventory management metrics in InventaPro, then the system should display up-to-date inventory levels reflecting real-time sales and restocking activities throughout the peak period.

User integrates InventaPro with WooCommerce and performs a product update.

Given that a product in InventaPro is updated with new pricing information, when the update is saved, then the new pricing should automatically be reflected in the WooCommerce store within 5 minutes without manual intervention.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Inventory Insights

"As a retailer, I want an easy-to-understand dashboard that displays my inventory performance metrics so that I can quickly make informed decisions about my stock management without getting lost in complex data."

Description

This requirement involves the design and development of a user-friendly dashboard that aggregates and visualizes key inventory metrics, such as stock levels, turnover rates, and sales forecasts. The dashboard will provide retailers with a clear and intuitive overview of their inventory performance, allowing them to quickly identify trends and make informed decisions. This enhanced visibility will enable retailers to optimize their inventory strategy based on real-time insights, ultimately driving better business outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Overview for Real-Time Inventory Tracking

Given the retailer is logged into InventaPro, when they access the dashboard, then they should see real-time updates on stock levels, turnover rates, and sales forecasts with visual charts and graphs.

User Interaction with Dashboard Metrics

Given the dashboard displays inventory metrics, when the user clicks on any metric, then a detailed breakdown of the selected metric should be displayed with historical data and trend analysis.

Mobile Accessibility of the Dashboard

Given the retailer accesses the dashboard from a mobile device, when they navigate to the dashboard, then it should be fully responsive and display all key metrics clearly without loss of functionality.

Alerts for Low Stock Levels

Given the retailer's inventory falls below a predefined threshold, when this occurs, then a notification should be triggered on the dashboard and an email alert should be sent to the retailer.

Integration with Third-Party Sales Platforms

Given the retailer uses multiple sales platforms, when they sync their accounts with InventaPro, then the dashboard should automatically update inventory metrics reflecting online and offline sales in real-time.

User Customization of Dashboard Layout

Given the retailer wants to personalize their dashboard, when they rearrange, add, or remove widgets, then their layout preferences should be saved for future logins.

Performance of Dashboard Load Times

Given the retailer accesses the dashboard, when they initiate the dashboard, then it should load within three seconds, ensuring a smooth user experience.

Automated Reorder Notifications

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated notifications when my inventory levels are low so that I can reorder products in a timely manner and maintain optimal stock levels."

Description

This requirement focuses on implementing an automated notification system that alerts retailers when stock levels fall below predefined thresholds. Retailers can customize these thresholds for each product based on their unique sales patterns and inventory strategy. The system will ensure that retailers do not miss critical reorder points, thereby reducing the risk of stockouts and enabling timely replenishment of inventory.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives a notification when stock for a product falls below the predefined threshold set in the InventaPro dashboard.

Given a product is set with a predefined threshold, When the stock level drops below that threshold, Then the retailer receives an automated notification via email and mobile app.

Retailer can customize the stock threshold for multiple products in the InventaPro dashboard.

Given the retailer is on the inventory management page, When they select a product and adjust its threshold setting, Then the system updates the threshold and reflects the change in the inventory overview.

Retailer wants to ensure notifications are not missed during busy seasons or promotional events.

Given the retailer has configured their notification preferences, When a stock level alert is triggered, Then the system sends notifications through multiple channels (email, SMS, mobile app) based on the retailer's settings.

Retailer checks the notification log to see past alerts received for stock levels.

Given the retailer is on the notification log page, When they access the log, Then they can view a list of all notifications received, including date, time, and product affected.

New user onboarding includes setting stock level thresholds and notification preferences.

Given a new retailer is registering for InventaPro, When they complete the onboarding process, Then they are guided to set threshold levels and notification preferences for their products before accessing the dashboard.

Integration with e-commerce platforms reflects real-time stock level changes and updates notifications accordingly.

Given InventaPro is integrated with an e-commerce platform, When stock levels change due to sales, Then the thresholds and notification system automatically adjust to reflect these changes in real time.

Bulk Import and Export of Inventory Data

"As a retailer, I want the ability to import and export my inventory data in bulk so that I can quickly update multiple products at once without manual entry, making inventory management more efficient."

Description

This requirement involves the development of functionality that allows retailers to bulk import and export their inventory data through CSV or Excel files. This feature will facilitate easier management of large inventories, enabling retailers to update product information, stock levels, and pricing in bulk rather than one-by-one. By streamlining this process, retailers can save time and effort in maintaining their inventory records, especially during large stock adjustments or seasonal changes.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer Bulk Uploads Inventory Data Using CSV File

Given a retailer has a valid CSV file with inventory data, when they attempt to upload the file, then the system should validate the file format and structure before processing it for import.

Retailer Exports Inventory Data to Excel File

Given a retailer is on the inventory management page, when they select the option to export data, then the system should generate an Excel file containing all current inventory items with correct formatting and headers.

Bulk Update Stock Levels from Uploaded Data

Given a retailer uploads a CSV file with updated stock values, when the import is processed, then the stock levels for the corresponding products should be updated in the inventory management system without errors.

System Handles Errors in Bulk Import

Given a retailer attempts to upload a CSV file containing errors (e.g., missing required fields), when the import is processed, then the system should reject the upload and provide a detailed report of the errors for correction.

Retailer Confirms Successful Import of Inventory Data

Given a retailer uploads a valid inventory file, when the import is completed, then the system should display a confirmation message indicating the number of products successfully updated and those skipped due to errors or duplicates.

Bulk Import Performance Under Heavy Load

Given a large CSV file with thousands of product entries, when the retailer uploads the file, then the system should process the import within a predefined time limit (e.g., 5 minutes) without crashing or significant delays.

Supplier Performance Analytics

Supplier Performance Analytics evaluates and tracks the reliability and effectiveness of suppliers in meeting order quantities and delivery timelines. By utilizing this feature, retailers can make data-driven decisions when choosing suppliers, ensuring a more efficient supply chain and reducing the risk of delays in replenishment.

Requirements

Supplier Reliability Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to see a comprehensive dashboard of my suppliers' performance metrics so that I can easily identify which suppliers are reliable and which ones need to be improved upon."

Description

The Supplier Reliability Dashboard provides retailers with an intuitive interface to visualize supplier performance data, including metrics on order fulfillment rates, delivery times, and quality of goods. This dashboard integrates seamlessly with the existing InventaPro system, allowing users to filter and sort supplier data, enabling quick access to critical insights. By offering a centralized view of supplier performance, retailers can easily identify underperforming suppliers and make informed strategic decisions, ultimately enhancing the efficiency of the supply chain. The dashboard will display historical trends, comparison metrics, and supplier rankings based on performance, thus empowering users to establish better supplier relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Overview Access

Given the retailer is logged into the Supplier Reliability Dashboard, when they select a supplier from the list, then they will see detailed metrics including order fulfillment rates, delivery times, and quality ratings displayed in a clear format.

Historical Trend Visualization

Given the Supplier Reliability Dashboard is opened, when the retailer selects the 'Historical Trends' option for a specific supplier, then a graph displaying performance over the past six months will be presented, allowing comparison of trends.

Sorting and Filtering Capabilities

Given the Supplier Reliability Dashboard, when the retailer applies filters for delivery times and sorts suppliers by order fulfillment rates, then the resulting supplier list should reflect the selected criteria without error.

Supplier Comparison Functionality

Given multiple suppliers are visible on the Supplier Reliability Dashboard, when the retailer selects two or more suppliers for comparison, then a side-by-side performance comparison will be generated showing key performance indicators (KPIs).

Performance Ranking Display

Given the Supplier Reliability Dashboard is active, when the retailer looks for supplier rankings based on performance, then the ranking list should accurately reflect the top-performing suppliers based on order fulfillment and delivery metrics.

User Access and Permissions

Given the retailer's team consists of various roles, when the user accesses the Supplier Reliability Dashboard, then their ability to view, edit, and analyze supplier performance data will be determined by their assigned role and permissions.

Performance Alert Notifications

Given the Supplier Reliability Dashboard is functional, when a supplier falls below a defined performance threshold, then the retailer will receive an alert notification highlighting the underperformance to initiate action.

Automated Supplier Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive real-time alerts about supplier issues so that I can react quickly and minimize disruptions in my supply chain."

Description

Automated Supplier Alerts notify retailers in real-time of any discrepancies or issues related to supplier performance such as late deliveries or order shortages. This requirement involves setting up an alert system within InventaPro that automatically monitors supplier-related KPIs and sends notifications via email or through the app when critical thresholds are met. By keeping retailers informed promptly, this feature allows them to take immediate corrective actions, minimizing disruptions in the supply chain. Retailers can customize the alert settings based on their specific criteria and preferences, ensuring that they receive the most relevant information.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier performance discrepancies trigger automated alerts to the retailer.

Given the supplier's delivery timeframe has lapsed, When the alert system detects the delay, Then an automated notification is sent to the retailer's registered email and app notification is displayed.

Retailers can customize alert settings based on specific criteria including order shortage and delivery delay.

Given the retailer is on the alert settings page, When they set custom thresholds for alerts, Then those thresholds are saved in the system without errors.

Real-time notifications are sent for multiple suppliers experiencing issues simultaneously.

Given multiple suppliers have delivery issues, When the alert system triggers notifications, Then all affected suppliers' alerts are sent out within 5 minutes of detection.

Retailers receive notifications for historical supplier performance for better decision making.

Given the retailer accesses the supplier performance analytics, When they review the last month’s alerts, Then they should see a comprehensive summary including alert triggers and outcomes for those suppliers.

Automated alerts are tested for performance during peak business hours.

Given high order volumes during peak hours, When supplier alerts are triggered, Then system performance remains unaffected, providing timely notifications without lag.

Notifications include actionable insights for resolving supply chain issues.

Given an alert notification is sent, When the retailer receives the alert, Then the notification includes suggestions for potential corrective actions and supplier contact information.

System logs track all sent alerts for compliance and audit purposes.

Given alerts have been sent out, When the retailer or administrator accesses the alert logs, Then all sent alert records are available and correctly timestamped in the system.

Supplier Performance Report Generation

"As a retailer, I want to generate detailed performance reports on my suppliers so that I can analyze their effectiveness over time and discuss improvements with them."

Description

The Supplier Performance Report Generation feature allows retailers to generate comprehensive reports detailing supplier performance over selected periods. This feature will enable users to export reports in various formats (PDF, Excel) and includes visual data representations such as graphs and charts for better analysis. Retailers can summarize key performance indicators (KPIs) like on-time delivery rate, fulfillment accuracy, and overall satisfaction score in these reports. The ability to create and share these reports will facilitate discussions with suppliers and internal stakeholders, enhancing transparency and accountability within the supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria

Generating a Supplier Performance Report for a specific quarter to evaluate supplier reliability.

Given that the user selects a specific supplier and time period, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the system should create a report with accurate KPI data, including on-time delivery rate and fulfillment accuracy, that can be exported in both PDF and Excel formats.

Sharing the Supplier Performance Report with internal stakeholders for performance discussion.

Given that the report has been generated, when the user clicks on 'Share Report', then the system should allow the user to enter email addresses and successfully send the report to the specified recipients without errors.

Viewing the generated Supplier Performance Report with graphs and charts for enhanced data visualization.

Given that the user has generated the report, when they open the report, then the system should display visual data representations such as graphs and charts alongside the numerical KPIs for clear analysis.

Filtering the suppliers displayed in the report based on performance metrics.

Given that the user views the Supplier Performance Report, when they apply filters for on-time delivery rate or fulfillment accuracy, then the system should refresh the report using the selected filters and show only the relevant suppliers.

Accessing the history of Supplier Performance Reports generated in the past.

Given that the user navigates to the report history section, when they select a previous report, then the system should display the selected report with its respective KPIs and visualizations intact.

Ensuring the accuracy of data presented in the Supplier Performance Report.

Given that the report is generated, when the user cross-references the report against live inventory and supplier data, then all reported KPIs should match the corresponding data without discrepancies.

Customizing the report parameters before generation.

Given that the user is on the report generation page, when they add or modify the report parameters such as time period or included KPIs, then these changes should be saved correctly and reflected in the generated report.

Supplier Comparison Tool

"As a retailer, I want to compare different suppliers based on their performance metrics so that I can make informed decisions on which suppliers to choose for my inventory needs."

Description

The Supplier Comparison Tool enables retailers to compare multiple suppliers based on essential performance metrics side by side. This feature provides a user-friendly interface where retailers can select several suppliers and view a comparative analysis of their performance metrics, such as pricing, delivery speeds, and quality ratings. This helps retailers identify the most suitable suppliers for their business needs quickly and effectively while fostering competitive pricing and service levels among suppliers. Integration with the Supplier Reliability Dashboard ensures that users have access to up-to-date information while making comparisons.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers need to compare multiple suppliers to determine which fulfills their inventory needs most effectively before making a purchasing decision.

Given that the retailer selects multiple suppliers from the Supplier Performance Analytics, when they access the Supplier Comparison Tool, then they should see a side-by-side analysis of each supplier's pricing, delivery speeds, and quality ratings.

A retailer wants to identify which supplier consistently provides the best delivery speed to ensure timely inventory replenishment for peak sales periods.

Given that the retailer has performance data for several suppliers, when they filter the comparison by delivery speed, then the suppliers should be ranked from fastest to slowest delivery time, with metrics displayed accurately for each supplier.

After reviewing supplier performance metrics, the retailer decides to evaluate feedback from various internal teams regarding supplier quality.

Given that the retailer has entered feedback scores from relevant internal teams into the Supplier Comparison Tool, when the retailer reviews the comparative analysis, then the quality ratings should reflect those feedback scores accurately.

A retailer is preparing to make bulk orders and needs to ensure they are getting the best price possible across suppliers.

Given that the retailer inputs the desired quantity for a bulk order, when they compare prices across all selected suppliers, then the Supplier Comparison Tool should display the total cost for each supplier, including any shipping fees, allowing for a clear price comparison.

The retailer utilizes the Supplier Comparison Tool during a team meeting with stakeholders to discuss supplier selection.

Given that multiple stakeholders are present during the meeting, when the retailer accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool, then the tool should support real-time updates to the data and allow for collaborative decision-making with shared access.

A retailer needs to review supplier metrics periodically to track changes in supplier performance over time.

Given that the retailer accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool monthly, when they review supplier performance data, then the tool should provide historical data for the last six months, allowing for trend analysis associated with supplier reliability and performance metrics.

A retailer wishes to integrate the Supplier Comparison Tool with the Supplier Reliability Dashboard for real-time analytics.

Given that the Supplier Comparison Tool is linked to the Supplier Reliability Dashboard, when the retailer accesses supplier performance metrics, then both tools should display synchronized information, reflecting the most current data without discrepancies.

Supplier Feedback Loop

"As a retailer, I want a feedback system for evaluating supplier performance so that I can communicate my satisfaction levels and suggest improvements to my supplier relationships."

Description

The Supplier Feedback Loop feature facilitates communication between retailers and their suppliers, allowing retailers to provide feedback on performance and service directly through InventaPro. This feature will include an easy-to-use interface where retailers can submit ratings and comments regarding various aspects of supplier performance, following each transaction or delivery. This ongoing feedback process will help suppliers understand areas for improvement and will enhance collaboration and transparency within the supply chain, ultimately leading to stronger partnerships.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer accesses the Supplier Feedback Loop interface after receiving a product delivery to submit feedback to their supplier regarding the quality and timeliness of the delivery.

Given the retailer is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Supplier Feedback Loop and fill out the feedback form with a rating and comment, then the feedback is successfully submitted and stored in the supplier's performance records.

Retailer views the Supplier Feedback Loop dashboard to analyze the feedback submitted to suppliers and track overall supplier performance over a specific timeframe.

Given the retailer has submitted feedback, when they access the Supplier Feedback Loop dashboard, then they should see a summary report showing average ratings, comments, and trends in supplier performance based on their submitted feedback.

Supplier receives the feedback submitted by the retailer and reviews it to understand areas for improvement.

Given the supplier has access to InventaPro, when a retailer submits feedback, then the supplier receives a notification and can view the details of the feedback including ratings and comments within their interface.

Retailer provides feedback on multiple aspects of supplier performance after several transactions.

Given the retailer has completed multiple transactions with a supplier, when they submit feedback on each transaction, then all feedback submissions are logged separately along with timestamps and associated transaction details.

System generates an alert for the retailer if a supplier consistently receives low ratings over multiple feedback submissions.

Given the retailer has submitted multiple feedback responses, when a supplier’s average rating drops below a predefined threshold, then the system should send an alert notification to the retailer prompting them to review the supplier's performance.

Retailer edits a previously submitted feedback to provide updated comments about a supplier's performance after additional evaluation.

Given the retailer has previously submitted feedback, when they access the feedback history and select the specific feedback to edit, then they should be able to modify their comments and ratings, and save the changes successfully without duplicating the original entry.

Forecast Accuracy Scoring

Forecast Accuracy Scoring assesses the precision of demand predictions made by the InventaPro Predictive Replenishment feature. This valuable feedback allows retailers to fine-tune their inventory strategies and algorithms, ultimately leading to improved accuracy in predicting future stock needs.

Requirements

Real-Time Forecast Feedback

"As a retailer, I want real-time feedback on my demand predictions so that I can adjust my inventory levels promptly based on actual performance and avoid stockouts or overstock situations."

Description

The Real-Time Forecast Feedback requirement allows InventaPro to continuously monitor and analyze the accuracy of demand predictions as they occur. By integrating real-time data processing, the system will provide immediate feedback to retailers on the inflation or deflation of stock needs based on actual sales trends. This functionality enhances the product's capability to refine future demand forecasts more accurately. Retailers will benefit from the agility to adjust their inventory strategies promptly, thereby minimizing stock wastage and missing sales opportunities. Enhanced responsiveness to inventory levels boosts overall stock management effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time monitoring of inventory levels during peak sales periods

Given that the retailer has access to the InventaPro dashboard, when a product's sales exceed the predicted demand threshold, then the system should alert the retailer within 5 minutes with suggestions for inventory adjustments.

Feedback loop for adjusting demand forecasts based on actual sales data

Given that sales data has been collected for a product over a defined period, when the retailer reviews the forecast accuracy scoring, then the system should display the percentage accuracy of the demand predictions compared to actual sales.

Integration with e-commerce platforms for synchronized stock updates

Given that sales occur both online and offline, when a sale is made through an integrated e-commerce platform, then the stock levels in InventaPro should be updated in real-time with a maximum delay of 2 minutes.

Alert system for stockout situations

Given that the inventory level of a product reaches a predefined minimum threshold, when this condition is met, then the retailer should receive an email and in-app notification alerting them of the stockout risk within 10 minutes.

Assessment of inventory adjustments following real-time feedback

Given that real-time forecast feedback has been implemented, when adjustments to inventory levels are made based on the feedback, then the retailer should be able to see the impact of these adjustments reflected in the next forecast accuracy score report.

Generating reports on forecast accuracy over time

Given that sufficient sales and inventory data has been collected, when the retailer requests a report on forecast accuracy, then the report should include an analysis of forecasting performance trends over the last month and recommendations for improvement.

User interface for viewing real-time stock alerts and feedback

Given that the retailer accesses the InventaPro user interface, when real-time stock alerts and feedback are generated, then these alerts should be prominently displayed on the dashboard with clear call-to-action options.

Historical Accuracy Reporting

"As a retailer, I want to access historical accuracy reports so that I can analyze my past predictions and refine my forecasting methods for future inventory management."

Description

The Historical Accuracy Reporting requirement involves the generation of detailed reports on how past demand predictions compared to actual sales data. This feature will allow retailers to access snapshots of forecasting accuracy over specified time periods, enabling easier identification of patterns and insights into prediction performance. Comprehensive historical data analysis empowers retailers to strategically modify their forecasting methods, driving improvements in accuracy over time. This capability integrates seamlessly with existing dashboards while ensuring retailers have access to essential metrics for their decision-making process.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Accuracy Reporting for Q1 Sales Predictions

Given a retailer accesses the Historical Accuracy Reporting feature for Q1, When they select the date range from January 1 to March 31, Then they should receive a detailed report showing at least 90% of past demand predictions compared against actual sales data, including a visual representation of accuracy trends over the selected period.

Filter Historical Data by Product Category

Given the retailer is viewing the Historical Accuracy Reports, When they apply a filter for a specific product category, Then the report should display only the accuracy data relevant to that category, ensuring the average accuracy percentage and visualization are updated accordingly.

Export Historical Accuracy Report

Given the retailer has generated a Historical Accuracy Report, When they click the export button, Then the report should be downloadable in both PDF and Excel formats without any data loss or formatting errors.

View Historical Accuracy Trends Over Time

Given the retailer accesses the Historical Accuracy Reporting feature, When they select a custom date range, Then the report should display a trend graph illustrating the fluctuation of accuracy scores over that time, with available metrics highlighted for maximum clarity.

Access Historical Accuracy Report from Dashboard

Given a retailer is logged into InventaPro, When they navigate to the dashboard, Then they should see a quick link or widget that provides a snapshot of the latest Historical Accuracy Report, allowing them to access detailed reports easily.

Custom Forecasting Parameters

"As a retailer, I want to customize the parameters of my forecasting model so that I can improve its accuracy based on the specific conditions of my business."

Description

The Custom Forecasting Parameters feature allows retailers to define specific variables and metrics that influence demand predictions. Retailers can tailor the AI-driven algorithms to account for unique aspects of their business, such as seasonal trends, promotional campaigns, or market conditions. This requirement empowers retailers to optimize their predictive accuracy significantly, as they can input situational variables that the standard algorithm may not consider. The integration should be user-friendly, providing an intuitive interface to customize parameters that affect stock levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers define custom forecasting parameters during the setup to optimize demand predictions for their unique business context.

Given a retailer accesses the Custom Forecasting Parameters feature, When they input unique variables like seasonal trends, Then the system should save the parameters and apply them to subsequent demand forecasts accurately.

Retailers use the intuitive interface to adjust forecasting parameters based on an upcoming promotional campaign.

Given a retailer modifies forecasting parameters to include a promotional campaign, When they click 'Save', Then the adjusted parameters should be reflected in the forecasting calculation within 5 seconds.

Retailers assess the impact of the customized parameters on demand forecast accuracy over a specified period.

Given a retailer reviews forecast accuracy reports, When they look at the historical data for a period after customization, Then the report should display a minimum of 15% improvement in forecast accuracy compared to the previous standard algorithm results.

Administrators access user feedback on the Custom Forecasting Parameters feature.

Given administrators review user feedback, When they check the feedback ratings, Then at least 80% of the feedback should indicate that users find the feature easy to use and effective in improving forecasting accuracy.

Retailers want to ensure that invalid inputs are handled correctly by the Custom Forecasting Parameters feature.

Given a retailer attempts to enter invalid parameters, When they input alphabets in a numeric field, Then the system should return an error message indicating the field requires a numeric input and not save the invalid parameters.

Retailers explore previously set custom parameters to make comparative analyses between different input sets.

Given a retailer navigates to the Custom Forecasting Parameters section, When they select a previously saved set of parameters, Then they should see all previous values displayed clearly and be able to revert back to this set without data loss.

Alerts for Prediction Deviations

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts when there are significant discrepancies in my demand predictions so that I can take immediate actions to adjust my inventory accordingly."

Description

The Alerts for Prediction Deviations requirement entails the creation of a notification system that informs retailers whenever there are significant discrepancies between predicted and actual demand. These alerts will be triggered using predefined thresholds set by the retailers for stock levels. This feature allows retailers to respond swiftly to unexpected changes, ensuring they can take corrective actions before the situation escalates, thereby protecting revenue and maintaining customer satisfaction. This alert system integrates with email and mobile notifications, providing users with timely updates.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives an alert when actual demand exceeds predicted demand by a predefined threshold during a peak sales period.

Given the retailer has set a threshold of 20% for demand deviations, When actual sales exceed forecasts by 20%, Then an email and push notification alert is sent to the retailer immediately indicating the deviation.

Retailer receives an alert when actual demand falls below predicted demand by a predefined threshold during a low sales period.

Given the retailer has set a threshold of 15% for demand deviations, When actual sales fall short of forecasts by 15%, Then an email and push notification alert is sent to the retailer immediately indicating the shortfall.

The alert system allows the retailer to customize the thresholds for different products based on historical data.

Given the retailer is using the threshold settings, When they adjust the threshold for a specific product, Then the system saves the changes and applies the new thresholds for alert generation.

Retailer reviews a log of previous alerts to analyze past prediction deviations.

Given the retailer accesses the alert history page, When they request to view the last 30 alerts, Then the system displays a detailed log with timestamps, product names, deviation percentages, and actions taken.

The alert notification system integrates with the retailer’s existing CRM to log alerts for action tracking.

Given the retailer has connected their CRM with InventaPro, When an alert is sent for a demand deviation, Then the alert is automatically logged in the CRM with a timestamp and relevant details for follow-up.

Retailer receives a summary report of all alerts sent in the past week to evaluate performance.

Given the retailer requests a weekly summary report, When the report is generated, Then it includes the number of alerts sent, types of deviations, and recommendations for inventory adjustments.

Retailer receives alerts on preferred communication channels based on their settings.

Given the retailer has specified their preferred communication channels for alerts, When alerts are triggered, Then notifications are sent via the configured methods (email, SMS, push notification) as per setup.

User Training and Support Documentation

"As a retailer, I want comprehensive training and support documentation so that I can understand and fully utilize the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature to enhance my inventory management."

Description

The User Training and Support Documentation requirement focuses on providing comprehensive guides and training materials for retailers to effectively utilize the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature. This includes tutorial videos, detailed user manuals, and FAQs covering all aspects of the feature's functionality. The goal of this requirement is to ensure that retailers maximize the benefits of the system, encouraging overall usability and confidence in forecasting capabilities. Integration with customer support services is essential for ongoing assistance, allowing for a seamless user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Forecast Accuracy Scoring documentation through the InventaPro help center and navigates to the user manual section.

Given the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the help center and select 'User Manuals', then all relevant user manuals for the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature should display with correct and updated content.

A retailer watches the tutorial video on using the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature to understand its functionality.

Given the user selects the tutorial video for Forecast Accuracy Scoring, when the video is played, then it should load without errors and provide clear, informative content that explains all features of the scoring system.

User checks the FAQs related to the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature after encountering an issue.

Given the user navigates to the FAQs for the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature, when they search for common issues, then the relevant FAQs should appear, providing clear and practical solutions.

Retailer contacts customer support for assistance with the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature.

Given the user initiates a ticket or chat with customer support about the Forecast Accuracy Scoring, when they describe their issue, then support should respond within 24 hours with accurate and helpful guidance.

A user reviews the update history of the Forecast Accuracy Scoring documentation.

Given the user accesses the update log, when they view the history for the Forecast Accuracy Scoring documentation, then the log should clearly show recent changes, dates, and user feedback, ensuring transparency.

Multiple users utilize the training materials for onboarding new staff on the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature.

Given a new staff member is onboarded, when they use the provided training materials, then they should be able to effectively utilize the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature without additional assistance from a supervisor.

A retailer implements changes in their inventory based on insights gained from the Forecast Accuracy Scoring feature after reviewing the user documentation.

Given the retailer follows the guidelines in the user documentation, when they adjust their inventory based on forecast accuracy, then they should experience improved stock management results within the next two weeks as measured by reduced stockouts and overstock incidents.

Scenario Planning Tools

Scenario Planning Tools empower retailers to simulate various supply and demand situations, allowing them to explore potential inventory outcomes based on changing market conditions. This proactive feature helps users strategize and prepare for unforeseen circumstances, ensuring they can quickly adapt their orders and stock levels as needed.

Requirements

Dynamic Demand Simulation

"As a retailer, I want to simulate various demand scenarios so that I can better anticipate changes and optimize my inventory levels before they affect my sales."

Description

The Dynamic Demand Simulation requirement enables retailers to create multiple scenarios reflecting varying demand patterns based on historical data, seasonal trends, and market dynamics. This functionality allows users to visualize potential inventory levels required to meet anticipated demand while minimizing stockouts and excess inventory. Each simulation can incorporate specific variables such as promotional periods, economic fluctuations, and consumer behavior changes. By leveraging advanced algorithms, this feature integrates seamlessly within the InventaPro platform, driving better decision-making for inventory management. The benefit is an enhanced ability for retailers to proactively manage inventory, adapt to changes, and optimize operations, ultimately leading to improved customer satisfaction and reduced costs.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a Dynamic Demand Simulation to forecast inventory levels for the upcoming holiday season based on historical sales data and current market trends.

Given the user has selected a holiday season in the Dynamic Demand Simulation, when they input historical sales data and market trend variables, then the system should generate a forecast report displaying anticipated inventory levels, highlighting stockouts and excess inventory risks.

A retailer wants to analyze the impact of a promotional event on their inventory levels using the Dynamic Demand Simulation feature.

Given that the user has set up a promotional event scenario within the Dynamic Demand Simulation, when they run the simulation, then the system should provide a detailed analysis of inventory needs before, during, and after the promotional event, with graphical visualizations and numerical forecasts.

A user seeks to visualize multiple scenarios with varying economic conditions to understand their impact on inventory management.

Given the user has created various economic fluctuation scenarios in the Dynamic Demand Simulation, when they select and compare these scenarios, then the system should display comparative charts showcasing potential inventory levels and the implications of each economic condition.

The user needs to save and retrieve multiple Dynamic Demand Simulations for future analysis.

Given the user has created several simulations, when they attempt to save their simulations, then the system should allow them to store these simulations and retrieve them later without data loss.

A retailer is monitoring the performance of their Dynamic Demand Simulation results in real-time against actual sales data.

Given the simulation has been executed, when the user views the dashboard, then the system should compare the forecast results with actual sales data and display any discrepancies along with potential causes.

User manual and training materials are required to assist new users in understanding the Dynamic Demand Simulation feature.

Given that the user accesses the help section, when they select training materials for the Dynamic Demand Simulation feature, then the system should provide comprehensive guides, FAQs, and video tutorials to facilitate understanding.

A retailer wants to modify an existing Dynamic Demand Simulation to reflect changes in consumer behavior.

Given the user selects an existing simulation, when they make adjustments to variables related to consumer behavior, then the updated simulation should reflect the new conditions and generate an adjusted forecast report.

Supply Chain Impact Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to assess the impact of potential supply chain disruptions on my inventory so that I can take proactive measures to avoid stockouts and maintain customer service."

Description

The Supply Chain Impact Analysis requirement focuses on evaluating the effects of potential supply chain disruptions on inventory availability. This feature allows users to assess how changes in supplier performance, transportation delays, or global events might influence their stock levels. It integrates with InventaPro's existing supply chain data and utilizes predictive analytics to project potential inventory shortages or overstocks. This capability provides retailers with the insights needed to adjust orders, prioritize sources, or align strategies with supplier capabilities. Ultimately, the analysis enhances retailers' preparedness and resilience in facing supply chain challenges, contributing to seamless operations and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers utilize the Supply Chain Impact Analysis tool to predict inventory shortages following a significant transportation disruption, such as a natural disaster affecting shipping routes.

Given a scenario of a transportation disruption, when the retailer inputs the known data about the delay, then the Supply Chain Impact Analysis must provide predicted shortages within 24 hours.

A retailer examines the predictive analytics of the Supply Chain Impact Analysis tool after receiving late shipments from a primary supplier to assess the impact on stock levels of high-demand items.

Given data of late shipments from the primary supplier, when the retailer selects the affected stock items in the Supply Chain Impact Analysis, then the tool should display potential stock levels along with recommendations for order adjustments.

A user wants to simulate the impact of a supplier going out of business on their inventory availability across all product categories.

Given a scenario where a supplier is marked as out of business, when the retailer runs the Supply Chain Impact Analysis, then the output should reflect inventory levels impacted by this change and suggest alternative supplier options.

A retailer uses the Supply Chain Impact Analysis tool to strategically manage stock levels during peak sales seasons, forecasting potential overstock situations based on past sales data.

Given seasonal sales data, when the retailer applies the Supply Chain Impact Analysis tool, then it should accurately predict overstock scenarios and provide actionable insights to manage stock effectively.

After a global event affecting multiple suppliers, a retailer utilizes the Supply Chain Impact Analysis to understand its effect on the product availability timeline.

Given the occurrence of a global event, when the retailer inputs related supplier performance data into the Supply Chain Impact Analysis, then it must generate a timeline of potential delays and alternative sourcing options within 48 hours.

Scenario Comparison Tools

"As a retailer, I want to compare different inventory scenarios to determine the most effective inventory strategies for my business operations."

Description

The Scenario Comparison Tools requirement allows retailers to compare multiple inventory scenarios side by side, visualizing differences in projected stock levels, costs, and service levels. This feature enables a straightforward analysis of various strategies, helping users identify the most effective approach to their supply chain and sales strategy. The tool will leverage charts and graphs for clear visualization, enhancing understanding at a glance. Furthermore, it allows for easy adjustments to parameters within each scenario for quick revisions based on changing assumptions. This capability supports informed decision-making, equipping retailers with the necessary insights to choose the best inventory management strategies, improving efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer uses the Scenario Comparison Tools to evaluate the impact of changing customer demand on stock levels during a seasonal promotion.

Given that multiple scenarios are set up for varying demand inputs, when the retailer accesses the Scenario Comparison Tools, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of projected stock levels, costs, and service levels for each scenario.

The retailer adjusts parameters within a scenario to account for a sudden increase in supplier costs.

Given that the retailer has selected a specific scenario, when they modify the supplier cost parameter and save the changes, then the system should update the visualizations and projections in real-time to reflect the new costs.

A retailer is analyzing multiple supply chain strategies using the Scenario Comparison Tools during an inventory review meeting.

Given that the retailer has generated multiple scenarios, when they present the comparison results using charts and graphs, then all stakeholders should be able to clearly understand the differences in inventory strategies at a glance, including costs and service levels.

User wants to determine the best strategy for inventory replenishment based on past sales data and future demand predictions.

Given that all relevant sales data has been input into the system, when the user runs the comparison for historical performance vs projected demand scenarios, then the tool should identify and highlight the most effective inventory management strategy based on predefined success metrics.

The retailer wants to simulate the impact of a potential supplier disruption on their inventory levels.

Given that the retailer has created scenarios addressing potential supplier disruptions, when they run the comparison tool, then the outcomes should highlight projected stock levels and potential stockouts clearly, informing the retailer's contingency planning.

A retailer needs to prepare for an upcoming sales event and compare scenarios for aggressive stock replenishment versus conservative stock levels.

Given that the retailer has defined two distinct scenarios for stock replenishment strategies, when the retailer views the comparison, then the tool should provide clear metrics on cost implications and expected service levels for both strategies to aid decision-making.

Historical Data Utilization

"As a retailer, I want to utilize historical sales data to predict future inventory needs so that I can optimize my stock levels and avoid overstocking or stockouts."

Description

The Historical Data Utilization requirement enables the platform to leverage past sales and inventory data to inform future scenario planning and simulations. This functionality encourages the use of advanced analytics to identify trends and patterns, which can significantly improve the accuracy of demand forecasting and inventory optimization strategies. By integrating seamlessly with InventaPro’s existing data architecture, historical data can be easily analyzed and applied to current inventory decision-making processes. It fosters enhanced foresight in inventory management, ensuring users make more informed decisions that ultimately lead to improved stock management, reduced waste, and enhanced profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer simulates sales trends during a seasonal promotion using historical data to refine stock levels for the upcoming sales period.

Given historical sales data from previous promotions, when the retailer runs a simulation for the upcoming seasonal promotion, then the system should suggest optimal stock levels based on predicted demand changes and sales patterns.

Retailer utilizes historical inventory data to adjust stock levels in response to a sudden market change, such as a competitor's price drop.

Given past inventory performance data, when a sudden market change occurs, then the system should analyze historical data to recommend adjustments to current stock levels to maintain competitiveness.

A retailer assesses the impact of a recent supplier change using historical data to plan future purchases and avoid potential supply chain disruptions.

Given the historical performance of suppliers, when the retailer inputs a new supplier's information, then the system should provide an analysis of potential impacts on inventory levels and suggest necessary order adjustments.

Retailer reviews quarterly sales trends using historical data to optimize inventory for the next quarter.

Given historical sales data from the last four quarters, when the retailer accesses the quarterly review tool, then the system should generate a report highlighting trends and recommending inventory adjustments for the next quarter.

Using historical data, a retailer forecasts the impact of a product discontinuation on remaining inventory levels and future stock orders.

Given the historical sales data of a product being discontinued, when the retailer runs a report, then the system should simulate future inventory levels and suggest stock orders accordingly to mitigate overstock or stockouts.

A retailer needs to prepare for potential disruptions during a holiday season by analyzing past sales data to inform current inventory strategies.

Given historical sales data from previous holiday seasons, when the retailer analyzes this data through the scenario planning tools, then the system should identify potential inventory issues and provide actionable strategies to optimize stock levels.

Retailers are testing the effects of different pricing strategies on inventory levels using historical sales data.

Given historical sales data, when the retailer applies different pricing scenarios within the simulation tool, then the system should display corresponding projected inventory levels and sales outcomes for each pricing strategy.

User-Friendly Scenario Builder

"As a retailer, I want a simple tool to create and customize inventory scenarios so that I can easily engage in scenario planning without needing technical skills."

Description

The User-Friendly Scenario Builder requirement is designed to allow retailers to easily create, customize, and save various inventory scenarios without the need for technical expertise. This feature offers a simple, intuitive interface that makes scenario planning accessible for all users, regardless of their technical background. Retailers can adjust key variables like demand rates, lead times, and pricing strategies through a drag-and-drop functionality or guided templates. This democratizes the ability to strategize and empowers all users to engage in scenario planning proactively. The outcome is an enhanced overall capability among users to prepare for various market scenarios, supporting improved decision-making and agility in stock management.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer creates a new inventory scenario for the upcoming holiday season to prepare for fluctuating demand.

Given a retailer is on the User-Friendly Scenario Builder page, When they select 'Create New Scenario', Then they can input scenario name and description, adjust demand rates and lead times, and save the scenario successfully without errors.

A retailer uses the drag-and-drop functionality to adjust key inventory variables in the scenario builder.

Given the retailer is editing an existing scenario, When they drag and drop the demand variable up or down, Then the system recalculates the projected stock levels in real-time and visually displays the changes on the dashboard.

A retailer attempts to save an incomplete scenario without filling all required fields in the User-Friendly Scenario Builder.

Given the retailer has not filled in all required fields, When they attempt to click the 'Save' button, Then they receive a clear error message indicating which fields are missing and cannot save the scenario.

A retailer views their saved scenarios in the dashboard to review past inventory strategies.

Given the retailer navigates to the dashboard, When they click on 'My Scenarios', Then they see a list of saved scenarios with their corresponding details like name, date created, and last modified date.

A retailer customizes a scenario using guided templates provided in the User-Friendly Scenario Builder.

Given the retailer selects a guided template for scenario creation, When they follow the prompts to customize demand rates and supply conditions, Then the scenario is created successfully reflecting the adjustments made in the template.

A retailer tests multiple scenarios to understand possible inventory outcomes under varying market conditions.

Given the retailer has multiple scenarios saved, When they select scenarios to compare outcomes side by side, Then they can see a clear comparison of key variables like stock levels, lead times, and potential overstock/stockout alerts.

A retailer modifies an existing scenario and wishes to view historical data related to inventory performance.

Given the retailer opens an existing scenario, When they request to view historical data, Then the system presents relevant inventory performance metrics associated with that scenario, including past adjustments and outcomes.

Sustainable Replenishment Recommendations

Sustainable Replenishment Recommendations provide insights into eco-friendly practices in inventory management. This feature suggests optimal stock levels while considering supply chain sustainability, helping retailers align their replenishment strategies with environmentally friendly practices and meeting the growing consumer demand for eco-conscious products.

Requirements

Eco-Friendly Inventory Adjustment

"As a retailer, I want eco-friendly recommendations for my inventory levels so that I can align my business with sustainable practices and meet my customers' eco-conscious expectations."

Description

The Eco-Friendly Inventory Adjustment requirement focuses on enhancing the Sustainable Replenishment Recommendations feature of InventaPro by integrating advanced analytics to suggest eco-conscious stock levels. This feature will utilize AI algorithms to analyze sales data, seasonal trends, and sustainability criteria, thus enabling retailers to maintain optimal stock levels while minimizing their environmental impact. By providing retailers with actionable insights for adjusting inventory practices, this requirement aims to facilitate environmentally sustainable business operations. Additionally, it will support retailers in differentiating themselves in the competitive market by meeting the increasing consumer demand for eco-friendly products, ultimately contributing to improved brand loyalty and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer uses the Sustainable Replenishment Recommendations feature to analyze current inventory levels and receives suggestions for eco-friendly stock adjustments based on past sales data and sustainability features of the products.

Given the retailer inputs current inventory levels and product sales data, when the system processes this information using AI algorithms, then the retailer receives accurate recommendations for adjusting stock levels that prioritize eco-friendly products and sustainability.

A retailer assesses the effectiveness of the Eco-Friendly Inventory Adjustment feature during peak sales seasons, such as holidays, to ensure optimal stock levels without contributing to overstock or stockouts.

Given a specific peak sales season, when the retailer implements the Eco-Friendly Inventory Adjustment feature, then the analysis yields recommendations that effectively avoid overstock and stockouts while optimizing the eco-friendliness of stock.

Retailers want to evaluate the impact of eco-friendly stock adjustments on customer satisfaction and loyalty, relying on insights provided by the Sustainable Replenishment Recommendations.

Given the retailer modifies stock levels based on the eco-friendly recommendations, when customers provide feedback on their shopping experience, then the collected data shows at least a 15% increase in customer satisfaction and repeat purchases within one quarter.

A retailer accesses a dashboard displaying real-time inventory performance and sustainability metrics, integrating the new Eco-Friendly Inventory Adjustment feature for comprehensive insights.

Given that the retailer navigates to the dashboard, when they view the eco-friendly inventory adjustments, then the dashboard displays accurate, real-time data on both inventory performance and sustainability measurements without discrepancies.

Retailers utilize the system for regular report generation to assess the long-term impacts of eco-conscious stock recommendations on both inventory management and environmental footprint.

Given the retailer generates monthly reports, when the reports are produced, then they accurately reflect the changes in stock levels, sales data, and reduced environmental impact indicators based on the adjusted eco-friendly recommendations.

Sustainability Metric Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to access a dashboard that shows my sustainability metrics so that I can monitor my eco-friendly practices and adjust accordingly to meet my business goals."

Description

The Sustainability Metric Dashboard requirement describes the need for a dedicated section within InventaPro’s existing dashboard that visualizes key sustainability metrics related to inventory management. This feature will allow users to track their sustainability progress, offering insights such as carbon footprint reduction, waste management statistics, and eco-friendly products’ sales performance. By integrating these metrics into the core dashboard, retailers will have a comprehensive view of their sustainability efforts and the environmental impact of their inventory practices at their fingertips. This will not only inform business strategies but also empower retailers to present their eco-friendly initiatives to consumers, fulfilling the market's growing desire for accountability and transparency in sustainability.

Acceptance Criteria

Display of Sustainability Metrics

Given that the user is logged into InventaPro and viewing the Sustainability Metric Dashboard, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of at least three key sustainability metrics, including carbon footprint reduction, waste management statistics, and eco-friendly products’ sales performance.

Data Accuracy in Metrics

Given that the user is on the Sustainability Metric Dashboard, when they refresh the page, then the data displayed for each sustainability metric should reflect the most up-to-date information from the inventory management system without discrepancies.

User Interaction with Metrics

Given that the user is viewing the Sustainability Metric Dashboard, when they click on any sustainability metric, then they should see a detailed breakdown or report for that specific metric, providing context and actionable insights.

Sustainability Progress Tracking

Given that the user has been using InventaPro for a month, when they access the Sustainability Metric Dashboard, then they should be able to view a historical trend of their sustainability metrics over the past month, clearly illustrating progress or regression.

Integration with Existing Features

Given the user is utilizing other features of InventaPro, when they access the Sustainability Metric Dashboard, then users should be able to correlate their sustainability metrics with inventory levels and sales data from the integrated dashboards without any navigation issues.

User Role Permissions

Given that different users may have varying roles within InventaPro, when a user with view-only permissions accesses the Sustainability Metric Dashboard, then they should only see the metrics but not have access to edit any data or settings within the dashboard.

User Training and Support

Given that the Sustainability Metric Dashboard is a new feature, when the user accesses the dashboard for the first time, then they should be presented with a brief tutorial or help section explaining the purpose of each sustainability metric and how to interpret them.

Supplier Sustainability Ratings

"As a retailer, I want to view sustainability ratings for my suppliers so that I can choose partners who align with my eco-friendly values and improve my supply chain's sustainability."

Description

The Supplier Sustainability Ratings requirement aims to develop a feature that assesses and rates suppliers based on their sustainability practices and environmental impact. This feature will utilize an evaluation framework that considers different criteria such as sourcing methods, packaging, and carbon emissions during transportation. By incorporating this feature, InventaPro will help retailers make informed decisions when selecting suppliers, thereby improving their supply chain's overall sustainability. The successful implementation of this requirement will lead to more responsible purchasing decisions and foster partnerships with environmentally-conscious suppliers, further enhancing the retailer’s green initiatives while supporting the global push for sustainable supply chains.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Sustainability Ratings ensures retailers can view sustainability ratings for all suppliers when creating purchase orders.

Given a retailer accesses the Supplier Sustainability Ratings feature, when they view supplier options for a purchase order, then they should see sustainability ratings clearly displayed next to each supplier's name.

Retailers can filter suppliers based on sustainability ratings in the Supplier Sustainability Ratings feature.

Given a retailer is on the Supplier Sustainability Ratings page, when they apply a filter for sustainability ratings, then only suppliers meeting the selected criteria should be displayed in the list.

Suppliers should be rated based on a consistent evaluation framework reflecting their sustainability practices.

Given the existing supplier data and evaluation criteria, when the system evaluates suppliers for sustainability, then the ratings should be generated based on predefined scoring metrics for sourcing methods, packaging, and carbon emissions.

Retailers receive recommendations for suppliers based on sustainability ratings when selecting inventory.

Given a retailer is reviewing replenishment options, when they use the system's recommendations feature, then it should suggest suppliers with high sustainability ratings that align with the requested inventory.

The Supplier Sustainability Ratings feature integrates with existing vendor management systems for seamless updates.

Given a change in supplier sustainability practices, when suppliers update their information in the vendor management system, then the Supplier Sustainability Ratings should automatically reflect those updates without manual intervention.

Retailers can view detailed reports on supplier sustainability performance over time.

Given a retailer accesses the Supplier Sustainability Ratings feature, when they generate a report, then it should include historical data of supplier ratings and any changes in sustainability practices.

Unified Inventory Snapshot

The Unified Inventory Snapshot provides retailers with a comprehensive, real-time view of inventory levels across all sales channels, including online, in-store, and mobile. By consolidating inventory data into a single dashboard, users can quickly assess stock levels and make informed decisions, facilitating efficient stock management and minimizing the potential for stockouts and overstocking.

Requirements

Centralized Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want to access a centralized dashboard for my inventory so that I can quickly understand my stock levels across all sales channels and make informed decisions about reordering and promotions."

Description

Create a centralized dashboard that provides a unified view of inventory levels across all sales channels (online, in-store, and mobile). This dashboard should allow users to see stock levels, sales velocity, and inventory health at a glance, enhancing their ability to manage inventory effectively. It should include visual representations like graphs and key performance indicators (KPIs) to help users easily identify trends and make data-driven decisions. The integration of real-time data will help prevent stock-related issues and streamline overall inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Centralized Dashboard for Viewing Inventory Levels

Given a user has accessed the centralized dashboard, when they view the inventory section, then they should see real-time stock levels across all sales channels (online, in-store, mobile) displayed accurately and updated every minute.

Centralized Dashboard for Analysis of Sales Velocity

Given a user is on the centralized dashboard, when they navigate to the sales velocity section, then they should be able to view graphs representing sales trends over the past week, month, and year for each product category.

Centralized Dashboard for Monitoring Inventory Health

Given a user has loaded the dashboard, when they look at the inventory health indicators, then they should see color-coded KPIs reflecting stock health (green for healthy stock, yellow for low stock, and red for stockout) that are easily identifiable, and accurate.

Centralized Dashboard for Actionable Insights

Given the user is signed in and using the dashboard, when they hover over any product graph, then they should see a tooltip with detailed information about stock levels, sales velocity, and recommendations for restocking or clearance.

Centralized Dashboard with User-Specified Filters

Given a user on the dashboard, when they apply filters (such as date range or product category), then the dashboard should update immediately to reflect the filtered data without any lag in performance.

Centralized Dashboard for Historical Data Comparison

Given a user is on the centralized dashboard, when they select the comparison option for inventory levels, then they should be able to compare current stock levels with past data (e.g., last month or last year) side by side in a clear graphical format.

Automated Restock Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated alerts when my inventory is low so that I can reorder products in time and avoid losing sales due to stockouts."

Description

Implement an automated alert system that notifies users when inventory levels drop below a predefined threshold. This feature should allow users to customize alerts for different products and channels, ensuring they are informed promptly to reorder items before they go out of stock. The implementation should provide options for notifications via email, SMS, or in-app alerts, helping retailers maintain optimal inventory levels and prevent stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when the inventory of an item falls below the predefined threshold set by the user for the online store.

Given the inventory level drops below the threshold, when the system checks inventory levels, then the user should receive an alert notification via the chosen method (email, SMS, or in-app).

User customizes alert settings for multiple products across different channels in the inventory management dashboard.

Given the user is on the alert settings page, when the user selects a product and channel to customize alerts, then the system should save the new settings and allow users to see the confirmation message for a successful update.

A user wants to disable alerts for a specific product that is currently active in the alert system.

Given the user is in the alert management section, when the user disables the alert for a specific product, then the alert should be removed from the system and no further notifications should be sent for that product.

The user receives alerts via multiple notification methods based on their preferences set in the account settings.

Given the user has selected multiple notification methods, when the inventory drops below the set threshold for a product, then the user should receive alerts through all active notification channels chosen (e.g., email and SMS).

User checks historical notifications to see past alert activity for inventory levels.

Given the user navigates to the notification history section, when the user views the past alert logs, then the system should display a list of alerts sent, including the product name, alert type, and timestamp.

User requires edits to notification thresholds for various products post-analysis of sales data.

Given the user is on the product management page, when the user edits the threshold value for a product, then the system should update the new threshold and notify the user that changes have been saved successfully.

Administrator wants to evaluate the effectiveness of the automated restock alerts feature after a month of usage.

Given the administrator accesses the analytics dashboard, when analyzing the data for the last month, then the reports should show a decrease in stockouts and an increase in timely restocking activities compared to the previous month.

Sales Channel Synchronization

"As a store manager, I want my inventory data to be synchronized across all sales channels in real-time so that I can avoid overselling products and ensure customers have access to accurate stock information."

Description

Develop a synchronization feature that ensures inventory data is updated in real time across all sales channels, including online platforms and physical stores. This requirement involves the integration with existing e-commerce platforms and POS systems to ensure that any sale or return is reflected immediately across the entire inventory system, reducing the risks of overselling and stock discrepancies. This feature enhances accuracy and efficiency in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Synchronizing Inventory After a Sale in a Physical Store

Given that a product is sold in the physical store, when the sale is processed, then the inventory count for that product should be decreased in real-time across all sales channels, including online and mobile platforms, reflecting an updated inventory level immediately.

Updating Inventory After an Online Return

Given that a customer initiates a return for a product purchased online, when the return is processed, then the inventory count for that product should be increased in real-time across all sales channels to reflect the available stock accurately.

Real-time Reflection of Sales Across Channels

Given that a product has been sold either online or in-store, when a sale occurs, then the inventory levels should be updated within 5 seconds across all integrated platforms, ensuring accuracy in stock representation.

Cross-Platform Inventory Availability Check

Given that a retailer accesses the Unified Inventory Snapshot dashboard, when they check the inventory levels, then the system should display the correct and updated quantities across all channels without delays, allowing for effective stock management decisions.

Notification of Low Stock Levels

Given that a product's inventory level falls below a defined low threshold, when this situation occurs, then the system should automatically generate and send a notification to the user's dashboard and email regarding the low stock status.

Preventing Overselling During High Demand

Given that a high demand is detected for a particular product, when multiple sales transactions occur (online or in-store), then the inventory count should not allow overselling, and the system should block additional sales once the available stock reaches zero.

Historical Inventory Analytics

"As a retail analyst, I want to access historical inventory analytics so that I can identify trends and make better forecasting decisions for future stock levels."

Description

Create a feature that provides users with analytics on historical inventory levels and sales data. This feature should offer insights on inventory turnover rates, seasonal trends, and overall stock performance over time. By understanding past sales patterns, users can make more informed decisions regarding future inventory purchases and promotional activities, ultimately optimizing their stock management strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying Historical Inventory Levels Chart

Given a user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Historical Inventory Analytics section, then the system displays a chart showing historical inventory levels for each product over the selected time period.

Showing Inventory Turnover Rates

Given a user selects a specific product, when they view the Historical Inventory Analytics report, then the system calculates and displays the inventory turnover rate for that product over the past year.

Analyzing Seasonal Trends in Sales Data

Given a user accesses the Historical Inventory Analytics feature, when they filter the data by season, then the system provides insights into sales trends for each product during that season.

Generating Insights for Stock Performance

Given a user has accessed the Historical Inventory Analytics section, when they request a summary report, then the system generates a report that includes inventory performance metrics such as average stock levels and total sales over the specified period.

Providing Recommendations for Future Purchases

Given a user has reviewed their historical inventory data, when they finalize their analytics, then the system offers automated recommendations for future inventory purchases based on past sales patterns and inventory turnover rates.

Exporting Historical Inventory Data

Given a user is viewing the Historical Inventory Analytics section, when they select the export option, then the system allows them to download the historical inventory data in CSV format without loss of information.

Mobile Inventory Management

"As a retail owner, I want to manage my inventory from my mobile device so that I can stay informed about stock levels and respond quickly to inventory needs, no matter where I am."

Description

Develop a mobile-friendly version of the inventory management dashboard that allows retailers to monitor and manage inventory on-the-go. This feature should provide essential functionality such as viewing stock levels, receiving alerts, and making adjustments in real time from mobile devices. This mobility enhances responsiveness for retailers who are frequently away from their desks, ensuring they can act quickly when issues arise.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile Inventory Management Dashboard Usage

Given the user is logged into the mobile application, when they navigate to the Inventory Management Dashboard, then they should see real-time inventory levels for all sales channels.

Receiving Instant Alerts on Stock Levels

Given the user has set threshold levels for stock alerts, when the stock level for any item falls below the threshold, then the system should send an instant notification to the user’s mobile device.

Adjusting Inventory Quantities via Mobile

Given the user is viewing inventory levels on their mobile device, when they select an item and input a new quantity, then the updated quantity should reflect immediately on the dashboard across all connected sales channels.

Filtering Inventory by Sales Channel

Given the user is on the Inventory Management Dashboard, when they select a specific sales channel filter, then only the inventory items related to that channel should be displayed.

Accessing Historical Inventory Reports

Given the user is logged into the mobile application, when they navigate to the Historical Reports section, then they should be able to view reports on inventory levels and sales performance for the past month.

User-Friendly Interface for Easy Navigation

Given the user interfaces with the mobile application, when they navigate through the dashboard, then all functions should be easily accessible within three taps, ensuring intuitive usability.

Cross-Channel Sales Tracking

Cross-Channel Sales Tracking enables retailers to monitor sales performance across various platforms simultaneously. This feature gives users insight into which channels are driving sales, allowing them to optimize their inventory strategies and marketing efforts in real-time, ensuring that popular items are available where customers are shopping.

Requirements

Real-Time Sales Data Synchronization

"As a small retailer, I want to see real-time sales data across all my channels so that I can quickly adapt my inventory and marketing strategies based on current performance."

Description

This requirement mandates that the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature must synchronize sales data in real-time across all integrated sales channels such as e-commerce platforms and physical retail locations. This ensures that users receive immediate updates on sales performance, allowing them to react swiftly to emerging trends and make informed decisions on inventory management. The system should seamlessly integrate with current infrastructure, ensuring reliability and accuracy of data without delays, enhancing operational efficiency and user satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into InventaPro and views the dashboard during peak sales hours to analyze concurrent sales across e-commerce and physical store channels.

Given the user is logged into InventaPro, when they refresh the dashboard, then the dashboard displays the most up-to-date sales figures from all integrated channels within 5 seconds.

A retailer has a promotion running across multiple channels and wants to assess its effectiveness in real-time.

Given the retailer initiates a promotion, when sales occur across all channels, then the sales data is updated and displayed in real-time, allowing the retailer to see the performance metrics immediately after a sale is made.

The retailer is experiencing a stockout on a popular item and needs to get alerts immediately when sales occur to restock efficiently.

Given that a sale occurs on a channel that affects stock levels, when the sale is completed, then the retailer receives a notification alerting them of the sale and remaining inventory levels within 3 seconds.

The retailer wants to compare sales performance before and after launching a new product across different channels.

Given the new product is launched, when comparing sales data from preceding weeks to the current week, then the dashboard should reflect accurate comparative performance metrics across all channels within 5 minutes after the data is updated.

A retailer is preparing for a busy sales season and wants to ensure the sales data synchronization is reliable.

Given that there are transactions occurring simultaneously on multiple platforms, when sales data is synchronized in real-time, then there should be zero discrepancies in total sales figures across channels more than twice during a peak hour period.

A user wants to export sales data at the end of the day to review operational performance across channels.

Given the user requests an export of daily sales data, when the request is processed, then the user receives a complete report of sales data synchronized from all channels within 10 minutes, including timestamps and item specifics.

The retailer needs to ensure that data synchronization continues during network interruptions.

Given a momentary network disruption occurs during peak sales, when the connection is restored, then the system should automatically synchronize all captured sales transactions without manual intervention within 2 minutes of reconnection.

Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want a performance metrics dashboard so that I can easily identify which sales channels are performing well and make data-driven decisions accordingly."

Description

This requirement specifies that a dedicated dashboard be created to visualize channel-specific performance metrics for easy interpretation by users. The dashboard should provide insights into sales volume, revenue generated, and stock levels per channel, enabling users to identify high and low-performing channels effectively. This visual representation is crucial for making strategic decisions about where to allocate marketing resources and adjust inventory levels, thus supporting retailers in enhancing their profitability and customer reach.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Channel-Specific Performance Metrics for Sales Analysis

Given the user is on the Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select a specific sales channel, then the dashboard displays sales volume, revenue generated, and stock levels for that channel only.

Comparing Performance Across Different Channels

Given the user is on the Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select multiple sales channels to compare, then the dashboard displays a side-by-side comparison of sales volume, revenue generated, and stock levels for each selected channel.

Identifying High-Performing Channels

Given the user is on the Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they apply a filter to view channels based on sales volume or revenue, then the dashboard highlights the top 3 performing channels based on the selected criteria.

Exporting Channel Performance Data

Given the user is on the Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select the export option, then the dashboard exports the channel performance metrics into a CSV file format that includes sales volume, revenue generated, and stock levels.

Receiving Alerts for Low-Stock Levels per Channel

Given the user is on the Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard, when a channel's stock level for a specific product falls below a predetermined threshold, then the dashboard sends an alert notification to the user to restock that product.

Accessing Historical Channel Performance Data

Given the user is on the Channel Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select a date range, then the dashboard displays the historical performance metrics for all channels during that specified period.

Alerts for Stockouts and Overstock

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts for stockouts and overstocks so that I can manage my inventory levels proactively and avoid lost sales or unnecessary costs."

Description

This requirement necessitates the implementation of an alert system that notifies users when stock levels reach thresholds that indicate potential stockouts or overstock situations across their sales channels. The alerts should be customizable, allowing users to set specific stock thresholds depending on their business needs. This functionality will help users proactively manage inventory, preventing lost sales due to stockouts or increased holding costs from overstocking, ultimately leading to enhanced operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User Configures Alert Thresholds for Stock Levels

Given that the user is on the alerts settings page, when they enter a stock level threshold for low stock and high stock, then the system should save these thresholds and confirm with a success message.

User Receives Alert for Stockout Situation

Given that a product's stock falls below the predefined low stock threshold, when the threshold is reached, then the user should receive an immediate alert notification via email and in-app notification.

User Receives Alert for Overstock Situation

Given that a product's stock exceeds the predefined high stock threshold, when the threshold is reached, then the user should receive an email alert and an in-app notification indicating overstock status.

User Customizes Alert Preferences

Given that the user is on the alerts settings page, when they select their preferred method of notification (email, SMS, in-app), then the system should save these preferences and confirm them with a success message.

User Views Historical Alert Triggers

Given that the user navigates to the alert history section, when they access the history, then they should be able to view a list of past alert triggers indicating dates, times, and reasons for each alert.

User Tests Alert Functionality

Given that the user has set up low and high stock alerts, when the user manually adjusts stock levels to trigger the alerts, then the notifications should be received according to the user’s preferences.

Integration with Marketing Tools

"As a marketer, I want to integrate my sales tracking with marketing tools so that I can analyze the effectiveness of my campaigns and adjust them in real-time to improve sales."

Description

This requirement outlines the necessity for integrating the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature with popular marketing tools (e.g. email marketing platforms and social media advertising solutions). This integration allows users to synchronize their promotional campaigns with sales data, enabling them to analyze the effectiveness of their marketing efforts in driving sales across different channels. By linking inventory strategies with marketing efforts, retailers can enhance customer engagement and optimize their sales funnels.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Cross-Channel Sales Tracking with Email Marketing Platforms

Given a user has an account with an email marketing platform, When they set up integration with Cross-Channel Sales Tracking in InventaPro, Then promotional campaign data should synchronize successfully, allowing the user to view real-time sales performance statistics directly from the email marketing platform.

Real-Time Updates of Sales Data Across Platforms

Given that a retail user is utilizing both InventaPro and a social media advertising solution, When a sale occurs on any platform, Then the sales data should be updated in InventaPro and reflected on the social media platform within five minutes.

Analysis of Marketing Effectiveness Post-Campaign

Given a retail user has completed a promotional campaign linked to their Cross-Channel Sales Tracking, When they access the campaign performance dashboard in InventaPro, Then they should see a detailed report on sales impact, including conversion rates and ROI, based on integrated sales data.

User Access and Permissions for Integration Settings

Given multiple users in a retail organization, When the admin sets up integration settings for Cross-Channel Sales Tracking with marketing tools, Then access permissions must restrict unauthorized users from modifying integration configurations.

Historical Performance Comparison for Marketing Campaigns

Given that a user has completed multiple marketing campaigns linked to sales data, When they request a comparative analysis report in InventaPro, Then the system should generate a report that compares the performance of the current campaign against previous campaigns, using metrics like sales growth and channel effectiveness.

Notification Alerts for Sales Performance Changes

Given a user is monitoring sales across multiple channels, When there is a significant drop or increase in sales performance, Then InventaPro should trigger an alert notification to the user via email or in-app message to ensure timely response.

User Role-Based Access Control

"As an admin, I want to manage user access rights so that I can ensure that sensitive inventory and sales data is secure and only accessible to authorized users."

Description

This requirement specifies the implementation of role-based access control for the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, allowing different users within an organization to have access to specific functionalities based on their roles. Admins could manage permissions, ensuring that sensitive data is only accessible to authorized personnel. This feature is vital for maintaining data security and operational integrity within the application, especially as multiple users engage with the sales tracking capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria

Role-Based Access Management for Sales Tracking Feature

Given an Admin user, when they navigate to the user management section, then they should be able to create, edit, or delete user roles and permissions for the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature.

User Role Verification Across Platforms

Given a User with restricted permissions, when they attempt to access detailed sales reports, then they should receive an access denied message with an explanation of their permissions.

Dynamic Access Control Based on User Role

Given a Sales Manager user, when they log in, then they should only see the sales dashboard featuring metrics and information relevant to their role, without access to administrative settings.

Permission Audit for Data Security

Given an Admin user, when they initiate a permission audit, then the system should generate a report of all user roles and their corresponding access permissions related to the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature.

Real-Time Access Updates

Given an Admin user changes a user's permissions, when the user logs out and logs back in, then their access should reflect the updated permissions immediately.

Role-Based Access Control for Inventory Management

Given a User with Inventory Manager role, when they attempt to access inventory items linked to the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, then they should have access to modify stock levels but not view sensitive financial reports.

User Role Customization

Given an Admin user, when they create a custom user role for accessing the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, then they should be able to assign and customize permissions specific to this role.

Historical Data Analysis Tool

"As a retailer, I want to analyze historical sales data so that I can identify trends over time and optimize my future sales and inventory strategies."

Description

This requirement involves creating a tool that enables users to analyze historical sales data across different channels. This feature should allow users to generate reports that reflect trends over specific periods, aiding in forecasting and strategic planning. Historical analysis is crucial for understanding long-term performance trends, adjusting inventory accordingly, and aligning future marketing strategies, thereby equipping retailers with actionable insights to enhance decision-making and improve profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Cross-Channel Historical Sales Data Report Generation

Given the user selects a specific date range from the past year, when they generate a sales report, then the system must display total sales for each channel, identify trends, and highlight the top-performing products during that period.

Channel Performance Comparison

Given the user accesses the historical data analysis tool, when they choose two or more sales channels for comparison over the same time period, then the system must provide a visual comparison of sales performance metrics like revenue and units sold.

Exporting Historical Reports

Given the user has generated a historical sales report, when they select the option to export, then the system must allow exports in multiple formats (CSV, PDF) and confirm the download link is sent to their registered email.

User-Friendly Interface for Data Filtering

Given the user is viewing historical sales data, when they apply filters for specific products, categories, or channels, then the system must display updated data that reflects the applied filters without refreshing the entire page.

Integration with Inventory Adjustment Recommendations

Given the user has analyzed historical sales data, when they identify trends indicating low stock levels for popular items, then the system should provide automated recommendations for inventory adjustments to optimize stock levels accordingly.

User Access Levels for Report Viewing

Given an organization with multiple user roles, when an admin sets permissions, then only users with appropriate roles should be able to view or generate historical sales reports, ensuring data security.

Mobile Access for Sales Tracking

"As a retailer, I want to access sales tracking on my mobile device so that I can monitor my sales performance and make decisions from anywhere at any time."

Description

This requirement calls for developing a mobile-accessible version of the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, allowing users to track sales performance on-the-go through mobile devices. This functionality enhances user experience and flexibility, enabling retailers to manage their operations remotely and make timely decisions regarding inventory and sales strategies. Mobile access is vital for today's retailers who need to stay connected and responsive, regardless of their physical location.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile Access for Sales Tracking on a Retailer's Smartphone

Given a retailer is logged into the InventaPro mobile app, when they navigate to the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, then they should see real-time sales data from all channels displayed on their device.

Viewing Sales Trends Over Time on Mobile

Given a retailer is using the InventaPro mobile app, when they select the 'Sales Trends' tab within the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, then they should be able to filter sales data by week, month, and year to analyze trends over time.

Receiving Notifications for Sales Milestones on Mobile

Given a retailer has enabled notifications in the InventaPro mobile app, when a sales threshold is reached on any channel, then the retailer should receive a mobile push notification alerting them of the milestone.

Accessing Channel-Specific Sales Performance on Mobile

Given a retailer is using the mobile app, when they click on a specific channel's sales performance, then all relevant data for that channel (including total sales, best-selling products, and stock levels) should be displayed clearly.

Syncing Sales Data Across Devices

Given a retailer accesses their account from both mobile and desktop, when they view the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature on either device, then the sales data should be consistent and synchronized in real-time across both platforms.

Identifying Top-Performing Products on Mobile

Given a retailer is logged into the mobile app, when they access the Cross-Channel Sales Tracking feature, then they should be able to see a list of top-performing products ranked by sales volume from all channels combined.

Automated Stock Adjustment Rules

Automated Stock Adjustment Rules allow retailers to set specific criteria for inventory recalibration based on sales patterns across channels. This feature minimizes the manual workload by automatically adjusting stock levels according to sales trends, preventing overstock situations or stockouts, and streamlining the replenishment process.

Requirements

Dynamic Recalibration Algorithm

"As a retail store manager, I want an automated system that recalibrates my stock levels based on real-time sales data so that I can reduce manual input and maintain optimal inventory levels without the risk of missing sales or tying up capital in excess stock."

Description

The Dynamic Recalibration Algorithm enables a continuous assessment of sales data and inventory levels to automatically adjust stock based on pre-defined criteria. This feature supports various adjustment rules, such as replenishment thresholds, sales velocity, and seasonal patterns, minimizing the risk of stockouts and overstock. It ultimately enhances the efficiency of inventory management by ensuring that stock levels are always aligned with actual demand, leading to more accurate forecasting and better customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic inventory recalibration based on seasonal sales variations during the holiday season.

Given that the Dynamic Recalibration Algorithm is operational, when holiday sales data indicates a 30% increase in demand for specific SKUs, then the system must automatically adjust inventory levels to meet the projected demand within 24 hours.

Recalibration of stock levels after a promotional campaign.

Given that a promotional campaign has concluded, when sales data shows a 50% increase in sales for promoted items, then the system should adjust stock levels to replenish those items to match pre-defined thresholds within 12 hours.

Real-time adjustment of stock based on e-commerce sales vs. in-store sales.

Given that sales data is being collected from both e-commerce and brick-and-mortar stores, when there is a 20% variance in sales velocity between channels for any SKU, then the algorithm must instantly recalibrate stock levels across both platforms immediately after the data is captured.

Monthly review of inventory positioning against historical sales data.

Given that the Dynamic Recalibration Algorithm operates monthly, when the algorithm compares current stock levels against historical sales patterns, then it must generate a report indicating necessary adjustments for at least 80% of SKUs that do not align with projected sales.

Integration with point-of-sale (POS) systems for real-time adjustments.

Given that the POS system is integrated with InventaPro, when an item is sold in-store, then the stock levels for that item must be recalibrated within 5 minutes to reflect the sale across all platforms.

Adjustment of stock levels during unexpected demand spikes.

Given that there is an unexpected 100% increase in online sales for a specific SKU, when this occurs, then the system should initiate a stock adjustment process to align inventory levels accordingly within 2 hours.

User-defined Adjustment Triggers

"As a small business owner, I want to customize the conditions that prompt stock adjustments so that I can tailor the inventory management process to my specific business needs and maximize sales opportunities."

Description

User-defined Adjustment Triggers allow retailers to set their own criteria for stock adjustments based on their unique sales patterns and business needs. Users can create rules for automatic adjustments, such as low stock alerts or sales spikes, providing flexibility and personalization in inventory management, enabling retailers to respond swiftly to market changes and consumer behaviors.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer sets a low stock alert trigger for a specific product category in their inventory management system.

Given the retailer has defined a low stock threshold for a product category, When the inventory level for that category falls below the threshold, Then an alert should be triggered and notified to the retailer via email and dashboard notification.

Retailer establishes a sales spike rule for seasonal products to increase stock levels automatically.

Given the retailer has set a sales spike threshold for seasonal products, When sales of a product exceed the defined spike threshold over a specified period, Then the inventory level for that product should be automatically increased by the defined adjustment amount.

Retailer creates a custom rule for stock adjustments during clearance sales to expedite inventory turnover.

Given the retailer has specified a percentage discount trigger for clearance sales, When a product is marked down to the clearance price, Then the system should automatically adjust the inventory levels to ensure sufficient stock is available for the clearance period.

Retailer reviews and modifies existing stock adjustment rules based on changing sales patterns.

Given the retailer has access to existing stock adjustment rules, When the retailer modifies the criteria for a rule and saves the changes, Then the modified rule should take effect and be active for automatic stock adjustments immediately.

Retailer uses historical sales data to define a custom adjustment rule for new incoming products.

Given the retailer has historical sales data available, When a new product is added and a custom adjustment rule is created based on historical data patterns, Then the system should apply the rule to forecast initial stock levels for the new product.

Retailer enables or disables specific adjustment rules based on current market conditions.

Given the retailer has multiple adjustment rules set up, When the retailer opts to enable or disable a rule based on market analysis, Then the system must reflect the current status of the rule and adjust stock levels accordingly when enabled.

Reporting and Analytics Dashboard

"As a business analyst, I want to access a dashboard that displays my sales and inventory data so that I can create reports and identify trends for better inventory planning."

Description

The Reporting and Analytics Dashboard provides retailers with insights into stock levels, sales trends, and the effectiveness of the adjustment rules in place. This feature enhances decision-making capabilities by offering data visualization tools and customizable report options, allowing users to analyze inventory performance and make informed business decisions to optimize their stock management strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User accessing the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard to view sales trends for the last quarter.

Given the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a visualization of sales trends for the last quarter with accurate data.

User customizes a report based on specific stock levels and sales channels.

Given the user is on the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they select parameters for a customized report, then the report generated should reflect the stock levels and sales data as per the selected criteria without errors.

User evaluates the effectiveness of the Automated Stock Adjustment Rules using analytics provided in the dashboard.

Given the user has set stock adjustment rules, when they view the analytics dashboard, then they should see metrics indicating stockout and overstock situations before and after applying the rules, demonstrating a clear impact of the adjustments.

User seeks to download a historical report of sales and inventory trends.

Given the user is on the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they select the download option for a historical report, then a downloadable file in the chosen format (CSV, PDF) should be available without issues.

User wants to receive notifications on stock alerts based on analytics insights.

Given the user has set up stock alert preferences, when inventory levels fall below or rise above preset thresholds, then the user should receive timely notifications via email or app alert.

Integration with E-Commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want to ensure that my online and offline stock levels are automatically synchronized so that I can avoid overselling and maintain customer trust."

Description

Integration with popular e-commerce platforms ensures that the Automated Stock Adjustment Rules function seamlessly across online and offline sales channels. This requirement is vital for maintaining accurate inventory levels across different sales outlets, reducing the manual effort required for reconciliation, and ultimately improving the consistency and reliability of sales data in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

E-commerce platform integration accurately reflects real-time inventory levels post-sale.

Given an e-commerce sale occurs, when the stock adjustment rules process is triggered, then the inventory levels in InventaPro should update to reflect this sale within 5 minutes.

Historical sales data is used to calibrate stock levels across channels.

Given historical sales data is available, when the stock adjustment rules are applied, then stock levels should adjust within 10% of the forecasted demand based on the last 30 days of sales data.

System alerts notify retailers of significant stock discrepancies between channels.

Given inventory discrepancies are detected, when the stock reconciliation rules are executed, then the system should notify the retailer via email and in-app notification with a summary of the discrepancies within 1 hour.

Manual adjustments are logged and reported for accountability.

Given a retailer makes a manual stock adjustment, when the adjustment is saved, then it should be logged with a timestamp, user ID, and reason for adjustment, and displayed in the adjustments report within 5 minutes.

Data synchronization between online and offline sales channels occurs without errors.

Given that sales data is entered through either an online or offline channel, when data synchronization occurs, then all channels should accurately reflect the same inventory levels with zero errors or mismatches post-synchronization.

Automated reports on inventory performance are delivered to retailers.

Given the automated stock adjustment rules are set up, when the specified reporting interval is reached, then the system should automatically generate and email a performance report summarizing stock levels and adjustments made within the last week.

User interface allows retailers to easily set and modify stock adjustment rules.

Given a retailer is on the stock adjustment settings page, when they modify any rule and save the changes, then the system should confirm the changes with a success message and reflect the updates in real-time without any errors.

Notifications and Alerts System

"As a retail manager, I want to receive immediate alerts when stock adjustments occur, so I can quickly respond to changes in inventory and ensure that my products are always available to customers."

Description

The Notifications and Alerts System informs users of significant stock adjustments or rule activations through alerts via email or in-app notifications. This feature keeps retailers informed about inventory changes, ensuring proactive management and timely responses to inventory issues, which is crucial for maintaining optimal stock levels and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives an email alert when automated stock adjustment rules trigger due to a significant drop in sales of a product.

Given that the retailer has set an automated stock adjustment rule for low sales, when the product’s sales drop below the defined threshold, then the retailer should receive an email notification within 10 minutes of the adjustment.

A retailer views an in-app notification about stock adjustments made for multiple products based on sales trends.

Given that the retailer has multiple products with active stock adjustment rules, when the rules are activated, then the retailer should receive a single in-app notification summarizing all stock adjustments, displaying product names, old stock levels, and new stock levels.

User checks notification history to review past stock adjustment alerts for decision-making.

Given that the user is in the notification history section, when they view past alerts, then they should see a list of all previous stock adjustment notifications with timestamps, product details, and reasons for adjustments.

Retailer configures the conditions for receiving alerts based on automated stock adjustments within the app settings.

Given that the retailer is in the settings menu, when they configure the alert conditions for stock adjustments, then the criteria should save successfully, and the retailer should receive a confirmation message with the summary of settings.

A retailer wants to ensure alerts for stockouts are sent immediately after reaching a critical stock level.

Given that the retailer has configured stockout alerts, when the stock level of a product reaches the critical threshold, then the system should send an instant email alert and an in-app notification to the retailer without any delay.

Retailer confirms that alerts are not sent for inactive stock adjustment rules.

Given that the retailer has marked a stock adjustment rule as inactive, when the sales of the associated product change significantly, then the retailer should not receive any alerts for that product.

Real-Time Stock Notifications

Real-Time Stock Notifications alert retailers to significant changes in inventory levels across all sales channels. By receiving immediate updates on stockouts or low inventory, users can act swiftly to reorder products and maintain optimal stock levels, enhancing customer satisfaction and trust.

Requirements

Real-Time Stock Update Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive real-time notifications about my inventory levels so that I can quickly reorder products before I run out and keep my customers satisfied."

Description

This requirement entails the implementation of a notification system that instantly alerts users about significant changes in inventory levels across all sales channels. The feature will utilize push notifications and in-app messaging to ensure that retailers are immediately informed of stockouts or low inventory items. By keeping retailers updated in real-time, the system enhances inventory control, allowing them to take swift action to reorder products, thereby preventing lost sales and maintaining customer satisfaction. The integration of this feature within the InventaPro dashboard will provide users with a seamless way to monitor their inventory and respond to fluctuations effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification for Low Stock Levels

Given the inventory level of a product falls below the predefined threshold, when the stock level is updated, then a push notification and in-app message should be sent to the retailer's mobile device and dashboard.

Notification for Stockout Events

Given a product is marked as out of stock across all sales channels, when the stock status is updated, then an immediate push notification and in-app alert must be sent to notify the retailer.

Synchronization of Notifications Across Channels

Given that the retailer sells products through multiple channels, when any stock level change occurs, then all relevant channels should receive the same notification simultaneously to ensure consistency.

User Preferences for Notification Settings

Given the retailer has specific preferences for receiving notifications, when they update their settings in the dashboard, then the notification system should respect these preferences and act accordingly (e.g., email, SMS, app alerts).

Historical Notification Records

Given that notifications have been sent regarding stock levels, when the retailer accesses the notification history within the dashboard, then they should see a complete and accurate list of all notifications sent based on inventory changes for the last 30 days.

Priority Levels for Notifications

Given that some products are more critical than others, when a low stock or out-of-stock notification is triggered, then the notification system should categorize the alerts based on product importance and prioritize them accordingly in the delivery to the retailer.

User Acknowledgment of Notifications

Given that notifications have been received by the retailer, when they view the notification, then they should be able to mark it as acknowledged to track their actions based on received alerts within the dashboard.

Customizable Notification Settings

"As a retailer, I want to customize my stock alert settings so that I only receive notifications for products that are critical to my inventory management."

Description

The system should allow retailers to customize their notification settings to receive alerts based on their specific criteria, such as minimum stock levels, specific products, or sales performance thresholds. By providing this level of customization, users can tailor their experience to focus on the inventory aspects that matter most to them, ensuring that they are not overwhelmed with irrelevant alerts. This flexibility can enhance user engagement and ensure that retailers can prioritize their response based on the urgency of the notifications. Integration with user profiles will allow unique preferences to be stored and adjusted easily.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer customizes notification settings for low stock alerts during the product replenishment period to ensure they do not miss critical stock level updates, thereby enhancing order accuracy.

Given the retailer is logged into their InventaPro account, when they navigate to the notification settings and set a minimum stock level for a specific product, then an alert must be generated whenever the stock level falls below the defined threshold.

A retailer adjusts notification preferences for specific products to only receive alerts about high-demand items leading up to a sales event, ensuring their focus remains on critical stock management.

Given the retailer is on the notification settings page, when they select specific products and set performance thresholds, then only notifications related to these selected products should be sent to the user based on their defined conditions.

A retailer, who has recently integrated their e-commerce platform with InventaPro, wants to ensure their low stock alerts are set according to both online and offline sales data to avoid stockouts across channels.

Given that the retailer integrates the e-commerce platform, when they set the notification settings for both online and offline sales, then they should receive real-time alerts whenever any product reaches the minimum stock level determined by the combined sales data.

Users want to retrieve previous notification settings after a system update to ensure continuity in their inventory management processes, thereby minimizing disruption and maintaining efficiency.

Given the retailer has previously saved notification settings, when they log into their account after a system update, then their previous settings must be automatically restored without requiring manual configuration.

A retailer utilizes the mobile app version of InventaPro and needs to customize notification settings on-the-go to quickly respond to inventory changes when they are out of the office.

Given the retailer is using the InventaPro mobile app, when they access notification settings and make changes, then those changes must be saved and effective immediately without delays or errors.

Historical Inventory Performance Reports

"As a retailer, I want to view historical performance reports on my inventory so that I can understand patterns and adjust my stock management strategies effectively."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating visual reports that capture historical data on inventory performance, including frequency of stockouts, average time to restock, and sales trends related to low inventory items. These reports will enable retailers to analyze their past inventory issues and make informed decisions for future stock management. By incorporating these analytics within the InventaPro dashboard, users can identify patterns and adjust their reordering strategies accordingly to optimize stock levels and enhance sales performance. The implementation of this feature requires a robust data analytics module behind the scenes.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying Historical Inventory Performance Reports on the InventaPro Dashboard

Given that the user accesses the InventaPro dashboard, when they navigate to the Historical Inventory Performance Reports section, then they should see visual reports that accurately reflect the data on inventory performance, including frequency of stockouts, average time to restock, and sales trends related to low inventory items.

Exporting Historical Inventory Reports

Given that a user is viewing the Historical Inventory Performance Reports, when they select the export option, then the system should generate a downloadable report in CSV format that includes all displayed historical data.

Filtering Historical Inventory Reports by Date Range

Given that the user is on the Historical Inventory Performance Reports page, when they apply a date range filter, then the report should only show historical data and performance metrics that fall within the selected date range.

Receiving Notifications for Report Generation Errors

Given that the user attempts to generate a Historical Inventory Performance Report, when there’s an error in data retrieval, then the user should receive a clear and informative notification about the error, along with suggested next steps.

Tracking Improvements from Implemented Changes

Given that the user has made changes to their inventory management strategies based on insights from previous Historical Inventory Performance Reports, when they view the updated reports after the changes have been made, then the system should display a comparison against previous performance metrics to show any improvements.

Interactive Data Visualization in Reports

Given that a user accesses the Historical Inventory Performance Reports, when they interact with the report visuals, such as by hovering over data points, then the system should display tooltips with detailed information relevant to the selected data points, enhancing the user’s understanding of the data.

User Access Permissions for Historical Reports

Given that a user logs into InventaPro, when they attempt to access Historical Inventory Performance Reports, then the system should verify their access level, granting or denying access based on their role in the organization.

Multi-Channel Integration Support

"As a retailer, I want my stock alerts to integrate with multiple sales channels so that I can manage my inventory holistically and ensure accuracy in my stock levels."

Description

To enhance functionality, the requirement entails integrating the real-time stock notification feature across various sales channels including e-commerce platforms, brick-and-mortar POS systems, and other relevant inventory management systems. This multi-channel integration will ensure that retailers receive consolidated and coherent alerts regardless of where their sales occur. The implementation will involve establishing API connections to various platforms to ensure seamless synchronization of inventory data. This integration is crucial for providing a comprehensive view of stock levels across all sales channels.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Real-Time Stock Notifications with E-commerce Platforms

Given an e-commerce platform is connected via API, when a product goes out of stock, then the inventory management system should send a real-time notification to the retailer's dashboard and email.

Real-Time Stock Alerts for Brick-and-Mortar Retailers

Given a brick-and-mortar POS system is integrated, when the stock level of an item falls below the predefined threshold, then the retailer should receive an immediate notification on their mobile device.

Synchronization of Inventory Data Across Multiple Sales Channels

Given multiple sales channels (online and offline) are connected, when a sale occurs in one channel, then the inventory levels in all connected channels should reflect this change within 5 minutes.

Handling of Connectivity Issues During Inventory Updates

Given that there is a temporary loss of connectivity with any integrated sales channel, when the connection is restored, then all missed notifications should be queued and sent to the retailer immediately.

User Customization of Alert Preferences

Given a retailer has access to the notification settings, when they adjust the thresholds for low stock alerts, then the system should save these preferences and apply them to real-time notifications.

Testing the API Integration for Consistency and Reliability

Given the API is implemented, when a request is made to retrieve stock levels, then the response time should not exceed 2 seconds, and the data should be accurate and consistent across all channels.

Multi-Language Support in Notifications

Given a retailer operates in a non-English speaking region, when a low stock notification is generated, then the notification content should be displayed in the retailer's preferred language.

User Training and Support Resources

"As a retailer, I want access to training resources about stock notifications so that I can maximize the benefits of using InventaPro."

Description

Creating a detailed set of user training materials and support resources to help retailers understand how to utilize the real-time stock notifications effectively. This requirement includes developing video tutorials, FAQs, and a comprehensive help center that provides guidance on customizing notifications, managing inventory, and accessing historical reports. By offering readily accessible resources, the support team can reduce the volume of inquiries and empower retail users to leverage InventaPro's capabilities to the fullest, enhancing both user satisfaction and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User Training Materials Access and Usability

Given a user is logged in to InventaPro, when they navigate to the help center, then they can access training materials that load within 3 seconds and are easy to understand.

Video Tutorial Effectiveness

Given a user watches a video tutorial, when they attempt to customize their stock notifications, then they can successfully complete the task without additional assistance at least 80% of the time.

FAQ Resource Utilization

Given a user has a question regarding real-time stock notifications, when they search the FAQ section, then they find an answer relevant to their question within 1 minute 90% of the time.

Help Center Navigation Efficiency

Given a user visits the help center, when they look for support regarding inventory management, then they can navigate to the relevant section in under 2 minutes.

User Feedback on Training Resources

Given users have completed training on stock notifications, when asked for feedback, then at least 85% of participants report being satisfied with the clarity and usefulness of the resources provided.

Historical Reports Access and Understanding

Given a user accesses historical reports, when they attempt to analyze past stock notifications, then they can interpret the data accurately without external assistance 75% of the time.

Sales Forecast Integration

Sales Forecast Integration utilizes advanced analytics to predict future sales trends for all channels based on historical data. This feature enables users to make proactive inventory decisions across platforms, ensuring that stock levels align with projected demand, reducing the risk of overstocking during low sales periods.

Requirements

Dynamic Sales Forecast Generation

"As a retail manager, I want the system to automatically generate sales forecasts based on historical data so that I can make data-driven inventory decisions and avoid stock shortages or excess."

Description

This requirement focuses on the automatic generation of sales forecasts by leveraging historical sales data from various channels. It will enable users to receive accurate and timely predictions of future sales trends. The integration of advanced analytics ensures that retail managers can make informed inventory decisions that align with projected demand. By optimizing stock levels according to these forecasts, the implementation is expected to minimize instances of overstocking and stockouts, thereby improving operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic generation of sales forecasts for a small retail store based on historical sales data across physical and online channels during peak sales periods.

Given historical sales data is available, when the forecast generation is triggered, then the system should generate sales forecasts for the next three months with at least 90% accuracy compared to actual sales.

A retail manager reviews forecast data generated from the system before making purchasing decisions for stock replenishment. The manager relies on forecasts to prevent stockouts during anticipated sales spikes.

Given the sales forecast report is generated, when the manager accesses the report, then the system should display an intuitive dashboard with clear forecasts for each channel and suggestions for stock levels.

Synchronization of e-commerce sales data with the forecast generation process to ensure accurate predictions reflecting both online and offline sales.

Given that online sales data has been synchronized, when the dynamic sales forecast is generated, then the forecasts should take into account both online and offline sales data, updating in real-time as new data comes in.

A small retailer assesses the effectiveness of this feature after implementing the new sales forecasting tool for one month to manage stock levels and avoid overstock.

Given a month has passed since implementation, when the retailer compares forecasted sales versus actual sales, then discrepancies should not exceed 10%, demonstrating the accuracy of forecasts.

Monthly review meeting with team members to evaluate the forecast accuracy and its impact on inventory decisions made based on those forecasts.

Given that the monthly review meeting occurs, when discussing the forecasts, then team members should unanimously agree on the reliability of the forecasts and their effectiveness in reducing excess inventory by at least 15%.

During a sales event, the system generates an urgent forecast to adjust stock levels immediately in response to rapidly changing sales trends.

Given an unexpected spike in sales during a promotional event, when the dynamic sales forecast is updated, then it should reflect real-time adjustments to stock levels to prevent stockouts within two hours of the event beginning.

Multi-Channel Data Integration

"As a store owner, I want all my sales data integrated from different channels into one system so that I can easily track performance and manage inventory effectively across platforms."

Description

This requirement ensures seamless integration of sales data from all retail channels, including online and offline stores. It aims to consolidate sales data into one comprehensive view for better analysis. By aggregating data efficiently, users can analyze sales performance across different platforms and make unified forecasting decisions. This integration is crucial for InventaPro's effectiveness as it allows users to have an overview of their inventory needs, ultimately optimizing stock management and increasing profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales data is imported from multiple channels into InventaPro's dashboard for a comprehensive view of inventory performance.

Given that sales data from both online and offline channels are available, When the data is imported, Then all sales figures should be accurately represented in the unified dashboard, reflecting a 100% data accuracy.

The system consolidates sales trends to support forecasting for upcoming inventory needs.

Given that historical sales data has been gathered from all channels, When the sales data is analyzed, Then the system should provide forecasts for the next quarter with at least 90% accuracy based on historical trends.

Users access the integrated data on a mobile device to make real-time decisions based on sales performance.

Given that the user opens the InventaPro app on their mobile device, When they view the sales data, Then the data should load within 2 seconds and allow users to identify top-selling products and trends in real-time.

The inventory management system alerts users of discrepancies between forecasted and actual sales data.

Given that the sales data has been updated, When actual sales performance deviates from the forecast by 20% or more, Then the system should send an alert notification to the user.

The integrated system provides detailed reports on sales performance across all channels.

Given that the user requests a sales report, When the report is generated, Then it should include total sales figures, channel breakdown, and weather patterns affecting sales, all available for a customizable date range.

Users can easily customize the data view for specific channels or products in the dashboard.

Given that the user wants to filter the sales data, When they apply filters for specific channels or products, Then the dashboard should update to reflect the filtered data within 3 seconds, maintaining usability across the visualization.

The system synchronizes real-time sales data with external e-commerce platforms.

Given that the user has connected their external platforms, When sales data is updated across those platforms, Then InventaPro should synchronize changes within 5 minutes, ensuring up-to-date inventory management.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Forecast Insights

"As a retail manager, I want an intuitive dashboard that clearly presents sales forecast data so that I can quickly understand trends and make timely decisions on stock levels."

Description

This requirement entails the design and implementation of an intuitive dashboard that displays sales forecast insights in a user-friendly manner. The dashboard should feature visual elements such as graphs and charts that present data trends in an easily digestible format. By offering real-time insights on inventory performance alongside future sales projections, users can swiftly identify trends and take action. This requirement is vital for enhancing user experience, ensuring that essential information is prioritized and clearly presented.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Manager views the dashboard on a typical business day to assess current inventory performance and forecasted sales for the upcoming week, aiming to adjust stock orders based on insights received.

Given the Sales Manager is logged into InventaPro dashboard, when they navigate to the Sales Forecast Insights section, then they should see a visually appealing layout that includes graphs and charts displaying sales trends for the past month and predictions for the next month.

An inventory manager needs to present sales forecasts during a weekly team meeting. They access the dashboard to retrieve visual data to support their inventory planning strategy.

Given the Inventory Manager accesses the dashboard during a team meeting, when they present the information, then they should be able to switch between different views (daily, weekly, monthly) of the sales forecast data seamlessly without any lag or performance issues.

A store owner regularly checks their dashboard to analyze sales trends and adjust their marketing strategy accordingly, ensuring they are not overstocking items during predicted low sales periods.

Given the store owner is viewing the dashboard, when they hover over any graph or chart, then a tooltip should appear providing additional details (e.g., exact sales figures, percentage change) for that specific data point.

A retail staff member uses the dashboard on a mobile device while at the store to assess current inventory levels and future sales projections to assist customers effectively.

Given the retail staff member accesses the dashboard from a mobile device, when they check the Sales Forecast Insights, then the layout should be fully responsive, maintaining readability and accessibility of all visual elements without any distortion or overlapping of information.

A business analyst reviews the historical data trends on the dashboard to prepare a report for stakeholders regarding inventory performance and sales patterns over the last quarter.

Given the analyst is preparing a report, when they export the dashboard data to a PDF or CSV format, then the exported file should accurately reflect all visible dashboard elements, including graphs and charts, with proper labeling and visualization intact.

An operations manager utilizes the dashboard to identify and mitigate potential stockouts by comparing forecasted sales with current inventory levels.

Given the operations manager is examining the dashboard, when they identify projected low stock based on sales trends, then the system should display alert notifications prompting them to reorder or adjust stock levels directly from the dashboard interface.

Alerts for Stock Level Adjustments

"As a store owner, I want to receive alerts when my stock levels need to be adjusted based on sales forecasts so that I can optimize inventory and meet customer demand without delay."

Description

This requirement will introduce a system of alerts that notify users when stock levels need to be adjusted based on the sales forecasts. These alerts will be triggered by the difference between real-time sales data and forecasted demand, prompting users to take necessary actions to mitigate risks of stockouts or overstock situations. Implementing this requirement will ensure that inventory remains aligned with market demand, thus supporting proactive decision-making and enhancing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert notification when actual stock levels deviate from forecasted sales data during a monthly sales report review.

Given that the user has set up alerts for stock level adjustments, when the real-time sales data shows a 20% variance from forecasted demand, then the user receives a notification alerting them of the necessary stock adjustment.

User can successfully disable alerts for specific product categories that they do not wish to monitor for stock level adjustments.

Given that the user is on the settings page, when they choose to disable alerts for a selected product category and save the changes, then no alerts should be triggered for that category for the coming quarter.

User can view and access historical alert notifications to analyze past stock level issues and adjustments.

Given that the user is within the alerts dashboard, when they filter notifications by date range, then they should see all relevant past alert notifications within that specified range.

User initiates a manual adjustment of stock levels in response to an alert.

Given an active alert notification regarding stock levels, when the user selects 'Adjust Stock' and enters the new stock quantity, then the system must successfully update the stock levels and confirm the adjustment with a confirmation message.

Multiple users receive real-time notifications of stock level alerts sent to their assigned roles in the team.

Given that multiple team members are assigned alerts preferences, when stock levels fall below the predetermined threshold, then all assigned users receive real-time notifications simultaneously via email and in-app alerts.

User views a summary of all active alerts and their statuses in one consolidated dashboard.

Given that the user is logged into their account, when they navigate to the alerts dashboard, then they should see a list containing all active alerts along with their status (Active, Resolved) and timestamps indicating when the alert was triggered.

User can customize the thresholds at which stock level alerts are triggered for more granular control based on product type.

Given that the user is on the alert settings page, when they adjust the threshold levels for product categories and save, then the updated thresholds should be applied, and alerts should reflect these new levels moving forward.

Historical Data Analysis for Forecasting

"As a retail manager, I want to analyze historical sales data to improve the reliability of my future sales forecasts so that I can better plan my inventory purchases and meet customer demand."

Description

This requirement will enable the system to conduct detailed historical data analysis that informs the accuracy of future sales forecasts. By evaluating patterns in past sales and seasonal trends, users will benefit from more reliable forecasting, leading to better inventory management. The historical data analysis will be an essential component for the sales forecast integration and will enhance the overall effectiveness of inventory management by ensuring forecasts are based on comprehensive data rather than guesswork.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Forecasting for Seasonal Products

Given historical sales data for the previous three years, when the user inputs seasonal product data, then the system should provide accurate sales forecasts with at least 90% accuracy based on historical sales patterns.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

Given the sales data from integrated e-commerce platforms, when the user accesses the historical analysis tool, then the system should display up-to-date inventory forecasts reflecting at least 95% of online sales integration accuracy.

User Customization for Forecast Parameters

Given that a user wants to customize forecast parameters, when they adjust the seasonal trend indicators and input realistic values, then the system should update the forecast results in real-time and accurately reflect those changes within 5 seconds.

Monthly Sales Trend Evaluation

Given monthly sales data from the past year, when the user requests a trend analysis report, then the system should generate a comprehensive report identifying significant sales trends with visual graphs and percentage variations presented clearly.

Alerts for Overstock and Stockouts

Given that the historical data analysis indicates a projected sales dip, when the undersold products reach a critical stock level, then the system must trigger an automatic alert to notify the user about potential overstock or stockout scenarios.

Accuracy Testing with Historical Data

Given a set of historical sales data, when the user runs the forecasting analysis, then the forecasts generated should indicate a minimum correlation coefficient of 0.85 with actual sales data observed over the same period in the last two years.

Customer Purchase Behavior Insights

Customer Purchase Behavior Insights leverages data from various channels to understand consumer buying patterns. This feature helps retailers tailor their inventory management strategies, ensuring they have the right products in the right places at the right times based on real-time customer preferences and trends.

Requirements

Real-time Data Aggregation

"As a retailer, I want to view real-time customer purchase data from various channels so that I can make informed inventory decisions based on the latest trends."

Description

The Real-time Data Aggregation requirement focuses on collecting and processing customer purchase data from multiple channels, including online sales, in-store transactions, and social media interactions. This feature should seamlessly integrate with the existing InventaPro platform, enabling retailers to access a comprehensive view of customer behavior in one centralized location. By leveraging advanced data querying techniques, retailers can ensure that they have access to the most current data available, allowing them to make informed inventory decisions based on the latest consumer trends and preferences. This capability is essential for identifying seasonal buying patterns and optimizing stock levels, thus enhancing overall operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Customer Data Integration for Inventory Management

Given that customer purchase data has been collected from online and offline channels, When the retailer accesses the InventaPro dashboard, Then they should see updated data reflecting customer purchase behavior within a maximum of 5 minutes.

User Access Control for Data Privacy

Given that sensitive customer purchase data is integrated into InventaPro, When a user attempts to access the data, Then the system should enforce role-based access control to restrict data visibility based on user permissions.

Comprehensive Reporting on Customer Trends

Given that data aggregation has been completed, When the retailer generates a report on customer purchase trends, Then they should receive a report that outlines buying patterns and inventory recommendations based on the latest aggregated data.

Seasonal Pattern Detection

Given that customer purchase behavior data has been aggregated over a specific period, When the retailer analyzes this data, Then they should be able to identify at least three distinct seasonal buying patterns relevant to their inventory.

Real-time Data Accuracy Verification

Given that real-time data is being displayed in the dashboard, When comparing the on-screen data with a verified source of data, Then they should match with an accuracy rate of 95% or higher.

User Interface Responsiveness during Data Loading

Given that the dashboard is loading customer purchase behavior data, When the retailer interacts with the interface, Then the dashboard should remain responsive and allow users to navigate without delays.

Alerts for Anomalies in Customer Behavior

Given that the system is analyzing purchase behavior data, When an anomaly or sudden change is detected in buying patterns, Then an alert notification should be sent to the retailer within two minutes.

Behavioral Analytics Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want a dashboard that visualizes customer purchase behavior so that I can quickly identify trends and adjust my inventory strategy accordingly."

Description

The Behavioral Analytics Dashboard requirement entails the development of an intuitive visual interface that presents key insights derived from customer purchase data. This dashboard will showcase trends, product performance metrics, and predictive analytics to help retailers identify which items are popular and which may require restocking. By utilizing AI-driven algorithms, the dashboard will not only reflect historical data but also provide forecasts based on emerging consumer patterns, thereby aiding retailers in proactive inventory management. Integration with the existing system must be seamless to ensure a cohesive user experience and to allow for easy interpretation of data for strategic decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer views the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard to assess current product performance and customer buying patterns for optimizing inventory.

Given the retailer is logged into the InventaPro platform, when they navigate to the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, then they should see real-time data visualizations of customer purchase behavior and product performance metrics for the last 30 days.

Retailer receives insight on predicting future trends based on historical data through the dashboard.

Given the retailer is on the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, when they select the predictive analytics report, then they should receive a comprehensive forecast of the top five trending products for the next quarter based on AI algorithms.

Retailer analyzes product performance to make decisions on which items to restock.

Given the behavioral analytics data is loaded, when the retailer views the product performance section, then they should be able to see metrics such as sales volume, stock levels, and customer review scores for each product, enabling informed restocking decisions.

Retailer integrates the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard with their existing inventory management system.

Given the integration process is initiated, when the retailer connects the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard with their current inventory management system, then they should seamlessly view updated inventory levels reflected in the dashboard in real time without data discrepancies.

Retailer utilizes insights from the dashboard to tailor inventory management strategies.

Given the retailer accesses customer purchase behavior insights, when they implement changes based on dashboard recommendations, then their next inventory assessment should show optimized stock levels with reduced overstock and stockout instances by at least 20% within two months.

Retailer customizes dashboard views to focus on specific product categories.

Given the retailer is on the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, when they filter the view by product categories, then they should only see data and insights related to the selected categories and have the option to save these preferences for future visits.

Automated Inventory Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated alerts when my product stock levels are low so that I can reorder in time to meet customer demand."

Description

The Automated Inventory Alerts requirement focuses on implementing a notification system within InventaPro that alerts retailers when stock levels of specific products fall below the predefined thresholds based on customer purchasing behavior. This feature will enable retailers to react promptly to changes in demand, thereby preventing stockouts and ensuring that popular items remain available to customers. The alerts can be customizable per product and can be set for different thresholds depending on various factors such as seasonality and marketing campaigns. This capability is vital for maintaining customer satisfaction and maximizing sales opportunities.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer sets up automated inventory alerts for a seasonal product to ensure stock levels remain sufficient during a peak shopping period.

Given the retailer has set threshold levels for a seasonal product, when the stock level falls below the specified threshold, then the system should send an immediate alert to the retailer via email and mobile notification.

Retailer customizes the alert settings for different products based on historical purchase data and marketing campaigns.

Given the retailer has access to historical purchase data, when they customize alert thresholds for each product, then the system should accurately reflect these settings and trigger alerts according to the new thresholds.

Retailer receives stock alerts and takes action to restock products that are in demand before running out.

Given the retailer receives an alert about low stock, when they take action to restock the product within the alert's specified time frame, then the system should record the action and update the inventory levels accordingly.

Retailer evaluates the effectiveness of automated inventory alerts over a three-month period to determine their impact on stockouts.

Given a three-month period of using automated inventory alerts, when the retailer reviews stockout incidents, then there should be a decrease in stockouts for the products with alerts set compared to the previous three months without alerts.

Retailer accesses the dashboard to review all active inventory alerts at a glance.

Given the retailer is logged into the InventaPro dashboard, when they navigate to the inventory alerts section, then all active alerts should be displayed clearly with product details and current stock levels.

Retailer modifies alert settings for a promotion on a fast-selling item to ensure adequate stock during the campaign.

Given the retailer is running a promotional campaign, when they modify the alert for the fast-selling item to a higher threshold, then the system should update the alert settings and acknowledge the modification with a confirmation message.

Customer Segmentation Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to categorize my customers based on their purchasing behavior so that I can tailor my inventory and marketing efforts to specific consumer groups."

Description

The Customer Segmentation Analysis requirement involves classifying customers based on their purchasing behavior and preferences. This feature will allow retailers to create targeted marketing strategies and optimize their inventory by identifying which products appeal to specific customer segments. By implementing machine learning algorithms, the system can provide insights into buying patterns, enabling retailers to adjust their inventory and promotional strategies to better match customer preferences. Such analyses will empower retailers to improve customer engagement and increase sales by ensuring the right products are marketed to the right consumer groups.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Segmentation Based on Purchasing Behavior Analysis and Reporting

Given that the system has collected data on customer purchases, when the admin requests a segmentation report, then the system should provide a detailed report that lists distinct customer segments with corresponding purchasing behaviors within 5 seconds.

Real-Time Updates of Customer Segments After New Transactions

Given that a customer completes a purchase, when the transaction is recorded, then the relevant customer segment should be updated in real-time to reflect the new purchasing information within 2 minutes.

Integration of Segmentation Insights into Marketing Campaigns

Given that customer segments have been analyzed, when the marketing team creates a promotional campaign, then they should be able to select specific segments and the system should recommend inventory items tailored to those segments based on historical data.

Visualization of Customer Purchase Trends Over Time

Given that the system has historical purchase data, when the analytics feature is accessed, then the system should display a visual representation of customer purchase trends over the last 12 months, segmented by product categories.

Machine Learning Model Performance Evaluation

Given that a machine learning model is implemented for customer segmentation, when the model's performance is evaluated, then it should demonstrate an accuracy of at least 85% in predicting customer purchasing behaviors on a validation dataset.

Historical Data Import for Segmentation Analysis

Given that a retailer has historical customer data, when the data is imported into InventaPro, then the system should successfully categorize customers into segments within 24 hours of import, with a verification report available to the admin.

User-Friendly Interface for Segment Management

Given that users are navigating to the customer segmentation management feature, when they access the interface, then they should be able to view, add, edit, and delete segments with an intuitive design that prevents user error, and all changes should be saved within 5 seconds.

Channel Performance Comparison

Channel Performance Comparison provides retailers with analytical tools to evaluate the effectiveness of each sales channel. Users can easily identify high-performing channels and optimize inventory distribution accordingly, ensuring they focus their efforts on the most lucrative segments and improving overall sales performance.

Requirements

Channel Selection Analytics

"As a retailer, I want to analyze the performance of each sales channel so that I can identify which channels are most effective and optimize my inventory distribution accordingly."

Description

Channel Selection Analytics provides users with insights into the sales performance of each channel, highlighting metrics such as sales volume, profit margin, and customer engagement. This feature will empower retailers to identify which sales channels contribute the most to their revenue, enabling them to make data-informed decisions about inventory distribution and marketing focus. Additionally, by analyzing seasonal trends and customer buying patterns, users can align their inventory strategies with market demands, ensuring optimal stock levels across channels. Through easy-to-read dashboards and reports, retailers can visualize their channel performance and plan effectively for future growth and resource allocation.

Acceptance Criteria

Channel Selection Analytics Dashboard Visualization

Given the retailer has logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Channel Performance Comparison feature, then they should see a visually clear dashboard displaying sales volume, profit margin, and customer engagement metrics for each sales channel, updated in real time.

Data Accuracy in Sales Metrics

Given the retailer has connected their sales channels to InventaPro, when they generate a report for channel performance, then the sales data presented must match the actual sales data from each individual channel within a tolerance of 2%.

Seasonal Trends Analysis

Given the retailer accesses the Channel Selection Analytics feature, when they select a specific date range that includes distinct seasonal periods, then the algorithm must analyze and display sales trends for that seasonal period with identifiable variations in sales volume and profit margins.

Report Export Functionality

Given that the retailer has viewed their channel performance data, when they choose to export the report in a specified format (CSV, PDF), then the system must successfully create and download a correctly formatted report that includes all selected metrics without data loss.

User Engagement Notification

Given the retailer's dashboard, when user engagement metrics for any sales channel drop below a specified threshold, then the system must generate an alert notification for the user detailing the affected channel and the metric that triggered the alert.

Recommendations for Inventory Strategy

Given the analysis of channel performance is completed, when the retailer views the recommendations section, then the system must provide at least three actionable suggestions for optimizing inventory distribution based on the highest performing channels.

Custom Filtering Options

Given the retailer is viewing the channel performance data, when they apply custom filters (like date range or channel type), then the displayed metrics should update instantly to reflect these filters without data discrepancies.

Real-time Performance Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want a real-time dashboard that displays my channel performance so that I can quickly assess and respond to changes in sales trends."

Description

The Real-time Performance Dashboard integrates all sales data into a cohesive display for quick and easy reference. This requirement focuses on providing users with a comprehensive view of their channel performances in real-time, allowing for immediate adjustments or decisions to be made based on current data. By offering customizable visualizations and metrics that are critical to the user's operations, the dashboard enhances the overall experience by making information more accessible and actionable. Retailers will benefit from increased agility in their business decisions, helping them to respond faster to changing customer behaviors and inventory needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard User Authentication and Access Control

Given a user is logged in, when they navigate to the Real-time Performance Dashboard, then they should see their sales data specific to their account and not that of other users.

Real-time Sales Data Updates

Given that sales are occurring across various channels, when a sale is made, then the dashboard should update the relevant sales metrics and visuals within 30 seconds.

Customizable Metrics and Visualizations

Given a user is on the Real-time Performance Dashboard, when they select specific metrics to display (e.g., sales volume, traffic sources), then the dashboard should dynamically adjust to show only the selected metrics.

Historical Data Comparison Feature

Given a user is viewing the dashboard, when they choose to compare current sales data with historical data, then the dashboard should display a clear and accurate comparison chart with data from the previous period.

User-Friendly Interface and Navigation

Given a user is accessing the Real-time Performance Dashboard, when they interact with the interface, then they should be able to navigate through different sections of the dashboard intuitively and without assistance.

Real-time Inventory Alerts Integration

Given a user is viewing the dashboard, when inventory levels fall below a specified threshold, then the dashboard should provide an alert notification in real-time.

Automated Reporting Tools

"As a retailer, I want to automate my performance reporting so that I can save time and ensure I receive consistent updates on my channel performance."

Description

Automated Reporting Tools will enable users to schedule and generate reports on channel performance without manual intervention. This feature will streamline reporting processes, reducing the time spent on data compilation and projections. Reports can be tailored to specific metrics, allowing retailers to focus on sales volumes, inventory turnover, and overall efficiency. Automated reporting will not only save time but also ensure that stakeholders receive timely insights, aiding in strategic planning and response to market changes. Users can set parameters for their reports to be generated daily, weekly, or monthly, according to their needs.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules a weekly automated report on channel performance metrics every Monday morning at 9 AM.

Given a user sets a schedule for a weekly report, when the scheduled time occurs, then the report should be generated and sent to the user via email without manual intervention.

A user customizes their report to include specific metrics such as sales volumes and inventory turnover.

Given a user customizes their report settings, when they select specific metrics and save the settings, then the report should only include the selected metrics in the generated output.

A retailer requires a monthly report that includes channel performance data for the last 30 days.

Given the user requests a monthly report, when the report is generated, then it must accurately reflect channel performance data for the last 30 days and be delivered by the scheduled time.

The user wants to create an automated report that can be modified to adjust reporting frequency from weekly to monthly.

Given a user has an existing weekly report setup, when they modify the frequency to monthly and save the changes, then the report should adhere to the new schedule without errors.

Stakeholders need to access reports through a shared dashboard that updates with new data in real-time.

Given the reports are scheduled for automation, when the report is generated, then it should automatically update on the shared dashboard in real-time for all stakeholders.

An administrator wants to ensure that report generation does not impact system performance during peak business hours.

Given that reports are scheduled to generate at high traffic times, when reports are generated, then the system performance should remain within acceptable limits as previously established.

User needs to receive a notification when an automated report is successfully generated and sent.

Given a report has been generated, when the generation is complete, then the user should receive a notification via their preferred communication channel.

Competitor Channel Benchmarking

"As a retailer, I want to benchmark my channel performance against competitors so that I can identify areas for improvement and implement effective strategies to enhance my sales."

Description

Competitor Channel Benchmarking allows retailers to compare their channel performance against key industry competitors. This feature will provide insights into how well their sales channels are performing relative to the market, highlighting areas for improvement and opportunities for growth. By analyzing competitor strategies and performance metrics, retailers can identify best practices and implement changes to elevate their own channel performance. Inclusion of competitive data within their performance analysis aids retailers in maintaining a competitive edge in a rapidly evolving retail environment.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailers access the Competitor Channel Benchmarking feature to compare their sales performance with key industry competitors during a quarterly review meeting to identify areas for improvement.

Given a retailer selects the Competitor Channel Benchmarking feature, When they input their data and select competitors for comparison, Then the system should display a report indicating the channel performance metrics side by side for clear comparison.

During a marketing strategy meeting, a retailer wants to identify which sales channels are underperforming compared to competitors using the benchmarking data.

Given the retailer navigates to the benchmarking report, When they filter the channels by performance metrics, Then the system should update the display to highlight underperforming channels with a clear visual indicator and suggested strategies for improvement.

A retailer uses the Competitor Channel Benchmarking to prepare for an upcoming investor presentation, focusing on competitive performance metrics.

Given the retailer opens the benchmarking feature, When they generate a comprehensive report, Then the system should allow for export options in commonly used formats (PDF, Excel) while ensuring all graphs and data points are included accurately.

Retailers monitor their channel performance metrics over time to evaluate the impact of changes made after utilizing competitor benchmarking insights.

Given a retailer accesses their historical performance in the system, When they compare metrics before and after implementing changes based on benchmarking insights, Then the system should display the percentage change in performance metrics clearly, enabling easy assessment of impact.

The retailer collaborates with their team to strategize improvements based on the Competitive Channel Benchmarking insights derived from real-time data.

Given a retailer reviews the benchmarking insights with their team, When discussions are held to strategize based on the insights, Then the system should provide a shared notes feature to capture strategies and action items that can be revisited later.

Retailers wish to analyze trends in channel performance against competitors over multiple quarters to predict future sales strategies.

Given the retailer selects a time range for benchmarking analysis, When they generate a multi-quarter report, Then the system should display a trend graph showing both their and competitor performance metrics over the selected periods for easy analysis.

At a trade show, a retailer leverages the Competitor Channel Benchmarking feature to discuss performance metrics with potential partners.

Given the retailer demonstrates the benchmarking feature at a trade show, When they showcase the comparative performance metrics, Then the system should perform smoothly without delays and accurately reflect the latest data in the demonstration.

Inventory Allocation Recommendations

"As a retailer, I want to receive recommendations on inventory distribution across channels so that I can optimize stock levels and reduce the risks of overstock or stockouts."

Description

Inventory Allocation Recommendations provide AI-driven suggestions on how retailers should distribute their inventory across various channels based on the identified performance metrics. This feature will analyze past sales data, forecast demand, and suggest optimal stock levels for each channel, thereby minimizing instances of overstock and stockouts. By employing predictive analytics and machine learning, users will receive tailored recommendations that adapt to their business patterns and seasonal trends, streamlining operations and improving customer satisfaction by ensuring the right products are available when needed.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to receive AI-driven inventory allocation recommendations for my various sales channels after entering historical sales data and current stock levels, so that I can distribute inventory effectively and minimize stockouts and overstock situations.

Given that I have entered my store's historical sales data and current stock levels, when I request inventory allocation recommendations, then I should receive a list of recommended stock levels for each channel that optimizes my inventory distribution based on projected demand.

As a retailer, I want to review the AI-generated inventory allocation recommendations to understand how they were derived, so that I can confidently make informed decisions about my inventory distribution.

Given that I have received inventory allocation recommendations, when I click on a specific recommendation, then I should be able to view detailed insights on demand forecasting, past sales performance, and the rationale behind each suggested stock level.

As a retailer, I want to validate the impact of the AI-driven inventory allocation recommendations on my actual inventory levels post-implementation, to measure their effectiveness in preventing stockouts and overstock.

Given that I have implemented the inventory allocation recommendations, when I conduct a performance review after one month, then I should observe a reduction in stockout instances by at least 20% and a decrease in overstock situations by at least 15% compared to the previous month.

As a retailer, I want to ensure that the inventory allocation recommendations are automatically updated based on real-time sales data, so that I can continually optimize my inventory distribution.

Given that my sales data is integrated and updated in real-time, when there are significant changes in sales patterns, then the system should automatically adjust and provide new inventory allocation recommendations within 24 hours.

As a retailer, I want to be notified when the AI recommendations suggest drastic changes to inventory allocations, ensuring I have an opportunity to review them before implementation.

Given that the AI-generated inventory allocation recommendations indicate a change of more than 30% in stock levels for any channel, when I receive these recommendations, then I should also receive a notification prompting me to review the changes before proceeding.

As a retailer, I want to compare the performance of my channels before and after implementing the inventory allocation recommendations, helping me understand their impact on my sales.

Given that I have access to sales performance metrics, when I compare data from before and after implementing the recommendations, then I should see an overall increase in sales performance of at least 10% in the optimized channels within three months.

As a retailer, I want to receive user-friendly summaries of the recommendations that I can quickly digest and share with my team, facilitating effective communications and planning.

Given that I have accessed the inventory allocation recommendations, when I download the summary report, then it should include clear visualizations, summary statistics, and a concise analysis of the recommendations to aid in decision-making.

Real-Time Inventory Sharing

This feature enables Supply Chain Coordinators to share real-time inventory data with suppliers, ensuring that both parties are consistently updated on stock levels. By having access to current inventory figures, suppliers can proactively respond to demand fluctuations, minimize delays, and maintain optimal stock levels, which enhances collaboration and efficiency.

Requirements

Dynamic Data Access

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to access real-time inventory data so that I can keep suppliers informed and adjust stock levels appropriately without delays."

Description

The Real-Time Inventory Sharing feature requires the ability to dynamically access and display current inventory data from multiple systems, including both the InventaPro platform and supplier systems. This ensures that all stakeholders have up-to-date information, facilitating timely decision-making and enhancing collaboration between retailers and suppliers. It is critical for minimizing stockouts and overstock situations as it allows users to respond quickly to inventory fluctuations based on sales and demand trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Supply Chain Coordinator shares inventory data with a supplier during a monthly review meeting to assess stock levels and demand trends.

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator is logged into InventaPro, when they request to view current inventory data, then the system displays real-time inventory levels from both InventaPro and supplier systems within 2 seconds.

A supplier accesses the shared inventory data of a retailer to adjust their orders based on current stock levels and upcoming demand.

Given that the supplier has access permissions, when they log into their platform, then they can view real-time inventory data, including alerts for low stock levels or overstock situations, with at least a 95% accuracy rate compared to InventaPro data.

During a peak sales period, a retailer monitors inventory levels using InventaPro to prevent stockouts.

Given that the retailer is accessing the dashboard during peak sales, when sales exceed forecasted demand, then the system updates inventory levels in less than 5 minutes to reflect current stock and automatically notifies suppliers of low stock conditions.

A system administrator sets up dynamic access for a new supplier to ensure they can view real-time inventory data efficiently.

Given that the system administrator is configuring supplier access, when they set up the new supplier, then the supplier should receive a login notification email within 15 minutes, and they should be able to log in and access inventory data immediately.

A retailer requests an inventory report that includes real-time data from both InventaPro and supplier systems for review in a quarterly forecast meeting.

Given the retailer requests a report, when the request is submitted, then the system generates a comprehensive report including real-time data within 10 minutes and allows exporting options in CSV and PDF formats.

A supplier updates their inventory management system based on the real-time data shared by the retailer's InventaPro platform.

Given that the supplier has received an update alert, when they access the updated inventory data, then their system reflects the updated stock levels within 5 minutes, ensuring they can adjust their supply needs promptly.

Automated Inventory Alerts

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to receive automated alerts for critical inventory levels so that I can take immediate action to prevent stock issues before they occur."

Description

This requirement outlines the need for an automated alert system that notifies Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers of critical inventory thresholds—such as low stock or excess inventory. These alerts will help prevent stockouts and overstocking issues and ensure that all parties are proactively managing inventory levels. Integration with communication tools (e.g., email, SMS) will be necessary to facilitate timely notifications.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification of Low Stock Levels

Given that the inventory level of a specific product falls below the predetermined threshold, when the system detects this condition, then an automated alert is sent to the designated Supply Chain Coordinator and supplier via email and SMS.

Notification of Excess Inventory Levels

Given that the inventory level of a specific product exceeds the predetermined threshold, when the system detects this condition, then an automated alert is sent to the designated Supply Chain Coordinator and supplier via email and SMS.

Integration with Communication Tools

Given that the alert notification system is in place, when a low or excess stock alert is triggered, then the alert is successfully sent to both email and SMS communication tools without delay or failure.

User Customizable Alert Settings

Given that Supply Chain Coordinators have access to the inventory management system, when they log in to the system, then they can customize alert thresholds for low and excess stock on a per-product basis.

Historical Alert Log Access

Given that alerts have been triggered over time, when the Supply Chain Coordinator accesses the historical alert log, then they can view all past alerts including timestamps and products affected.

User Feedback on Alert Relevance

Given that alerts have been sent, when the Supply Chain Coordinator receives an alert, then they can provide feedback on the relevance of the alert, which is logged for future system adjustments.

Collaborative Inventory Dashboard

"As a supplier, I want to view a shared inventory dashboard so that I can understand stock levels and trends to better align my production with the retailer's needs."

Description

To enhance decision-making, a collaborative inventory dashboard should be created that both retailers and suppliers can access. This dashboard would visually represent real-time inventory data, demand forecasts, and alerts. By consolidating this information, it will provide all stakeholders with a strategic overview of inventory statuses and trends, enabling better planning and collaboration.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator logs into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard, then they should see real-time inventory data for all products, including stock levels and demand forecasts, displayed clearly and accurately.

Real-time updates on inventory changes.

Given that a retailer updates the inventory level for a product in InventaPro, when this update is made, then the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard should automatically refresh to reflect the new inventory level within 5 seconds.

Supplier access to inventory updates.

Given a supplier is authorized to access the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard, when they log in during a peak demand period, then they should be able to see alerts for low stock items and recommendations for reorder quantities displayed prominently on the dashboard.

User interface accessibility for all stakeholders.

Given that both retailers and suppliers access the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard, when they use the dashboard, then they should find the layout intuitive and be able to navigate to key information (inventory levels, trends, alerts) without any prior training.

Historical data trends visualization.

Given that a user is on the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard, when they select the historical trends view, then they should be able to see a graphical representation of inventory levels and demand forecasts over the past 30 days with options to filter by product category.

Notifications for inventory thresholds.

Given the Collaborative Inventory Dashboard is active, when inventory levels drop below a predefined threshold, then the system should send notifications to both the retailer and supplier to alert them of the need to restock within 15 minutes.

Historical Data Analytics

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want access to historical inventory data analytics so that I can identify trends and optimize future orders based on past performance."

Description

The feature should facilitate access to historical inventory data analytics to allow Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers to make data-driven decisions regarding stock levels and demand forecasting. This component will enhance the ability to identify patterns in inventory usage, informing future purchases and improving stock management strategies. It plays a vital role in forecasting customer demand and adjusting supply accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing Historical Inventory Data for Analysis

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator is logged in to InventaPro, when they navigate to the Historical Data Analytics section, then they should be able to generate reports on inventory usage patterns over the past 12 months.

Data-Driven Decision Making for Stock Levels

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator has accessed historical data analytics, when they review the generated reports, then they should be able to identify at least three distinct patterns that influence stock level decisions.

Supplier Collaboration Based on Historical Insights

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator has identified inventory usage patterns, when they share this data with suppliers, then suppliers should acknowledge receipt and provide feedback on their procurement strategies within 48 hours.

Forecasting Future Demand Using Historical Data

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator uses the historical data analytics feature, when they input historical trends into the demand forecasting tool, then the system should produce a forecast for the next quarter within 10% accuracy of actual sales.

Displaying Historical Data Trends on Dashboard

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator is using the InventaPro dashboard, when they view the historical data analytics widget, then it should visually represent at least three key inventory metrics over the past 12 months in an easily understandable format.

User Permissions for Historical Data Access

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator is managing user roles, when they set permissions for suppliers, then they should be able to restrict or allow access to historical inventory data based on user roles with a confirmation message upon successful modification.

Real-Time Sync of Historical Data Analytics

Given that inventory levels are updated in real-time, when historical data analytics is accessed, then the data should reflect all inventory changes made within the last 24 hours without discrepancies.

Cross-Platform Compatibility

"As a small retailer, I want my inventory data to sync across all my sales channels so that I can manage stock levels consistently, regardless of where sales occur."

Description

Real-Time Inventory Sharing must support cross-platform functionality, allowing for seamless integration with various e-commerce platforms that InventaPro users may employ. This ensures that inventory data is accurately reflected across all platforms and reduces the risk of misinformation due to system discrepancies. This requirement is crucial for maintaining a unified approach to inventory management across both online and offline sales channels.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory data is updated in real-time as stock levels change, allowing both Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers to view current figures simultaneously.

Given that a stock level is updated by a Supply Chain Coordinator, When the update occurs, Then the new stock level must be reflected in real-time on the supplier's dashboard within 5 seconds.

Suppliers need to access the inventory data shared by the Supply Chain Coordinator through different e-commerce platforms.

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator shares inventory data, When a supplier accesses the inventory information via any supported e-commerce platform, Then the data displayed must consistently match the source data from InventaPro without discrepancies.

Supply Chain Coordinators require notifications for any significant changes in inventory levels shared with suppliers.

Given a significant stock level change occurs, When the change is detected, Then the system must notify the Supply Chain Coordinator and the respective supplier within 2 minutes via the designated communication channel.

The system needs to synchronize inventory data across multiple platforms without causing delays or data loss.

Given that inventory data is modified on one platform, When the change is enacted, Then the updated inventory data must be reflected on all integrated platforms within 10 seconds.

Suppliers must be able to interact with the real-time inventory data to forecast their supply needs based on current stock levels.

Given that real-time inventory sharing is active, When suppliers view the inventory data, Then they must have access to historical trends and forecasts for better decision-making regarding their supplies.

Different users (Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers) need to see distinct views of the inventory data based on their roles.

Given the roles of users are defined in the system, When a user accesses the inventory data, Then the view must be tailored to their role, displaying relevant data while hiding sensitive information from unauthorized users.

The system must handle multiple simultaneous access requests without performance degradation.

Given multiple users are trying to access the inventory data at the same time, When they attempt to do so, Then the system must maintain performance levels with no increase in response time beyond 2 seconds during peak access.

Integrated Communication Hub

The Integrated Communication Hub provides a centralized platform for Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers to exchange messages, share documents, and collaborate on inventory management tasks. This streamlined communication reduces the time spent on email chains and phone calls, allowing for faster decision-making and improved relationships.

Requirements

Real-time Messaging System

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to communicate with suppliers in real-time so that I can make quicker decisions about inventory management and improve overall collaboration."

Description

The Real-time Messaging System enables instant communication between Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers within the Integrated Communication Hub, allowing users to send and receive messages in real-time. This feature is designed to reduce the reliance on traditional email communication, thereby speeding up response times and facilitating quicker decision-making. Users can access a chat interface that supports group discussions as well as one-on-one messaging, making it easier to collaborate on inventory management. By integrating seamlessly into the existing dashboard of InventaPro, this requirement enhances user experience and ensures that all communication is centralized and easily accessible, contributing to more efficient inventory management workflows.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time message sending between Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers during inventory planning meetings.

Given the user is logged into the Integrated Communication Hub, when they enter a message in the chat interface and click 'send', then the message should be instantly visible to all participants in the conversation.

Sharing documents within a conversation between Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers.

Given a user is in an ongoing chat, when they upload a document from their computer, then the document should be accessible for download by all chat participants immediately after uploading.

Accessing message history for a specific conversation in the Integrated Communication Hub.

Given the user selects a previous conversation, when they click on it, then the complete message history for that conversation should be displayed in chronological order, including timestamps and sender information.

Notification alerts for new messages received in real-time.

Given the user is logged into the system, when a new message is received, then the user should receive an instant notification alerting them of the new message regardless of whether they are currently viewing the chat interface or not.

Group messaging for inventory management discussions with multiple suppliers.

Given multiple suppliers are invited to a chat, when any participant sends a message, then all participants should receive the message instantly in their respective chat interfaces.

Using the search function to locate messages containing specific keywords within chats.

Given the chat interface is open, when the user enters a keyword into the search bar, then only the messages containing that keyword should be displayed, allowing for easy retrieval of historical conversations.

Accessibility compliance of the Real-time Messaging System for all users.

Given the user has accessibility needs, when they use the messaging interface, then the system should comply with WCAG 2.1 accessibility standards, including text-to-speech and keyboard navigation support.

Document Sharing Feature

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to share documents securely with my suppliers so that I can ensure everyone has access to the most current and relevant information, enhancing our collaboration."

Description

The Document Sharing Feature allows users to upload, share, and manage important documents related to inventory management directly within the Integrated Communication Hub. This feature addresses the need for secure and organized document handling, providing a centralized location for all relevant documents such as invoices, contracts, and inventory reports. Users can easily share these documents with their teams or suppliers and set permissions for viewing or editing. By streamlining document sharing, this requirement enhances collaboration, minimizes confusion, and ensures that all team members have access to the latest information needed to make informed decisions on inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User uploads an invoice document to the Document Sharing Feature within the Integrated Communication Hub.

Given a user with access to the Document Sharing Feature, when they upload a document, then the document should be successfully saved and displayed in the shared documents list with a timestamp and user ID.

User shares an inventory report document with a supplier through the Document Sharing Feature.

Given a user who has uploaded a document, when they share the document with a specified supplier, then the supplier should receive a notification and be able to access the document with the correct permissions set by the user.

User sets permissions for viewing and editing a shared document.

Given a user shares a document with multiple users, when the user sets specific permissions for viewing and editing, then those permissions should be reflected accurately in the access control settings, preventing unauthorized edits.

User searches for a specific document within the Document Sharing Feature.

Given that multiple documents are uploaded, when the user inputs a keyword in the search bar, then relevant documents should be displayed in the search results, allowing the user to locate documents quickly and efficiently.

User deletes a shared document from the Document Sharing Feature.

Given a user has shared a document, when they choose to delete it, then the document should be removed from the shared list, and relevant users should receive a notification regarding its deletion.

User views the version history of a shared document.

Given a user has accessed a shared document, when they click on the version history option, then a list of previous versions should be displayed along with timestamps and details of changes made by users.

User receives an alert when a document is updated.

Given a user follows a shared document, when that document is updated by another user, then the original user should receive a notification with a summary of the changes made.

Integration with Email Notifications

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to receive email notifications for important updates in the Integrated Communication Hub so that I can stay informed without constantly checking the platform."

Description

The Integration with Email Notifications feature enables users to receive alerts and updates directly to their email, ensuring they never miss important messages or document changes within the Integrated Communication Hub. This feature enhances the existing communication system by allowing users to customize their notification preferences, choosing when and how to receive updates. Whether it's an important message from a supplier, a shared document, or an ongoing discussion, users can stay informed and engaged with minimal disruption to their workflow. This integration supports the need for timely information and reduces the risk of miscommunication or missed messages, ultimately improving the efficiency of inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives email notifications when a new message is posted in the Integrated Communication Hub.

Given a user has opted into email notifications, when a new message is posted in the hub, then the user receives an email notification within 5 minutes of the message being posted.

Users can customize their email notification preferences for different types of updates.

Given a user is in the notification settings, when they adjust their preferences for message types, then the system saves the user's preferences and reflects these changes in the notification settings.

Users receive email alerts about document changes made in the Integrated Communication Hub.

Given a user has enabled document change alerts, when a document is modified in the hub, then the user receives an email alert detailing the changes within 10 minutes of modification.

A user who has not opted into notifications does not receive emails when changes occur.

Given a user has not opted into email notifications, when a message is posted or a document is changed, then the user does not receive any email notifications related to these events.

Users can view a log of all email notifications sent through the system.

Given a user accesses the notification log, when they open the log, then they can see a complete and accurate history of all notifications sent, including timestamps and message summaries.

Users are notified of their notification setting changes by email for confirmation.

Given a user updates their notification settings, when the changes are saved, then the user receives a confirmation email summarizing the changes made.

Activity Log Tracking

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to access a log of all communications and document sharing activities with my suppliers so I can review past interactions for compliance and improve future collaboration."

Description

The Activity Log Tracking feature records and displays all interactions within the Integrated Communication Hub, including messages sent, documents shared, and user engagement. This auditing feature is crucial for maintaining transparency and accountability among team members and suppliers. Users can easily review past communications to ensure compliance and trace the history of decision-making processes. By having access to this log, Supply Chain Coordinators can identify areas for improvement in communication practices and enhance overall efficiency in inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Activity Log Access for Supply Chain Coordinators

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator logs into the Integrated Communication Hub, when they navigate to the Activity Log section, then they should see a list of all interactions, including messages sent and documents shared, sorted by date.

Document Sharing History Visibility

Given a user shares a document within the Integrated Communication Hub, when the document is sent, then the activity log should record the document name, the sender, the recipient, and the timestamp of sharing.

Message Interaction Tracking

Given a user sends a message through the Integrated Communication Hub, when the message is sent, then the activity log should capture the message content, the sender, the recipient, and the date and time it was sent.

Compliance Review of Past Communications

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator needs to review past communications, when they access the Activity Log, then they should be able to filter by date range or user to find specific interactions for compliance checks.

User Engagement Metrics

Given an interaction occurs within the Integrated Communication Hub, when the Activity Log is displayed, then it should indicate the number of times a user has engaged with messages or documents, showing metrics on interaction frequency.

Audit Trail for Decision-Making Processes

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator accesses the Activity Log, when reviewing interactions, then they should be able to see a chronological trail of communications that led to key decisions made regarding inventory management.

Cross-Platform Synchronization of Activity Logs

Given a user accesses the Integrated Communication Hub from different devices, when they view the Activity Log, then all interactions should be synchronized and consistent across all devices without discrepancies.

User Role Management

"As an administrator, I want to manage user roles and permissions within the Integrated Communication Hub so that I can maintain security and ensure appropriate access for each team member."

Description

The User Role Management feature allows administrators to set up and manage different user roles and permissions within the Integrated Communication Hub. This is essential for ensuring that sensitive information is only accessible to authorized personnel, providing a layer of security and control. Administrators can assign roles such as 'viewer', 'editor', or 'administrator', allowing for tailored access to various functionalities within the hub. This requirement not only enhances security but also helps streamline operations by ensuring that users only have access to the features they need for their specific tasks.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role Assignment by Administrator.

Given an administrator user, when they navigate to the user management section, then they should be able to assign roles (viewer, editor, administrator) to any user, and the system should save these roles without errors.

Role-based Access Control Enforcement.

Given a user with 'viewer' role, when they attempt to access the document editing functionalities, then they should receive an access denied message, ensuring that role permissions are enforced correctly.

Modification of User Roles by Administrator.

Given an administrator user, when they change a user's role from 'editor' to 'viewer', then the system should update the user's permissions immediately, and the user should only be able to perform actions allowed for the 'viewer' role.

Viewing Role Definitions.

Given an administrator user, when they view the role management page, then they should see a clear description of each role's permissions and functionalities to make informed decisions on role assignments.

Audit Trail of Role Changes.

Given an administrator user, when they make changes to user roles, then the system should log these changes with timestamps and the user who made the changes for accountability and traceability.

User Notification on Role Change.

Given a user whose role has been changed by an administrator, when the role change is saved, then the user should receive an email notification informing them of the new role and its permissions.

Supplier Performance Dashboard

The Supplier Performance Dashboard allows Supply Chain Coordinators to monitor and evaluate supplier performance metrics, such as delivery timelines, order accuracy, and responsiveness. This data-driven insight ensures that retailers can make informed decisions about their supplier partnerships, encouraging accountability and reliability in the supply chain.

Requirements

Real-time Supplier Metrics

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to see real-time supplier performance metrics so that I can quickly identify problems and enhance supplier reliability."

Description

The Real-time Supplier Metrics requirement involves displaying current data regarding supplier performance, including metrics such as on-time delivery rates, order accuracy percentages, and response times to inquiries. This real-time data will empower Supply Chain Coordinators to quickly identify and address any potential issues with suppliers, ensuring that the supply chain remains efficient and responsive. Moreover, the integration of real-time data into the Supplier Performance Dashboard will facilitate better communication and collaboration with suppliers, ultimately leading to improved inventory management and enhanced retail operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Display of Supplier Performance Metrics

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator is logged into the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they access the Real-time Supplier Metrics section, then the dashboard should display current on-time delivery rates, order accuracy percentages, and response times updated every five minutes.

On-time Delivery Rate Visualization

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator is on the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they view the on-time delivery metrics, then the dashboard should visually represent on-time delivery rates as a percentage, with color-coded indicators (green for above 90%, yellow for 75-90%, red for below 75%).

Order Accuracy Percentage Monitoring

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator is reviewing supplier performance, when they access the order accuracy percentage display, then the system should provide a clear numerical value alongside trend arrows indicating improvement or decline over the past month.

Supplier Response Time Evaluation

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator is analyzing supplier responsiveness, when they view the response time metrics, then the dashboard should present an average response time in hours, comparing it against the target of 24 hours, with alert triggers for delays.

Supplier Comparison Feature

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator wants to evaluate multiple suppliers, when they select two or more suppliers, then the dashboard should display a side-by-side comparison of their on-time delivery rates, order accuracy, and response times in a clear, visual format.

Real-time Alert Notifications for Poor Performance

Given that the system detects supplier performance below acceptable thresholds (e.g., on-time delivery < 75%), when this occurs, then the dashboard should send real-time alert notifications to the Supply Chain Coordinator via email and SMS.

Customizable Performance Reports

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to create customizable reports on supplier performance so that I can focus on the metrics that matter most to my analysis."

Description

The Customizable Performance Reports requirement allows users to generate tailored reports on supplier performance based on specific metrics and timeframes. This feature enables Supply Chain Coordinators to focus on the most relevant data for their needs, such as selecting metrics like delivery efficiency or order completion rates. By providing flexibility in reporting, this capability will help retailers to make informed decisions about supplier partnerships and negotiate better terms, fostering better supplier relationships and improved overall supply chain performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects specific performance metrics and timeframe for generating reports.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator chooses 'Delivery Efficiency' and a timeframe of 'Last Quarter', When they generate the report, Then a report displaying only the selected metrics and timeframe should be produced without errors.

User saves a customized report configuration for future use.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator customizes a report and clicks 'Save', When they navigate back to the report configuration page, Then the saved configuration should be displayed under 'Saved Reports' section.

User exports a performance report in multiple formats.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator generates a report, When the coordinator selects the 'Export' option, Then they should be able to choose from CSV, PDF, and Excel formats for download without any data loss.

User views historical performance trends for suppliers.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator selects 'Order Completion Rates' metric over the past 12 months, When they generate the report, Then they should see a graphical representation of the trend over the selected period.

User generates a report that filters suppliers based on performance thresholds.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator sets a filter for 'Delivery Timeliness' greater than 95%, When they generate the report, Then it should only include suppliers meeting the specified threshold.

User analyzes supplier performance across different delivery methods.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator selects delivery methods 'Standard' and 'Express', When they generate a report, Then the report should show performance metrics separately for each selected delivery method.

User schedules automated report generation for supplier performance metrics.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator sets up an automated report to be sent weekly, When the next scheduled date arrives, Then the report should be generated and emailed to the selected recipients without manual intervention.

Supplier Scorecard Visualization

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to view supplier performance metrics in a scorecard format so that I can easily assess and compare suppliers at a glance."

Description

The Supplier Scorecard Visualization requirement provides a graphical representation of supplier performance metrics in the Supplier Performance Dashboard. This visualization will include charts and graphs that allow Supply Chain Coordinators to easily interpret performance data, track improvements over time, and identify trends. By visualizing these metrics, users can quickly assess which suppliers are meeting expectations and which need improvement, thus aiding in strategic decision-making regarding supplier selection and management.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Supplier Performance Metrics in the Dashboard

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is logged into InventaPro, When they access the Supplier Performance Dashboard, Then they should see a visual representation of supplier performance metrics including delivery timelines, order accuracy, and responsiveness.

Filtering Supplier Data

Given the Supplier Performance Dashboard is displayed, When the Supply Chain Coordinator applies filters to select a specific supplier or date range, Then the visual representation should update to reflect only the selected data.

Comparing Supplier Performance Over Time

Given the visual representation of supplier performance metrics, When the Supply Chain Coordinator selects a time frame for comparison, Then the dashboard should display historical performance trends for all relevant suppliers.

Exporting Supplier Performance Reports

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is fully loaded, When the Supply Chain Coordinator clicks the export button, Then they should be able to download a report of the supplier performance metrics in CSV format.

Receiving Alerts for Performance Issues

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is monitoring the Supplier Performance Dashboard, When a supplier's performance metric falls below a predefined threshold, Then an alert should be generated and displayed to the user in real time.

Customization of Dashboard Views

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is using the Supplier Performance Dashboard, When they customize their view by adding or removing metrics, Then the dashboard should save these preferences for future logins.

Automated Supplier Alerts

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to receive automated alerts for supplier performance issues so that I can act quickly to prevent supply chain disruptions."

Description

The Automated Supplier Alerts requirement involves setting up notifications for specific performance thresholds (e.g., late deliveries or low order accuracy). These alerts will automatically notify Supply Chain Coordinators when a supplier's performance dips below predefined standards, allowing for immediate action to mitigate risks. This proactive measure will enhance the reliability of the supply chain, ensuring that supply chain coordinators remain informed and can pivot quickly to maintain optimal inventory levels and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Threshold Exceeded for Late Deliveries

Given a supplier's delivery is recorded as late, When the late delivery reaches the predefined threshold of 3 occurrences within a month, Then an automated alert is triggered to notify the Supply Chain Coordinator via email and dashboard notification.

Threshold Exceeded for Low Order Accuracy

Given a supplier's order accuracy is logged and monitored, When the order accuracy drops below 85% for three consecutive orders, Then an automated alert is triggered to notify the Supply Chain Coordinator via email and dashboard notification.

Real-time Dashboard Notification

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is active, When a supplier breach occurs, Then the dashboard reflects the breach in real-time, and includes a specific alert regarding the supplier's performance issue.

Multiple Alerts Handling

Given multiple suppliers may breach performance thresholds at the same time, When two or more suppliers exceed their defined thresholds, Then the system generates individual alerts for each supplier in the dashboard and sends notifications without delay.

Acknowledgment of Alerts by Supply Chain Coordinator

Given an automated alert is received by Supply Chain Coordinator, When the coordinator views the alert on the dashboard, Then the system allows the coordinator to acknowledge the alert, and tracks the acknowledgment status for reporting purposes.

Audit Trail for Alerts

Given alerts are triggered for supplier performance issues, When a supplier alert is generated, Then the system logs the alert details including timestamp, supplier details, and alert reason for future auditing.

Supplier Re-engagement Notification

Given a supplier has received multiple alerts, When a new breach is triggered after 30 days of corrective actions being implemented, Then the system sends an additional notification to the Supply Chain Coordinator recommending a review meeting with the supplier to discuss ongoing issues.

Integration with Existing ERP Systems

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want the Supplier Performance Dashboard to integrate with our existing ERP system so that I can have a comprehensive view of supplier data without manual input."

Description

The Integration with Existing ERP Systems requirement focuses on creating seamless connectivity between the Supplier Performance Dashboard and other existing enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems used by retailers. This integration will ensure that supplier performance data collected from various sources can be automatically synchronized and accessed within the Supplier Performance Dashboard, providing a unified view of supply chain efficiency. By integrating these systems, retailers will enhance data accuracy and reduce manual data entry, leading to a more streamlined supply chain process.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Data Integration Validation

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is connected to an ERP system, when supplier performance data is updated in the ERP, then the corresponding metrics in the Supplier Performance Dashboard should reflect these changes within 5 minutes.

Real-time Error Handling in Data Sync

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is attempting to sync with the ERP system, when a data synchronization error occurs, then the system should generate an error report that is accessible to the user within the dashboard.

User Interface Integration Visibility

Given that a user is viewing the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they look for the integrated ERP data, then all relevant supplier performance metrics should be clearly displayed and easily distinguishable from manually entered data.

Authentication and Security Measures

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is connecting to the ERP system, when a user attempts to access the dashboard, then the system must validate user credentials and ensure secure access to comply with data protection regulations.

Historical Data Integration Verification

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is integrated with the ERP system, when a user navigates to the historical performance metrics section, then they should be able to view data from the previous 12 months without discrepancies.

User Training and Documentation Availability

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard is operational after implementing ERP integration, when a user needs assistance, then comprehensive user training materials and documentation should be readily available within the dashboard or its help section.

Feedback Mechanism for Integrated Data

Given that the Supplier Performance Dashboard includes integrated ERP data, when users provide feedback on their experience, then the system should successfully log and categorize this feedback for future enhancements to the integration feature.

Supplier Comparison Tool

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to compare multiple suppliers on key performance metrics so that I can make informed choices for our procurement needs."

Description

The Supplier Comparison Tool requirement enables Supply Chain Coordinators to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side based on key performance metrics. This comparison will facilitate better decision-making when choosing suppliers for future orders by providing a clear view of strengths and weaknesses across different suppliers. This analytical tool will help retailers streamline procurement processes, negotiate better contracts, and enhance overall supplier management strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Comparing Supplier Performance for Upcoming Orders

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they select multiple suppliers to compare, then the system displays a side-by-side comparison of delivery timelines, order accuracy, and responsiveness for each selected supplier.

Evaluating Supplier Metrics Effectiveness

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator views the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when they use the Supplier Comparison Tool, then they are able to filter suppliers based on performance metrics such as average delivery time and order accuracy.

Identifying Top Performing Suppliers

Given multiple suppliers are compared in the Supplier Comparison Tool, when the Supply Chain Coordinator views the comparison, then they can easily identify which supplier has the best performance score in order accuracy and response time.

Facilitating Informed Decision-Making

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator completes a supplier comparison, when they analyze the results, then they can generate a report that summarizes the strengths and weaknesses of each supplier based on the comparison metrics used.

Ensuring Data Accuracy and Timeliness

Given the Supplier Comparison Tool is utilized, when suppliers' performance metrics are updated, then the tool reflects the latest data to ensure accurate comparisons are made.

Streamlining Supplier Selection

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator has finalized supplier selections based on the comparison, when they initiate the procurement process, then the system should record the selected suppliers and provide notes on their comparative performance for future reference.

Comparing Historical Supplier Performance

Given the supply chain coordinator wants to assess historical performance, when they access the Supplier Comparison Tool, then they can view and compare historical metrics for each supplier selected.

Collaborative Order Management

Collaborative Order Management allows users to draft and manage purchase orders directly within the portal, facilitating seamless collaboration with suppliers. They can modify orders, add comments, and share specific requirements, improving order accuracy and reducing misunderstandings, while ensuring timely replenishment.

Requirements

Order Drafting Interface

"As a retailer, I want to be able to draft purchase orders easily so that I can manage my inventory more effectively and avoid stockouts."

Description

The Order Drafting Interface allows users to create, modify, and manage purchase orders directly within the InventaPro portal. This requirement focuses on providing a user-friendly, intuitive interface where users can input order details, select products, and manage quantities. The streamlined interface will enable users to easily navigate the order creation process, leading to increased efficiency and reduced errors. Additionally, this feature should integrate seamlessly with the inventory management system, pulling real-time stock data to inform purchasing decisions and ensuring that users only order what is necessary to meet demand.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new purchase order in the Order Drafting Interface.

Given the user is logged into the InventaPro portal, when they navigate to the Order Drafting Interface and select 'Create New Order', then they should see an intuitive form where they can enter order details including supplier information, product selection, and quantities.

User modifies an existing purchase order.

Given the user has an existing purchase order open in the Order Drafting Interface, when they make changes to any field (e.g., product quantity or supplier details) and click 'Save', then the updated order should reflect those changes and display a confirmation message.

User checks real-time stock availability when drafting a new order.

Given the user is creating a new purchase order, when they begin to select products from the inventory list, then the interface should display real-time stock levels next to each product, helping users make informed purchasing decisions.

User adds comments to a purchase order before submitting.

Given the user is creating or modifying a purchase order, when they enter comments or specific requirements in the comment section, then those comments should be saved with the order and visible to any collaborators on that order.

User submits a purchase order for approval.

Given the user has completed all fields in a purchase order, when they click the 'Submit for Approval' button, then the order should be saved and a notification sent to the designated approvers.

User views the history of modifications made to a purchase order.

Given the user has an existing purchase order open, when they navigate to the 'Order History' tab, then they should see a detailed log of changes made to the order, including timestamps and user details.

User checks for errors in the purchase order before submission.

Given the user is finalizing a purchase order, when they click the 'Check for Errors' button, then the system should validate the order details and display a list of any issues that need to be resolved before submission.

Supplier Collaboration Tools

"As a purchasing manager, I want to communicate directly with suppliers about my purchase orders so that we can ensure accuracy and clarity in our transactions."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling users to collaborate effectively with suppliers during the purchase order process. It will include features such as the ability to add comments and share specific requirements directly within the order management interface. These tools are essential for improving communication between retailers and suppliers, addressing potential issues before they arise, and creating a clear understanding of order specifications. This collaboration aspect is designed to enhance order accuracy, reduce misunderstandings, and foster stronger supplier relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier can view and comment on a draft purchase order before it is finalized by the retailer.

Given a purchase order is created, When the retailer shares the order with the supplier, Then the supplier should be able to view the order and add comments before the retailer finalizes it.

Retailer can modify purchase orders based on supplier feedback.

Given a supplier has commented on a purchase order, When the retailer accesses the draft order, Then the retailer should be able to modify the order based on the supplier's suggestions and save the changes.

Notifications sent to suppliers when a new purchase order is shared for collaboration.

Given a new purchase order is created, When the retailer shares the order with the supplier, Then the supplier should receive a notification alerting them of the new order to review.

Retailer can track the status of comments made by suppliers on a purchase order.

Given a purchase order shared with a supplier, When the retailer reviews the order, Then the retailer should be able to see the status of each comment made by the supplier (e.g., resolved, pending).

User permissions for modifying purchase orders are correctly implemented.

Given a user has the role of 'retailer' and another of 'supplier', When the retailer shares a purchase order, Then only the retailer can modify the order, while the supplier can only comment.

Retailer can access a history of all past comments and orders with a supplier.

Given the retailer wants to review past orders, When accessing the collaboration section, Then the retailer should see a history of all orders and related comments with the specific supplier.

Order Status Tracking

"As a retailer, I want to track the status of my purchase orders in real time so that I can plan my inventory replenishments accordingly and maintain optimal stock levels."

Description

Order Status Tracking will provide users with real-time updates on the status of their purchase orders. This requirement includes notifications for when orders are confirmed, shipped, and delivered. By integrating this feature into the InventaPro platform, users will gain visibility into their order processes, allowing them to better manage their stock levels and customer expectations. This transparency reduces uncertainty and empowers users to take proactive measures should any delays occur, ultimately leading to improved supplier management and inventory accuracy.

Acceptance Criteria

Order Confirmation Notification

Given a user has placed a purchase order, when the supplier confirms the order, then the user should receive an email notification with the order details and confirmation status.

Order Shipped Notification

Given a confirmed purchase order, when the supplier marks the order as shipped, then the user should receive a push notification in the InventaPro app and an email update with tracking information.

Order Delivery Notification

Given a shipped purchase order, when the order is delivered to the user, then the user should receive an email notification confirming the delivery along with a summary of the order contents.

Real-Time Order Status Updates

Given a user is viewing their purchase orders, when the status of any order changes (e.g., confirmed, shipped, delivered), then the order status should be updated in real-time on the user's dashboard.

Order History Visibility

Given the user has a history of purchase orders, when they access the order history section in the InventaPro portal, then the user should be able to view a complete list of past orders along with their statuses and timestamps.

User Feedback on Order Issues

Given a user experiences an issue with an order (e.g., delay or incorrect item), when the user submits feedback through the provided form, then the user should receive an acknowledgement notification that their feedback has been received.

Commenting System for Purchase Orders

"As a team member, I want to leave comments on purchase orders so that everyone involved can stay informed about changes and specific requirements related to the order."

Description

The Commenting System for Purchase Orders will allow users to add notes and remarks specific to each purchase order, facilitating clearer communication among team members and with suppliers. This feature aims to enhance the collaborative nature of order management by enabling users to document requests, modifications, and important reminders related to each order. By implementing this system, users will minimize confusion during the order fulfillment process and ensure that all stakeholders have access to vital information at all times.

Acceptance Criteria

User adds a comment to a purchase order during the drafting process.

Given a user is drafting a purchase order, when they enter a comment in the designated comment box and save it, then the comment should be visible under the purchase order details and accessible to all collaborators.

Multiple users add comments to the same purchase order simultaneously.

Given multiple users are viewing the same purchase order, when one user adds a comment and saves it, then all other users should see the updated comments in real-time without needing to refresh the page.

User edits an existing comment on a purchase order.

Given a user has previously added a comment to a purchase order, when they edit the comment and save the changes, then the updated comment should replace the previous comment in the purchase order details.

User deletes a comment from a purchase order.

Given a user has access to a purchase order with comments, when they choose to delete a comment and confirm the action, then the comment should be removed and no longer visible in the purchase order details.

Users view the history of comments on a purchase order.

Given a purchase order with multiple comments added over time, when a user selects the option to view comment history, then they should see a chronological list of all comments, including who made each comment and when it was made.

User shares a purchase order with comments to a supplier.

Given a user has added comments to a purchase order, when they share the order with a supplier, then the supplier should receive the order details along with all associated comments, ensuring transparency in communication.

Admin reviews and audits comments made on purchase orders.

Given an admin user is auditing purchase orders, when they access a report on comments, then they should be able to see a detailed log of all comments added, edited, or deleted, including timestamps and user information.

Real-Time Inventory Sync

"As a retailer, I want my purchase orders to automatically update based on the latest inventory levels so that I can make informed purchasing decisions and avoid excess stock."

Description

Real-Time Inventory Sync will ensure that all purchase orders reflect the most current inventory levels. This requirement is essential to prevent overstocking and stockouts, as users will have access to live data when creating and managing orders. Integration with existing inventory systems will allow for frequent updates and immediate reflection of any changes in stock levels caused by sales or incoming inventory. This capability is key to facilitating informed decision-making in purchasing processes, ultimately enhancing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Inventory Update during Purchase Order Creation

Given a user is creating a new purchase order, when they access the inventory levels, then the displayed stock levels must accurately reflect the most current inventory data without delay.

Automatic Synchronization of Inventory Levels on Order Modification

Given a user modifies an existing purchase order, when they save the changes, then the system must automatically refresh and display the updated inventory levels in real-time.

Notification of Low Stock Levels upon Order Drafting

Given a user is drafting a new purchase order, when they attempt to order an item that is below the defined reorder point, then the system must alert the user with a notification about low stock levels.

Historical Data Analysis for Past Purchase Order Impact

Given a user accesses the reporting feature, when they analyze historical purchase order data, then the system must show the correlation between inventory levels and order accuracy over the past six months.

Seamless Integration with External Inventory Systems

Given that the platform integrates with external inventory management systems, when an adjustment is made in one system, then the changes must reflect in the InventaPro portal within five minutes.

Real-Time Dashboard for Current Inventory Status

Given a user logs into the InventaPro dashboard, when they navigate to the inventory section, then the dashboard must display real-time metrics showcasing current stock levels, sales trends, and alerts for restocking needs.

User Access Control for Inventory Management

Given a user is assigned a role in the InventaPro system, when they attempt to access the inventory management section, then their access must be restricted or allowed based on predefined permissions set by an administrator.

Demand Forecast Sharing

This feature promotes transparency by enabling Supply Chain Coordinators to share demand forecasts with suppliers. By aligning their production and inventory strategies, both retailers and suppliers can plan more effectively, reducing the risk of stockouts and overstocking.

Requirements

Forecast Collaboration Module

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to share demand forecasts with our suppliers so that we can coordinate our inventory levels and production schedules, reducing the likelihood of stockouts and excess stock."

Description

This requirement outlines the development of a collaboration module that allows Supply Chain Coordinators to easily share their demand forecasts with suppliers through the InventaPro platform. The module will enable users to upload, edit, and transmit forecast data in real-time, facilitating improved communication and alignment on inventory strategies. By enabling timely access to accurate forecasting information, this feature aims to reduce misalignment between retailers and suppliers, minimizing the risk of stockouts and overstock situations. It is integral to the overall efficiency of the supply chain management process and enhances the effectiveness of demand forecasting mechanisms within InventaPro.

Acceptance Criteria

Supply Chain Coordinator uploads a monthly demand forecast for the next quarter to share with suppliers.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator has a valid account on InventaPro, when they upload a demand forecast file in the correct format, then the system should successfully save the forecast and notify the user of the successful upload via a confirmation message.

A supplier accesses the shared demand forecast to review and align production strategies.

Given a supplier has received a notification of a shared demand forecast, when they log in to InventaPro and navigate to the collaboration module, then they should see the latest forecast data reflecting any changes made by the Supply Chain Coordinator, with the timestamp of the last update clearly displayed.

Supply Chain Coordinator edits an existing demand forecast and reshares it with suppliers.

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator has previously uploaded a demand forecast, when they edit any forecast entry and click 'Reshare', then the system should update the shared forecast and notify all linked suppliers about the changes, ensuring they have access to the most current data.

A reminder is triggered for suppliers to review the demand forecast ahead of production scheduling.

Given a demand forecast has been shared with suppliers, when the scheduled review date is approached, then the system should automatically send reminder notifications to all suppliers linked to that forecast, ensuring timely review and alignment.

Tracking changes in the shared demand forecasts for audit purposes.

Given multiple edits have been made to a demand forecast, when a Supply Chain Coordinator views the history of changes, then they should see a detailed log of edits with dates, times, user details, and previous forecast values for transparency and accountability.

Supplier Feedback Loop

"As a Supplier, I want to provide feedback on the forecasts I receive so that I can proactively adjust my production plans according to demand changes, ensuring that I can meet expectations while avoiding waste."

Description

This requirement focuses on implementing a feedback loop within the demand forecast sharing feature, allowing suppliers to provide their insights and comments on the forecasts shared with them. This exchange will help in adjusting production schedules based on real-time market conditions and inventory capabilities. The feedback mechanism is expected to enhance collaboration, improve trust between parties, and enable faster response times to market demands. This integration is essential to optimize both retailers' and suppliers' operations and lead to better overall inventory management through proactive adjustments based on supplier input.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier receives a demand forecast via InventaPro for their product line.

Given that a demand forecast has been shared with a supplier, when the supplier accesses the InventaPro platform, then they must be able to view the forecast details including quantities, timelines, and product specifications.

Supplier submits feedback on shared demand forecast.

Given that a supplier has reviewed the demand forecast, when they provide feedback including comments and suggestions through the InventaPro feedback form, then the feedback must be successfully recorded and visible to both the supplier and the retailer.

Retailer reviews supplier feedback on the demand forecast.

Given that feedback has been submitted by a supplier, when the retailer accesses the feedback section of the demand forecast, then they must be able to view all feedback provided by the supplier in a clear and organized manner.

Real-time adjustments of demand forecasts based on supplier feedback.

Given that the supplier has submitted feedback on a demand forecast, when the retailer makes adjustments based on that feedback, then the updated demand forecast must be sent back to the supplier for further comments.

Notification system for suppliers on demand forecast updates.

Given that a demand forecast has been updated, when the update is made by the retailer, then the supplier must receive an automated notification about the change via email and within the InventaPro platform.

Integration of supplier feedback in future demand forecasts.

Given that a supplier has provided feedback on past forecasts, when the retailer prepares future forecasts, then the system must allow for historical feedback to be referenced and integrated into the new forecast generation process.

Reporting of the impact of demand forecast accuracy post supplier feedback implementation.

Given that supplier feedback has been implemented into demand forecasting, when a report is generated on forecast accuracy, then the system must show metrics reflecting improvements in stock levels and reduced stockouts as a result of this integration.

Real-time Notifications for Forecast Changes

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to receive real-time notifications when demand forecasts change, so that I can quickly communicate these updates to my team and our suppliers, ensuring alignment in our inventory strategy."

Description

This requirement entails the creation of a notification system that alerts both Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers in real-time when demand forecasts are updated. This feature is crucial for ensuring that any changes in forecasting data are immediately communicated to avoid confusion or delays in the supply chain process. By implementing this system, both retailers and suppliers will be able to react swiftly to changing demand conditions, maintaining a seamless flow of operations and ensuring that each party is on the same page. This is vital for enhancing the overall responsiveness of the inventory management system within InventaPro.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification is sent to Supply Chain Coordinators when a forecast is changed.

Given a forecast has been updated, when the Supply Chain Coordinator checks their notifications, then they should see an alert indicating the forecast change with details of the previous and updated values.

Suppliers receive real-time notifications for demand forecast updates.

Given a demand forecast update has occurred, when the supplier logs into the system, then they should see a notification about the change with relevant details displayed prominently on their dashboard.

Notifications include time stamps for when the forecast was last updated.

Given the demand forecast has been modified, when the notification is sent to both Supply Chain Coordinators and suppliers, then the notification should include a timestamp indicating when the changes were made.

Notifications are sent via multiple channels including email and in-app alerts.

Given a demand forecast update has occurred, when the notification is triggered, then both email and in-app alerts should be sent out simultaneously to all relevant parties.

The system logs all notifications sent for audit purposes.

Given a notification has been sent regarding a forecast change, when an administrator views the notification logs, then they should see a record of each notification sent, including details such as recipient, timestamp, and content.

Users can customize their notification preferences for forecast changes.

Given the user is in their profile settings, when they select notification preferences, then they should have options to choose how they receive notifications (email, in-app) and which types of forecasts to be notified about.

Users can mark notifications as read or unread.

Given a notification has been received about a forecast update, when the user views their notifications, then they should have the ability to mark it as read or unread, and this status should be visually reflected in the notification list.

User Access Control for Forecast Sharing

"As a Retail Manager, I want to control who has access to our demand forecasts so that I can ensure that sensitive information is protected and only available to authorized personnel."

Description

This requirement specifies the need for role-based access control within the demand forecast sharing feature. It establishes clear permissions for which users can access, edit, or share demand forecasts, ensuring sensitive data remains secure while promoting transparency among designated users. By implementing these access controls, InventaPro will allow organizations to define who can engage with forecast data according to their roles within the company, thus enhancing security and compliance in handling inventory data. Proper management of user access is crucial for maintaining data integrity and confidentiality.

Acceptance Criteria

Access Control for Demand Forecast Sharing based on User Role

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator with edit permissions, when accessing the demand forecast sharing feature, then the coordinator should be able to view, edit, and share forecasts.

Restrictions for Non-Supply Chain Coordinators

Given a user assigned a non-Coordinator role, when attempting to access the demand forecast sharing feature, then the user should receive an access denied message preventing them from viewing or editing forecasts.

Visibility of Shared Forecasts to Authorized Users

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator shares a demand forecast, when an authorized user accesses the sharing link, then the user should see the shared forecasts without edit permissions, ensuring they can view but not alter the data.

Audit Trails for Forecast Access

Given a user accesses the demand forecast sharing feature, when the action is completed, then a log entry should be created capturing the user ID, action type, and timestamp for auditing purposes.

Update User Roles and Permissions

Given an administrator changes a user’s role, when the next access attempt is made by that user, then the system should reflect the new role permissions immediately without requiring a system restart.

Notifications for Access Request Denials

Given a user attempts to access an item they do not have permissions for, when access is denied, then the system should send an automatic notification to the user explaining the denial.

Multi-Factor Authentication for Sensitive Actions

Given a user with edit permissions attempts to share a forecast with external suppliers, when they initiate the action, then the system must require multi-factor authentication to proceed.

Reporting Analytics for Demand Forecasts

"As a Business Analyst, I want to view analytical reports on demand forecast performance so that I can analyze trends and make data-driven decisions for optimizing our inventory strategy."

Description

This requirement involves the development of an analytics dashboard that provides insightful metrics and reporting on the effectiveness of shared demand forecasts. The dashboard will present key performance indicators such as forecast accuracy, supplier compliance, and inventory turnover rates. Utilizing this data will help retailers assess the efficiency of their forecasting processes and identify opportunities for improvement. Insights gained from this reporting will contribute to refining strategies over time, enhancing the overall functionality of InventaPro in inventory management and demand forecasting.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the Reporting Analytics Dashboard for the First Time

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Reporting Analytics section, then the dashboard should load within 3 seconds and display metrics for forecast accuracy, supplier compliance, and inventory turnover rates.

Evaluating Forecast Accuracy Metrics

Given that the dashboard is displayed, when the Supply Chain Coordinator reviews the forecast accuracy metric, then it should show an accuracy percentage calculated based on the last 30 days and allow for historical comparisons over the previous quarters.

Analyzing Supplier Compliance Data

Given that the dashboard shows supplier compliance metrics, when the Supply Chain Coordinator accesses the supplier compliance section, then they should be able to view compliance rates segmented by suppliers and be able to filter this data by date range.

Viewing Inventory Turnover Rates

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is on the Reporting Analytics Dashboard, when they check the inventory turnover rate metric, then it should reflect the turnover rate based on data from the last 60 days and allow for downloadable reports in CSV format.

Comparing Performance Across Different Timeframes

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator wants to assess performance, when they select different timeframes within the Reporting Analytics Dashboard, then the dashboard should update to display relevant metrics for the selected period without needing to refresh the page.

Generating an Insights Report

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator has reviewed key metrics, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a PDF report summarizing the insights and key performance indicators should be created and downloadable with no errors.

Receiving Alerts on Metrics Anomalies

Given that the reporting analytics system is active, when there is a significant drop or rise in forecast accuracy or compliance metrics, then an automated alert should be sent to the Supply Chain Coordinator's email within 5 minutes of detection.

Supplier Feedback System

The Supplier Feedback System offers a structured method for Supply Chain Coordinators to provide feedback to suppliers regarding product quality and delivery performance. This ongoing communication cultivates stronger supplier relationships and encourages continuous improvement in the supply chain.

Requirements

Structured Feedback Forms

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to use structured feedback forms so that I can effectively communicate my evaluation of suppliers in a clear and organized manner, facilitating improvements and strengthening our relationships."

Description

The Structured Feedback Forms requirement facilitates the creation of customizable templates for Supply Chain Coordinators to provide structured feedback on supplier performance. This functionality allows users to categorize feedback into specific areas such as product quality, delivery time, and responsiveness. By providing a standardized format for feedback, it enables clearer communication with suppliers, fostering an environment of continuous improvement and accountability. Implementing these forms will streamline the feedback process, ensuring that all relevant aspects are reviewed and considered during evaluations. Real-time analytics on feedback trends will also help in identifying areas needing attention and improvement among suppliers.

Acceptance Criteria

Supply Chain Coordinator creates a structured feedback form using predefined templates for a supplier's product delivery performance evaluation.

Given a logged-in Supply Chain Coordinator, when they navigate to the 'Feedback Forms' section and select 'Create Template', then they should be able to choose from at least three predefined templates that include categories like product quality, delivery time, and responsiveness.

Supply Chain Coordinator submits a completed structured feedback form to a supplier after evaluating their performance.

Given a finished feedback template filled out by the Supply Chain Coordinator, when they click 'Submit', then the system should store the feedback securely and send an automated notification to the supplier with the feedback summary.

Supply Chain Coordinator views analytics on trends from past feedback submissions to identify areas for supplier improvement.

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is on the 'Analytics Dashboard', when they select the 'Feedback Trends' option, then the system should display a visual report identifying at least three key performance areas needing improvement based on recent feedback submissions.

Supply Chain Coordinator edits an existing structured feedback form after initial submission to correct or add feedback.

Given a submitted feedback form, when the Supply Chain Coordinator accesses the form from the 'Submitted Feedback' list and clicks 'Edit', then they should be able to modify any information and resubmit the feedback without error.

Supplier receives feedback and acknowledges it in response to the structured feedback form submitted by the Supply Chain Coordinator.

Given a feedback notification received by the supplier, when they click on the feedback link, then they should be able to view the full feedback details and provide acknowledgment via a confirmation button that is captured in the system.

Supply Chain Coordinator views a list of all submitted feedback forms categorized by supplier performance areas.

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is on the 'Feedback Submission' page, when they filter the view by product quality, delivery time, or responsiveness, then only the feedback entries matching the selected category should be displayed.

Automated Feedback Notifications

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want the system to automatically notify suppliers about my feedback so that they can promptly address any issues and improve their performance without delay."

Description

The Automated Feedback Notifications requirement establishes a system to automatically notify suppliers of any feedback provided by Supply Chain Coordinators. This feature will include customizable notification settings (e.g., immediate alerts, weekly summaries) and specific details regarding the feedback given. By automating this process, it ensures suppliers receive timely information on their performance, which is critical for addressing issues and making necessary adjustments. This proactive communication method enhances supplier engagement and accountability, ultimately leading to a more responsive supply chain.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification of Feedback Issued to Supplier Immediately after Feedback Submission

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator submits feedback regarding a supplier, when the feedback is saved, then the supplier should receive an immediate notification detailing the feedback provided.

Weekly Summary Notification for Suppliers

Given a scheduling option is set to weekly by a Supply Chain Coordinator, when the week concludes, then the supplier should receive a summary of all feedback provided during that week.

Customization of Notification Preferences by Supplier

Given the supplier has access to their profile settings, when the supplier adjusts their notification preferences, then those preferences should be saved and reflected in future notification settings.

Feedback Notification Includes Specific Details of Performance Issues

Given feedback is provided to a supplier regarding product quality issues, when the notification is sent, then the notification must include specific details about the quality issues such as defect types or delivery delays.

Multiple Feedback Channels for Notifications

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator chooses a notification method, when the feedback is submitted, then the supplier should receive notifications through the selected method(s) such as email, SMS, or in-app notifications.

Acknowledgment of Receipt by Supplier

Given that a notification has been sent to the supplier, when the supplier receives it, then they should have the option to acknowledge receipt, and this acknowledgment should be logged in the system.

Performance Tracking Over Time for Suppliers

Given feedback notifications are sent to suppliers, when a supplier reviews their feedback over a specified period, then they should be able to see a summary of their performance trends based on received feedback.

Supplier Performance Dashboard

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to access a Supplier Performance Dashboard so that I can easily track and analyze supplier performance over time, aiding in more strategic decision-making regarding supplier relationships."

Description

The Supplier Performance Dashboard requirement involves creating a comprehensive dashboard for Supply Chain Coordinators to visualize supplier performance metrics at a glance. This dashboard will include key indicators such as average product quality scores, on-time delivery rates, and feedback response times. By incorporating data visualization techniques such as charts and graphs, it will enable users to quickly digest essential information and identify trends over time. This enhanced overview aids in better decision-making when evaluating supplier partnerships and fosters informed discussions during regular performance reviews.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Metrics Overview

Given that I am a Supply Chain Coordinator, when I access the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then I should see a clear and comprehensive overview of average product quality scores, on-time delivery rates, and feedback response times displayed using graphs and charts.

Real-time Data Synchronization

Given that I am viewing the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when new data regarding supplier performance is entered into the system, then I should see the dashboard refresh to reflect the most current data within 5 seconds.

Historical Performance Trends

Given that I am analyzing supplier performance over time, when I select a specific supplier from the dashboard, then I should be able to view historical performance trends for the past 12 months in a visual format.

Filter and Sort Functionality

Given that I am using the Supplier Performance Dashboard, when I apply filters for product quality scores or delivery rates, then I should be able to see only the suppliers that meet the selected criteria.

Feedback Loop Integration

Given that I have provided feedback on a supplier, when I return to the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then I should be able to see the response time for that feedback reflected in the dashboard metrics immediately.

User Role Accessibility

Given that users have different roles within the organization, when they access the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then they should only be able to view data relevant to their role and permissions assigned.

Dashboard Customization Options

Given that I am a Supply Chain Coordinator, when I access the Supplier Performance Dashboard, then I should have the option to customize what metrics are displayed based on my preferences.

Feedback History and Archive

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to access a complete history of feedback given to suppliers so that I can review past evaluations and have informed conversations during performance discussions."

Description

The Feedback History and Archive requirement ensures that all feedback provided to suppliers is recorded and stored securely for future reference. This feature will allow Supply Chain Coordinators to access historical feedback data easily, facilitating trend analysis and the evaluation of supplier progression over time. The ability to reference past evaluations is crucial during performance reviews and negotiations, providing context for current discussions and decisions. A robust search and filter system will enhance accessibility, enabling users to locate specific feedback quickly.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Historical Supplier Feedback

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is logged in, When they navigate to the Supplier Feedback History section, Then they should be able to see a list of all feedback entries provided to suppliers, displayed with date, supplier name, and feedback type.

Searching Feedback by Supplier Name

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is on the Feedback History page, When they enter a supplier's name in the search bar, Then the system should display feedback entries related only to that supplier.

Filtering Feedback by Date Range

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is viewing the feedback history, When they select a specific date range filter, Then only feedback provided within that date range should be displayed in the list.

Exporting Feedback Data

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator has accessed the Feedback History, When they select the export option, Then they should be able to download the feedback data in a CSV format including all relevant fields.

Viewing Feedback Details

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is in the Feedback History section, When they click on a specific feedback entry, Then they should be able to view all details of that feedback, including comments and any attached documents.

Archiving Old Feedback Records

Given a certain period has elapsed since feedback was provided, When the Supply Chain Coordinator initiates the archiving process, Then the system should securely store the feedback records and mark them as archived in the database.

Assessing Supplier Progress Over Time

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator has accessed the archived feedback, When they analyze the feedback trends over time, Then they should be able to generate a report highlighting improvements or declines in supplier performance and quality.

Supplier Feedback Response Interface

"As a Supplier, I want to respond to the feedback I receive to clarify issues and demonstrate my commitment to improving my performance based on the feedback provided."

Description

The Supplier Feedback Response Interface requirement allows suppliers to respond directly to the feedback they receive from Supply Chain Coordinators through a dedicated platform feature. This capability encourages dialogue and swift resolution of issues, promoting an open communication channel between suppliers and coordinators. The interface will support text comments, additional documentation submissions, and acknowledgment of specific feedback points. Having a straightforward way for suppliers to interact with feedback fosters a collaborative relationship and helps in addressing concerns expeditiously.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier responds to feedback regarding product quality issues and acknowledges specific points raised by the Supply Chain Coordinator.

Given that a supplier has received feedback regarding a product quality issue, when the supplier accesses the feedback response interface, then they should be able to submit a response that addresses the specific quality concerns raised and acknowledges the feedback provided.

Supply Chain Coordinator reviews the response from a supplier to ensure all feedback points have been acknowledged and addressed satisfactorily.

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator has received a supplier's response to feedback, when they review the response in the supplier feedback response interface, then they should be able to see all feedback points listed and confirmation of acknowledgment for each point.

Supplier submits additional documentation along with their feedback response to substantiate their claims.

Given that a supplier wants to provide further evidence to substantiate their response, when they upload additional documentation through the feedback response interface, then the system should allow them to attach files up to a specified size without errors.

Supplier attempts to submit an empty response to feedback.

Given that a supplier accesses the feedback response interface, when they try to submit an empty response, then the system should display an error message indicating that the response cannot be empty and prompt for input.

Supplier receives a confirmation notification after successfully submitting their response and documentation.

Given that a supplier successfully submits their feedback response and any additional documentation, when the submission is complete, then the supplier should receive a confirmation notification via email and in-app alert confirming receipt of their response.

A supplier needs to edit their submitted response within a specified time frame after submission.

Given that a supplier has previously submitted a response to feedback, when they access the feedback response interface within the designated time frame for edits, then they should be able to modify their response and resubmit it successfully.

Feedback Analytics and Reporting Tool

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to generate detailed reports on supplier feedback trends so that I can make informed decisions and improve our overall supplier management strategy."

Description

The Feedback Analytics and Reporting Tool requirement encompasses a feature that aggregates feedback data and generates comprehensive reports on supplier performance metrics. This analytical tool will provide insights into feedback trends and areas that require improvement across multiple suppliers. By leveraging AI and data visualization techniques, it will allow Supply Chain Coordinators to create customizable reports, helping them identify systemic issues or recurring problems with specific suppliers. These reports will be invaluable during strategic meetings and for making data-driven decisions regarding supplier partnerships.

Acceptance Criteria

Generating a report summarizing supplier performance metrics for a quarterly review meeting.

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator has selected the desired suppliers and feedback metrics, When they click on 'Generate Report', Then a comprehensive report is produced containing visual data, including charts and graphs, summarizing supplier performance over the previous quarter.

Analyzing feedback trends over time for a specific supplier.

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is reviewing the feedback data for a selected supplier, When they apply the time filter and select the metrics, Then the tool displays a trend analysis graph illustrating performance changes over the specified time period.

Customizing the report format and content based on the audience.

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is on the report customization page, When they select metrics and format options, Then a preview of the report is displayed showing the selected elements and layout for approval before generation.

Identifying systemic issues with supplier delivery performance.

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator reviews reports from multiple suppliers, When they analyze the delivery performance metrics, Then the system highlights suppliers with performance ratings below a predefined threshold, flagging them for further review.

Exporting the report in various formats for sharing with stakeholders.

Given the report has been generated, When the Supply Chain Coordinator selects the export option, Then the system provides the report in at least three formats, including PDF, Excel, and CSV, ready for download.

Tracking changes in supplier performance after feedback implementation.

Given feedback has been provided to a supplier regarding their performance, When the Supply Chain Coordinator generates a follow-up report after a defined period, Then the report shows improvements or declines in the relevant performance metrics compared to previous reports.

Alerts and Notifications

With Alerts and Notifications, Supply Chain Coordinators can set up automated alerts for key inventory metrics, such as low stock levels or potential delays in shipments. These timely notifications empower users to address issues proactively, ensuring that supply chain operations remain smooth and efficient.

Requirements

Real-Time Stock Alerts

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to receive real-time alerts for low stock levels so that I can reorder supplies before running out and ensure that operations continue smoothly."

Description

The Real-Time Stock Alerts requirement entails the implementation of an automated notification system that monitors inventory levels and triggers alerts for specific metrics, such as when stock falls below a predefined threshold or when an order is delayed. This is designed to minimize the risk of stockouts or overstock situations, thereby optimizing inventory management. The integration with the existing dashboard will allow users to receive these alerts through multiple channels, including email and in-app notifications. This functionality will significantly enhance operational efficiency by enabling Supply Chain Coordinators to react promptly to critical inventory changes and maintain seamless supply chain operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Receiving Low Stock Alert Notification

Given that the stock level of an item falls below the predefined threshold, when the system detects this low stock level, then an automated alert should be sent to the Supply Chain Coordinator via email and in-app notification.

Delayed Order Notification

Given that an order is delayed in shipment, when the system identifies this delay, then an alert should be triggered and sent to the Supply Chain Coordinator, detailing the affected item and expected delivery date.

Real-Time Dashboard Integration

Given that a stock alert is triggered, when a Supply Chain Coordinator checks the dashboard, then the alert should be visibly displayed on the dashboard, providing real-time updates on inventory status.

Multiple Channel Notifications

Given that a stock alert is generated, when the alert is triggered, then the system should ensure notifications are sent through multiple channels including email, SMS, and in-app, according to user preferences.

Acknowledgment of Alerts

Given that a Supply Chain Coordinator receives a stock alert, when they acknowledge the alert, then the system should log the acknowledgment timestamp and update the alert status to 'Acknowledged.'

Automated Alerts Customization

Given that Supply Chain Coordinators want to customize alert settings, when they access the notification settings, then they should be able to set predefined thresholds for specific items according to their needs.

Custom Notification Settings

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to customize my notification settings so that I only receive alerts that are most relevant to my role and responsibilities, helping me prioritize my tasks effectively."

Description

The Custom Notification Settings requirement involves allowing users to personalize their alert preferences according to their specific roles and responsibilities. Users will be able to select which inventory metrics they wish to be notified about, as well as the preferred method of notification (e.g., SMS, email, or push notifications). This feature not only improves user engagement but also reduces notification fatigue, as users will receive only the most relevant alerts tailored to their needs. This customization ensures that Supply Chain Coordinators can focus on the most pressing inventory issues without missing significant updates that may affect their operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Custom Notification Settings for Supply Chain Coordinator Role

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator is logged into InventaPro, when they access the Custom Notification Settings page, then they should see options to select inventory metrics for notifications and choose the preferred notification method (SMS, email, or push notifications).

Selection of Inventory Metrics for Notifications

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator is on the Custom Notification Settings page, when they select inventory metrics such as low stock levels or shipment delays, then they should see a confirmation message indicating their selections have been saved.

Modification of Notification Preferences

Given a Supply Chain Coordinator has set up notification preferences, when they return to the Custom Notification Settings page and make changes, then those changes should be reflected in the preferences summary and saved successfully upon confirmation.

Notification Delivery Method Functionality

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator has selected a notification delivery method, when a specified inventory event occurs, then the system should send a notification via the selected method without delay.

Notification Preferences Validation

Given that the Supply Chain Coordinator has selected specific metrics and notification methods, when they receive notifications for relevant inventory events, then all notifications should correspond with the settings specified and contain accurate information.

User Feedback on Notification Settings

Given the Supply Chain Coordinator has interacted with the Custom Notification Settings, when they complete their settings, then they should have the option to provide feedback on their experience to help improve the feature.

Default Notification Settings for New Users

Given a new Supply Chain Coordinator has been registered in InventaPro, when they first access the system, then they should see default notification settings that can be customized as per their needs.

Historical Alert Reporting

"As a Supply Chain Coordinator, I want to access historical alert reports so that I can analyze past inventory issues and improve my stock management strategies moving forward."

Description

The Historical Alert Reporting requirement focuses on generating reports that provide insights into past alerts and notifications triggered over a specific period. This functionality allows Supply Chain Coordinators to analyze alert patterns, assess inventory health trends, and evaluate the effectiveness of their stock management strategies. By reviewing this information, users can make informed decisions on inventory adjustments and forecast future stock needs. This reporting capability will be seamlessly integrated into the analytics dashboard, allowing for easy access and interpretation of data. It further enhances the operational efficiency of inventory management by leveraging historical data for proactive planning.

Acceptance Criteria

Supply Chain Coordinator accesses the Historical Alert Reporting feature to view alerts triggered in the last month to identify trends and patterns in inventory management.

Given that I am a Supply Chain Coordinator, when I navigate to the Historical Alert Reporting section, then I should be able to view a list of alerts triggered in the last month, categorized by alert type and timestamp.

The system generates a report of all alerts triggered within a specific date range as specified by the Supply Chain Coordinator.

Given that I have input a specific date range, when the report is generated, then I should receive a summary of alerts triggered along with their corresponding dates, types, and any relevant actions taken.

A Supply Chain Coordinator analyzes the Historical Alert Reporting data to assess the effectiveness of stock management strategies over the last quarter.

Given that I have accessed the Historical Alert Reporting for the last quarter, when I review the alert patterns, then I should be able to identify at least three trends that indicate the effectiveness or ineffectiveness of my inventory management strategies.

The Historical Alert Reporting feature allows for easy exporting of alert data for further analysis by the Supply Chain Coordinator.

Given that I am viewing the alerts in the Historical Alert Reporting section, when I click on the export button, then I should be able to download the report in CSV format without errors.

A Supply Chain Coordinator receives a notification if the Historical Alert Reporting fails to load due to a system error.

Given that the Historical Alert Reporting system experiences a failure, when I attempt to load the report, then I should receive a clear notification indicating that the system is currently unavailable and suggesting a retry later.

A Supply Chain Coordinator wishes to filter historical alerts by specific criteria such as alert type or severity.

Given that I am viewing the Historical Alert Reporting, when I apply filters for alert type or severity, then only alerts matching the specified criteria should be displayed on the report.

The Historical Alert Reporting integrates seamlessly into the analytics dashboard of InventaPro for real-time data access.

Given that I am logged into the InventaPro dashboard, when I access the analytics section, then the Historical Alert Reporting should be accessible and fully functional without navigating away from the dashboard.

Customer Preference Dashboard

The Customer Preference Dashboard presents a visual representation of customer purchasing patterns, highlighting trends and preferences. This feature empowers Customer Service Representatives (CSRs) to engage in personalized interactions, recommend relevant products, and make informed upselling decisions, ultimately enhancing customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Requirements

Trends Visualization

"As a Customer Service Representative, I want to view trends in customer purchasing behavior so that I can recommend relevant products and personalize interactions for better customer satisfaction."

Description

The Trends Visualization requirement focuses on delivering a graphical representation of customer purchasing patterns, allowing users to easily identify and analyze trends over time. This feature should provide visual cues such as graphs, charts, and heatmaps to indicate seasonal trends, popular products, and categories that are frequently purchased together. By integrating with the existing data analytics components of InventaPro, this functionality will empower CSRs to quickly glean insights into customer behavior, enhancing their ability to personalize customer interactions. The expected outcome is improved decision-making abilities for CSRs and a more tailored shopping experience for customers, leading to increased sales and customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Visual representation of customer purchasing trends for CSRs to analyze seasonal patterns.

Given the CSR accesses the Customer Preference Dashboard, When they select the 'Trends Visualization' option, Then they should see graphical representations such as line graphs and bar charts indicating seasonal trends in customer purchases.

Identify popular products based on trends over a set time period.

Given the CSR is viewing the Trends Visualization dashboard, When the CSR selects a specific product category from the filters, Then the dashboard should display a list of the top 5 most frequently purchased products within the selected category over the last 3 months.

Highlight categories that customers frequently purchase together for upselling opportunities.

Given the CSR is looking at the Trends Visualization section, When they hover over a specific product in the graphical representation, Then the system should display a tooltip showing other categories frequently bought together with that product.

Filter trends visualization by time frame to analyze short-term vs long-term patterns.

Given the CSR is in the Trends Visualization dashboard, When they use the time frame filter to select 'Last 30 days', Then only data from the last 30 days should be displayed in the graphs and charts.

Provide export functionality for trends data to aid in reporting and analysis.

Given the Trends Visualization is displayed, When the CSR clicks the 'Export Data' button, Then the system should allow them to download the trends data in CSV format, including visual representation data used in the dashboard.

User-friendly interface for easy navigation and understanding of trends information.

Given the CSR is using the Trends Visualization feature, When they interact with the dashboard, Then the interface should be intuitive, with tooltips and help icons accessible to guide them on how to interpret the data presented.

Product Recommendation Engine

"As a Customer Service Representative, I want a product recommendation engine to suggest relevant products to customers based on their preferences, so that I can enhance upselling and increase sales effectively."

Description

The Product Recommendation Engine requirement entails building a robust algorithm that analyzes customer preferences and purchasing history to suggest products that align with their interests. This engine will utilize machine learning techniques to improve its accuracy over time, providing CSRs with intelligent product suggestions during customer interactions. Integration with the inventory management features of InventaPro will ensure that the recommended products are in stock and available for purchase. The expected outcome of this feature is to increase the efficiency of CSRs during upselling and cross-selling opportunities, ultimately boosting sales and enhancing customer retention.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representative uses the Product Recommendation Engine during a live chat session with a customer.

Given the CSR has accessed the Customer Preference Dashboard, When the CSR inputs the customer's name, Then the Product Recommendation Engine should display a list of personalized product recommendations based on the customer's purchasing history and preferences.

A Customer Service Representative is assisting a customer in-store using the mobile app version of InventaPro.

Given the CSR has the customer’s purchase history available in the app, When the CSR scans a product the customer is interested in, Then the Product Recommendation Engine should suggest related products that are currently in stock.

The Product Recommendation Engine is assessed for accuracy in product suggestions over time.

Given the recommendations provided to customers during the past month, When the data on customer purchases is analyzed, Then the percentage of recommended products purchased should be at least 75% for the recommendations to be considered accurate.

A Customer Service Representative engages in upselling during a customer call.

Given that a CSR is on a call with a returning customer, When the CSR uses the Product Recommendation Engine, Then the engine should provide at least three relevant upselling options that are currently in stock.

Integration of the Product Recommendation Engine with inventory management is being tested.

Given a list of recommended products by the Product Recommendation Engine, When checking the product inventory, Then the system should confirm that all suggested products have adequate stock levels available for sale.

The Product Recommendation Engine's machine learning capabilities are evaluated post-deployment.

Given the engine has been live for three months, When the algorithms are reviewed, Then improvements in recommendation accuracy should demonstrate at least a 10% increase from the initial implementation.

Tracking the impact of the Product Recommendation Engine on sales.

Given the Product Recommendation Engine has been implemented, When comparing sales data for the same period before and after its introduction, Then there should be at least a 15% increase in sales from the suggested products.

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a Customer Service Representative, I want to access customer feedback related to prior purchases so that I can better tailor my recommendations and improve customer interactions."

Description

The Customer Feedback Integration requirement focuses on capturing, managing, and utilizing customer feedback directly within the Customer Preference Dashboard. This feature should allow CSRs to view customer feedback about products and previous interactions, enabling them to tailor their recommendations and responses based on customer sentiment. By integrating this feedback mechanism, InventaPro aims to provide a more holistic view of customer interactions, allowing for continuous improvement in service quality and product offerings. The expected outcome is a more responsive approach to customer needs and preferences, promoting loyalty and repeat business.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representative (CSR) accesses the Customer Preference Dashboard during a customer interaction to review customer feedback prior to making product recommendations.

Given that the CSR is viewing a specific customer's profile, when the CSR clicks on the 'Customer Feedback' section, then the CSR should be able to see a detailed view of all feedback provided by that customer, including ratings and comments on previous interactions.

CSRs need to utilize customer feedback to tailor their responses during customer inquiries about specific products.

Given that the feedback includes comments about a specific product, when the CSR responds to the customer inquiry, then the CSR should incorporate relevant feedback insights to enhance their recommendation or solution provided.

A CSR wants to identify products that have received negative feedback in order to address potential customer concerns proactively.

Given that the CSR is on the Customer Preference Dashboard, when they filter the list of products by customer feedback score, then the CSR should see all products with a feedback score below a predetermined threshold highlighted for review.

Managers review the overall sentiment of customer feedback through the Customer Preference Dashboard to make strategic decisions on upcoming inventory.

Given that managers have access to the dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Customer Feedback Summary' section, then they should see visualizations showing the overall sentiment (positive, negative, neutral) of customer feedback over the past month.

CSRs provide feedback on the effectiveness of the Customer Preference Dashboard's feedback integration in assisting their interactions.

Given that CSRs submit their insights after a customer interaction, when they access the feedback submission form on the dashboard, then they should be able to provide a score from 1 to 5 on how helpful the feedback integration was in improving their service quality.

An automated system analyzes the customer feedback data for patterns and updates product recommendations accordingly.

Given that the Customer Preference Dashboard has been in use for over a month, when the automated analysis runs, then it should propose new product recommendations based on aggregated customer feedback and purchasing trends identified within the database.

CSRs want to access historical customer feedback to evaluate changes in customer preferences over time.

Given that the CSR selects a specific customer on the dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Historical Feedback' section, then they should be able to view a timeline of feedback, showing how customer sentiment has evolved for that customer over the past year.

Sales Performance Analytics

"As a Customer Service Representative, I want to analyze sales performance metrics to evaluate my upselling strategies, so that I can continuously improve customer engagement and maximize sales."

Description

The Sales Performance Analytics requirement aims to provide insights into the effectiveness of upselling strategies by tracking sales outcomes resulting from customer engagement. This feature should present comprehensive analytics such as conversion rates, average order value, and the effectiveness of various product recommendations made by CSRs. By integrating this data into the dashboard, CSRs can evaluate their engagement strategies and refine their approaches to meet customer preferences more effectively. The expected outcome is an optimized sales process that relies on data-driven strategies to enhance customer satisfaction and profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

CSRs access the Sales Performance Analytics dashboard to review conversion rates after a promotional campaign has concluded, analyzing how effective their upselling strategies were during customer interactions.

Given the CSR has accessed the Sales Performance Analytics dashboard, when they select the promotional campaign period, then the system must display conversion rates, average order values, and product recommendation effectiveness for that period.

A CSR uses the analytics data to adjust their engagement strategies for the next quarter based on historical performance insights on upselling success.

Given the CSR has viewed the sales performance analytics, when they identify a trend in low conversion rates for certain product categories, then they must be able to create a report recommending alternative strategies to improve upselling for the next quarter.

CSRs conduct a review meeting where they utilize sales performance analytics to compare the effectiveness of various product recommendations made over the last quarter.

Given the CSRs are in a review meeting with the sales performance analytics dashboard open, when they present the data, then they must be able to illustrate which product recommendations led to the highest increase in average order value.

After updating the Sales Performance Analytics with new data, CSRs want to confirm the new insights reflect in the dashboard immediately.

Given the CSR has submitted updated sales data into the system, when they refresh the dashboard, then the analytics displayed should reflect the most recent data updates within a maximum of 5 minutes.

A CSR wishes to monitor daily sales performance and track the impact of specific promotions on upselling effectiveness in real time.

Given the CSR has access to the Sales Performance Analytics dashboard, when they toggle the view to 'real-time', then the dashboard should display daily sales performance metrics and upselling effectiveness immediately.

Sales performance analytics needs to be segmented by customer demographics to further understand upselling effectiveness across different customer groups.

Given the CSR has selected the demographic segmentation option on the Sales Performance Analytics dashboard, when they view the results, then the analytics must display conversion rates and average order values segmented by identified customer demographics.

User Training Module

"As a new Customer Service Representative, I want access to a training module about the Customer Preference Dashboard, so that I can become proficient in utilizing the tools for better customer interactions."

Description

The User Training Module requirement is aimed at developing an interactive training platform for CSRs to familiarize themselves with the Customer Preference Dashboard features. This training module should include tutorials, best practices for utilizing customer data effectively, and tips for enhancing customer interactions. The module will serve as an essential onboarding tool for new CSRs and a continual learning resource for existing staff, ensuring that all CSRs are equipped with the necessary skills to leverage the tools available effectively. The expected outcome is a well-informed CSR team capable of utilizing the dashboard to improve customer engagement and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User Training Module Successfully Guides New CSRs Through Dashboard Features

Given a new CSR accesses the User Training Module, when they complete all tutorials and assessments, then they should score at least 80% in the final assessment to demonstrate understanding of the features.

Continuous Learning Resource for Existing CSRs

Given that an existing CSR logs into the User Training Module, when they access any tutorial then they should view updated content that reflects the latest Customer Preference Dashboard features and practices.

CSRs Successfully Implement Best Practices from Training

Given a CSR has completed the User Training Module, when they engage with a customer, then they should be able to provide product recommendations based on the Customer Preference Dashboard trends in at least 3 out of 5 customer interactions.

User Feedback on Training Module Effectiveness

Given that CSRs have completed the training, when they are surveyed about the User Training Module, then at least 90% should agree that it has improved their understanding and ability to use the Customer Preference Dashboard.

Onboarding Time for New CSRs

Given a new CSR has completed the User Training Module, when they start their role, then their onboarding time to full productivity should be reduced by at least 20% compared to previous onboarding processes without the training.

Tracking Usage of the Training Module

Given the implementation of the User Training Module, when the admin reviews the training completion reports, then at least 85% of CSRs should have completed the training within their first month of onboarding.

User Engagement with Training Module Content

Given the User Training Module is live, when CSRs interact with tutorial videos and resources, then the average engagement time per user should exceed 10 minutes per session, indicating meaningful usage of the content.

Predictive Engagement Alerts

Predictive Engagement Alerts notify CSRs about potential customer needs based on historical purchasing data. By anticipating customer inquiries or requests, CSRs can proactively reach out and offer tailored assistance before issues arise, ensuring a seamless customer experience and fostering stronger relationships.

Requirements

Customer Need Prediction Engine

"As a customer service representative, I want to receive predictive alerts about potential customer needs so that I can proactively assist customers and resolve their inquiries before they even contact us."

Description

The Customer Need Prediction Engine analyzes historical purchasing data and customer behavior to generate predictive alerts for customer service representatives (CSRs). This feature utilizes machine learning algorithms to identify patterns and trends, enabling the system to forecast potential customer inquiries or needs before they arise. By integrating seamlessly with the existing dashboard of InventaPro, this requirement empowers CSRs with timely information, allowing them to proactively reach out to customers and offer personalized assistance. The anticipated outcome is a significant enhancement in customer experience, leading to higher satisfaction and retention rates.

Acceptance Criteria

New Predictive Engagement Alert Trigger Based on Customer Purchase History

Given a CSR is logged into the InventaPro dashboard, when a customer makes purchases that fit the predicted patterns, then a predictive engagement alert should be displayed immediately that outlines the customer's potential needs based on historical data.

Integration of Predictive Alerts with CSR Workflows

Given that a predictive engagement alert is triggered, when the CSR clicks on the alert, then the system should provide detailed insights including the customer's purchase history and suggested outreach actions.

Accuracy of Predicted Customer Needs

Given historical purchasing data, when the Customer Need Prediction Engine analyzes it, then the prediction accuracy should meet or exceed an 85% threshold validated against actual customer inquiries over the last 3 months.

Real-Time Notification Delivery for Customer Needs

Given a recent purchase by a customer, when the predictive alert is generated, then the alert should be delivered to the CSR's dashboard within 5 seconds to ensure timely action.

User Interface Usability for Predictive Alerts

Given the CSR is utilizing the dashboard, when alerts are generated, then the information should be presented in an intuitive, easy-to-read format that employs visual cues for urgency.

Monitoring and Reporting on Predictive Alert Performance

Given that the predictive engagement alerts are active, when evaluating the system's performance, then a report should be generated monthly summarizing the number of alerts generated, actions taken, and customer feedback on the engagement.

Feedback Loop for Continuous Improvement of Prediction Model

Given that alerts are generated and customer interactions occur, when collecting feedback from CSRs on predictions, then there should be a mechanism in place to integrate this feedback back into the prediction algorithms to enhance accuracy over time.

Real-time Interaction Monitoring

"As a customer service representative, I want to monitor customer interactions in real-time so that I can respond quickly and effectively to their needs based on their previous engagement history."

Description

Real-time Interaction Monitoring provides operational visibility into customer interactions by tracking calls, chats, and emails as they occur. This feature integrates with existing communication platforms to log interactions automatically, allowing CSRs to view customer engagement history and the context of their conversations at a glance. By equipping CSRs with immediate access to relevant information, this requirement enhances the support process, improving response times and the effectiveness of customer interactions. The outcome is an enriched customer experience, fostering stronger relationships and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representative (CSR) utilizes the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature during a customer call to access previous interactions and provide more informed assistance.

Given a CSR is on a call with a customer, when they access the Real-time Interaction Monitoring dashboard, then they should see the customer's interaction history, including calls, chats, and emails, updated in real-time.

A CSR receives an alert about a customer's recent inquiry via chat and accesses the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature to follow up with tailored support.

Given a recent chat interaction has occurred with a customer, when a CSR accesses the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature, then the chat should be logged and retrievable, providing context for the follow-up.

During a high-volume sales period, CSRs use the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature to manage interactions efficiently, demonstrating its effectiveness for operational visibility.

Given a peak sales period is occurring, when multiple customer interactions are ongoing, then the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature should accurately log and categorize all interactions without lag or data loss.

A CSR investigates a customer's complaint and uses the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature to review past interactions for context and resolution.

Given a CSR needs to address a customer's complaint, when they utilize the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature, then they should be able to view all relevant previous interactions within a 5-second load time.

A manager reviews the effectiveness of the Real-time Interaction Monitoring implementation by checking the response times of CSRs who have used this feature.

Given a manager accesses the performance metrics dashboard, when they evaluate CSRs' response times, then they should see a measurable improvement of at least 15% in response times after implementing the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature.

CSRs record a new customer interaction, ensuring it is logged in the Real-time Interaction Monitoring system without manual input requirements.

Given a CSR engages with a customer via phone, when the interaction occurs, then the Real-time Interaction Monitoring feature should automatically log this interaction with all essential details recorded accurately and timely.

Tailored Communication Templates

"As a customer service representative, I want to have access to tailored communication templates so that I can quickly respond to customers with relevant and helpful information based on their predicted needs."

Description

Tailored Communication Templates enables CSRs to create and manage pre-defined email or message templates that are specifically designed for various customer scenarios recognized through predictive engagement alerts. This feature streamlines communication efforts by providing CSRs with ready-to-use responses that can be customized with customer-specific information. The integration with the predictive alerts ensures that CSRs can respond promptly and efficiently, enhancing the overall customer communication process. The goal is to reduce response times and improve the relevance of communications with customers, resulting in increased satisfaction and engagement.

Acceptance Criteria

CSR uses the Tailored Communication Templates feature to send a message to a customer who is identified through predictive engagement alerts as needing assistance with an order issue.

Given the Tailored Communication Templates are set up correctly, When a CSR selects a customer from the predictive alert list and chooses a template, Then the CSR should be able to send a customized message to the customer without errors.

A CSR customizes a communication template with specific customer information before sending it.

Given a pre-defined communication template is selected, When the CSR fills in the customer-specific details and clicks send, Then the system should successfully send a personalized message and log the communication in the customer history.

The CSR wants to use a tailored template but finds the template list to be unresponsive or slow.

Given the Tailored Communication Templates feature is accessed, When the CSR tries to open the templates list, Then the system should display the templates within 2 seconds, ensuring a responsive user experience.

A CSR aims to evaluate the impact of Tailored Communication Templates on response time and customer satisfaction.

Given multiple communication templates are used over a defined period, When the CSR analyzes the time taken to respond to customers and surveys their satisfaction, Then the average response time should decrease by 20% and customer satisfaction should improve by at least 15% as per feedback collected.

A CSR attempts to manage and organize multiple communication templates for different scenarios.

Given the user is on the template management page, When the CSR creates a new template, Then the system should allow the CSR to categorize it, edit existing templates, and easily find specific templates for various scenarios.

A CSR checks if the Tailored Communication Templates can be edited post-creation to ensure relevance for future communications.

Given a communication template has been created, When the CSR edits the template and saves the changes, Then the updated template should reflect the changes immediately in the list of available templates for subsequent use.

Feedback Loop for Engagement Alerts

"As a product manager, I want to receive data on the effectiveness of engagement alerts so that I can refine the prediction algorithms and ensure our proactive outreach is as effective as possible in meeting customer needs."

Description

The Feedback Loop for Engagement Alerts is designed to capture and analyze the effectiveness of predictive engagement alerts. This requirement will involve collecting data on customer responses after CSRs implement proactive outreach based on alerts, assessing factors such as customer satisfaction, resolution times, and escalation rates. The feature integrates with analytics tools to provide insights that can optimize the predictive algorithms and enhance their accuracy over time. The expected outcome is an improved prediction model that better serves both CSRs and customers, driving a higher level of personalized service and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Satisfaction Measurement After Proactive Outreach

Given a CSR has made proactive outreach based on an engagement alert, when the customer is surveyed following the interaction, then at least 80% of customers should report being satisfied with the interaction.

Analysis of Resolution Times

Given a CSR engages a customer based on an engagement alert, when the interaction is logged, then the average resolution time for cases initiated by alerts should be less than 5 minutes.

Escalation Rate Assessment

Given that CSRs are responding to engagement alerts, when the data is analyzed, then the escalation rate for issues should be less than 10% of all interactions initiated from alerts.

Integration with Analytics Tools

Given the Feedback Loop feature is implemented, when data related to customer interactions is captured, then it should successfully integrate with specified analytics tools without data loss.

Algorithm Optimization from Feedback Data

Given historical data is collected from customer interactions, when it is analyzed, then the predictive algorithms should show a measurable improvement in accuracy of at least 15% over previous metrics.

Real-time Reporting of Insights

Given the feedback loop is active, when real-time reports are generated, then they should provide actionable insights to CSRs within a maximum of 10 seconds of data being collected.

Compliance with Data Privacy Regulations

Given customer feedback is being collected, when the data is processed and stored, then it should comply fully with applicable data privacy regulations to ensure customer data protection.

Alert Customization Settings

"As a customer service representative, I want to customize my alert settings so that I only receive notifications that are relevant to my specific customer interactions and support areas."

Description

Alert Customization Settings allows CSRs to personalize which types of predictive alerts they receive based on their preferences and the products they support. This feature provides a user-friendly interface for CSRs to select alert triggers and customize their settings according to their workflow. By allowing custom settings, this requirement increases the relevance and efficacy of the alerts received, as each CSR can focus on the areas most pertinent to their role. The anticipated benefit is enhanced productivity and a more focused approach to customer service.

Acceptance Criteria

CSR Access to Alert Customization Settings

Given a CSR is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the 'Alert Customization Settings' section, then they should be able to see a list of all available alert triggers and options to customize their preferences.

Selection of Alert Triggers

Given a CSR is in the 'Alert Customization Settings', when they select specific product categories for alerts, then they should receive confirmation that their selections have been saved successfully.

Relevancy of Alerts Based on Custom Settings

Given a CSR has customized their alert settings, when they receive a predictive engagement alert, then the alert should align with the categories they have selected, ensuring relevance to their role.

User-Friendly Interface for Customization

Given a CSR accesses the customization settings, when they interact with the interface, then they should find it intuitive and easy to navigate, with clear instructions for customizing alerts.

Testing Alert Functionality Post-Customization

Given a CSR has set their alert preferences, when they test the alert functionality, then they should receive notifications based on their customized settings within a stipulated timeframe.

Editing Custom Alerts

Given a CSR is in the 'Alert Customization Settings', when they request to change their alert preferences, then they should be able to edit and save changes successfully without errors.

Integration with CRM Systems

"As a customer service representative, I want to access customer information from our CRM system along with predictive alerts so that I can provide informed and personalized service during customer interactions."

Description

Integration with CRM Systems connects InventaPro’s Predictive Engagement Alerts with existing customer relationship management (CRM) tools used by retailers. This requirement facilitates the seamless flow of data between systems, ensuring that customer history, preferences, and previous interactions are available in real-time for CSRs. The integration supports the effectiveness of predictive alerts by providing comprehensive customer insights at the moment of engagement. The outcome is improved collaboration among teams and enhanced service delivery, ultimately leading to a better customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

As a CSR, I receive a notification through the CRM system when a repeat customer is expected to make a purchase based on their historical data, allowing me to initiate contact proactively.

Given that a customer has a purchasing pattern logged in the CRM, When the predictive engagement alert triggers based on their buying cycle, Then the CSR must receive an alert with customer details and suggested engagement actions within the CRM interface.

When a CSR opens the customer profile linked with the Predictive Engagement Alert, they should see all relevant historical interactions and purchasing data instantaneously for effective communication.

Given that a CSR clicks on a customer profile associated with an engagement alert, When the profile loads, Then it must display at least the last three interactions, total spend, and significant product preferences without delay.

A retail manager should be able to integrate InventaPro with their current CRM system without requiring extensive IT support, ensuring a smooth setup process.

Given that the retail manager initiates the CRM integration process using an intuitive wizard, When they follow the guided steps, Then the integration must complete within 30 minutes, providing a confirmation message and testing the connection automatically.

As a CSR, I want to ensure that engagement alerts are based on the correct and up-to-date customer information pulled from the CRM to avoid miscommunication.

Given that the CRM is updated with the latest customer information, When the Predictive Engagement Alert is generated, Then the data pulled must reflect the latest changes made within the last 24 hours without discrepancies.

After integrating InventaPro with the CRM system, the CSR should be able to customize the alert parameters according to their preferences or department needs.

Given that a CSR accesses the settings for Predictive Engagement Alerts, When they choose to customize alert parameters, Then they should be able to select the frequency of alerts, types of customer actions, and urgency levels successfully.

A report should be generated at the end of each month summarizing the effectiveness of Predictive Engagement Alerts in terms of customer engagement and sales conversion.

Given that the month has ended, When the reporting feature is accessed, Then it must provide a report detailing the number of alerts sent, response rates, and sales conversions linked to those alerts with visual charts.

CSRs must receive training on how to utilize the integration effectively to improve customer interactions and response strategies.

Given that the integration has been implemented, When training sessions are conducted, Then at least 90% of CSRs must demonstrate proficiency in using predictive alerts by successfully completing a follow-up assessment.

Real-Time Feedback Integration

Real-Time Feedback Integration compiles customer feedback on their purchasing experiences, enabling CSRs to address concerns promptly and make swift improvements. It ensures CSRs are well-informed about customer sentiments, allowing for immediate action to enhance satisfaction and build trust.

Requirements

Customer Sentiment Analysis

"As a customer service representative, I want to receive real-time sentiment analysis on customer feedback so that I can quickly understand customer concerns and take appropriate actions to improve their experience."

Description

The Customer Sentiment Analysis requirement involves the integration of AI-driven tools that track and analyze customer feedback across various channels, such as social media, surveys, and direct customer interactions. This feature will compile sentiment scores based on positive, neutral, and negative feedback, providing customer service representatives (CSRs) with actionable insights into customer perceptions of the purchasing experience. This integration will enhance the platform by enabling swift identification of customer concerns, facilitating data-driven improvements in service and product offerings. The anticipated outcome is a more responsive and customer-focused service model that leads to higher satisfaction rates and customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of AI-driven tools to track and analyze customer feedback across multiple channels.

Given the feedback integration system is active, when a customer submits feedback through social media, then the AI should successfully categorize the feedback as positive, neutral or negative within 5 minutes.

CSRs using the sentiment analysis dashboard to respond to customer feedback.

Given a CSR accesses the sentiment analysis dashboard, when they filter the feedback by negative sentiment, then they should see all feedback categorized as negative with timestamps for 90% of the entries.

Automated reports on customer sentiment trends over time.

Given the sentiment analysis tool has been running for 30 days, when a manager requests a report, then the report should generate showing sentiment trends and actionable insights with 95% accuracy.

Real-time alerts for negative customer feedback.

Given a customer submits negative feedback, when the feedback is categorized by the AI, then a real-time alert should be sent to the designated CSR within 2 minutes for follow-up.

Customer feedback collection through surveys post-purchase.

Given the survey feedback form is activated, when a customer completes a purchase, then the feedback request should be sent within 24 hours to at least 90% of customers.

CSRs making updates to service based on sentiment analysis data.

Given CSRs have accessed the sentiment analysis dashboard, when they identify a common issue in feedback, then they should implement a service improvement within 7 days with evidence of the change documented in the system.

Measurement of customer satisfaction improvement post-intervention.

Given service improvements have been implemented, when a follow-up survey is sent to customers, then customer satisfaction scores should show an increase of at least 15% compared to previous surveys.

Feedback Dashboard

"As a customer service representative, I want to access a real-time feedback dashboard so that I can monitor customer sentiments and prioritize my responses to enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

The Feedback Dashboard requirement encapsulates the need for a user-friendly interface designed specifically for CSRs to view and manage customer feedback in real-time. This dashboard will display metrics such as feedback volume, sentiment score trends, and individual customer comments in an intuitive layout. By implementing data visualization techniques, the dashboard will allow users to easily track performance indicators and response patterns over time. This feature is vital as it centralizes customer feedback and enhances the ability of CSRs to prioritize and address issues effectively, thereby raising the standard of customer service and improving the overall customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

CSR accesses the Feedback Dashboard at the start of their shift to review customer feedback data from the previous day.

Given the CSR is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they select the 'Yesterday' filter, then the dashboard should display feedback metrics including feedback volume and sentiment score for that day, along with individual comments.

CSRs use the Feedback Dashboard to identify trends in customer feedback over a month.

Given the CSR selects the 'Last 30 Days' option in the dashboard, when they view the sentiment score graph, then it should display a line graph showing trends in customer sentiment over that period.

A CSR needs to respond to specific customer feedback directly from the Feedback Dashboard.

Given the CSR is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they click on a specific customer comment, then it should open a dialog box allowing them to respond to the feedback directly within the dashboard.

CSRs require the ability to filter customer feedback by categories to prioritize their responses.

Given the CSR is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they select a category filter (e.g. Delivery, Product Quality), then the dashboard should display only the feedback that corresponds to the selected category.

CSRs want to assess their performance based on response times to customer feedback shown on the dashboard.

Given the CSR views the performance section of the Feedback Dashboard, when they look at 'Average Response Time,' it should show a measurable average time taken to respond to feedback over the selected period.

Management needs to track overall customer satisfaction based on feedback collected over a quarter.

Given an admin user is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they select the 'Quarterly' report option, then it should display metrics including overall feedback volume, average sentiment score, and top areas of concern for that period.

CSRs are tracking the effectiveness of changes made after addressing feedback.

Given the CSR accesses historical feedback data, when they compare feedback metrics from before and after a specific change, then the dashboard should visually demonstrate the impact of that change through updated sentiment scores and feedback volume.

Automated Feedback Notifications

"As a customer service representative, I want to receive automated notifications for negative feedback so that I can respond quickly to customer issues and prevent escalation."

Description

The Automated Feedback Notifications requirement aims to develop a system that alerts CSRs when specific customer feedback is received, particularly identifying negative sentiments or urgent comments. These notifications will be sent through email or in-app alerts, providing immediate context around customer inquiries. This integration is crucial as it enables proactive management of customer issues, allowing CSRs to engage with dissatisfied customers promptly and resolve their concerns, thus fostering a sense of care and commitment to service excellence.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated feedback notifications are triggered when a customer submits feedback through the InventaPro platform, particularly highlighting negative feedback about their purchasing experience.

Given a customer submits feedback indicating dissatisfaction, when the feedback is processed, then an automated notification should be sent to the assigned CSR via email and in-app alert with the customer's comment and contact details.

CSRs are able to view a report of all triggered feedback notifications within their dashboard to monitor and prioritize issues effectively.

Given a CSR accesses the dashboard, when they navigate to the feedback notifications section, then they should see a list of all triggered feedback notifications with timestamps and customer details.

CSRs receive notifications of urgent feedback in real-time during their work hours to ensure timely responses to customer issues.

Given a CSR is logged in during work hours, when an urgent feedback is submitted, then a real-time in-app alert should be displayed and an email notification should be sent immediately.

CSRs can acknowledge the receipt of feedback notifications to prevent duplicate issue handling and improve workflow.

Given a CSR receives a feedback notification, when they click 'Acknowledge' on the notification, then the notification status should update to 'Acknowledged' and no further alerts for the same feedback should be sent.

The feedback notifications system is able to distinguish between urgent and standard feedback based on predefined criteria such as keywords or ratings.

Given feedback is submitted, when it is analyzed for urgency based on specific keywords, then the system should classify it as either 'Urgent' or 'Standard' and send notifications accordingly.

Feedback notifications include a direct link to the customer's feedback details for quick reference by the CSR.

Given a CSR receives a notification, when they open the notification, then it should contain a direct link to view the full feedback details on the InventaPro platform.

Feedback Response Template Library

"As a customer service representative, I want access to a library of response templates so that I can quickly address customer feedback while ensuring consistent and high-quality interactions."

Description

The Feedback Response Template Library requirement establishes a collection of pre-approved response templates crafted for various customer feedback scenarios, including complaints, praise, and inquiries. This library will streamline the communication process for CSRs, allowing for quick and consistent responses while still maintaining a personalized touch. By reducing response time through template use, CSRs will be able to handle higher volumes of inquiries without sacrificing quality. This requirement will significantly enhance operational efficiency and improve customer satisfaction through timely and relevant communications.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representative (CSR) receives a complaint about a delayed order and accesses the Feedback Response Template Library.

Given that the CSR has accessed the library, when the CSR selects the 'Delayed Order Complaint' template, then the response should populate automatically in the response field, allowing the CSR to personalize it as needed.

A CSR is handling a customer inquiry about product availability and decides to use the template from the library.

Given that the CSR has located the 'Product Availability Inquiry' template, when the CSR applies it to their response, then the response time should be reduced by at least 30% compared to a non-template response.

The Feedback Response Template Library is utilized by a CSR responding to customer praise for the smooth purchasing experience.

Given that the CSR selects the 'Customer Praise Response' template, when the response is sent, then the customer feedback survey should show an increase in satisfaction ratings by at least 10% within the next month.

The customer service team holds a training session on using the Feedback Response Template Library effectively.

Given that the training session is conducted, when participants complete the training, then at least 80% of them should report increased confidence in handling customer inquiries using the templates.

A CSR encounters a unique complaint that does not have a pre-approved response template.

Given that no suitable template exists, when the CSR drafts a new response and submits it for review, then the response should be approved or denied within 24 hours by a supervisor to ensure timely communication.

CSRs are tasked with tracking the performance of responses sent using templates over a month.

Given that CSRs track template usage, when the data is analyzed, then there should be at least a 20% increase in the number of inquiries resolved on the first contact compared to the previous month without template use.

Targeted Communication Insights

Targeted Communication Insights analyzes customer data to suggest optimal communication methods and timings for engagement. This feature enables CSRs to reach out to customers at the right moment and through preferred channels, maximizing the impact of their interactions and improving overall engagement.

Requirements

Customer Data Analytics

"As a customer service representative, I want to access detailed customer data analytics so that I can tailor my communication strategies to meet individual customer preferences and behaviors, ensuring more effective engagement."

Description

The Customer Data Analytics requirement involves integrating advanced data analysis and visualization tools within InventaPro to effectively aggregate and analyze customer data. It will focus on delivering insights into customer behavior, preferences, and purchasing patterns. By effectively analyzing this data, the system can provide suggestions for optimized communication methods and timings, thereby enhancing customer engagement and satisfaction. This requirement is essential for enabling customer service representatives (CSRs) to make informed decisions regarding the best ways to communicate with customers while also helping retailers tailor their marketing strategies based on real-time data insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Data Reports Generation

Given a CSR requests a comprehensive report, when the request is processed, then the system should generate a detailed customer data report including behavior insights, preferred communication channels, and purchasing patterns within 5 seconds.

Real-time Customer Behavior Visualization

Given the system is running, when a CSR accesses the customer behavior dashboard, then they should see real-time visualizations of customer interactions and preferences updated every minute.

Optimal Communication Method Suggestion

Given customer data has been analyzed, when a CSR views the insights panel, then the system should suggest at least three optimal communication methods and timings for the top 10 customers based on recent activity.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

Given data from e-commerce platforms is available, when the system synchronizes customer data, then the system should accurately aggregate purchasing patterns and preferences from at least two different platforms without data loss.

User Feedback Collection on Communication Effectiveness

Given the new communication strategy is implemented, when customers receive communications, then the system should collect feedback from at least 20% of recipients on message relevance and timing, effectively documenting the results.

Customer Segmentation for Targeted Campaigns

Given customer data has been analyzed, when the CSR requests segmentation details, then the system should create and display at least five distinct segments based on demographics and purchasing behavior.

Data Privacy Compliance Checks

Given customer data is being analyzed, when the privacy compliance checks are applied, then the system should ensure that all customer data handling complies with GDPR and CCPA regulations before displaying insights.

Automated Suggestions Engine

"As a CSR, I want the system to automatically suggest the best communication methods and timings for each customer, so that I can improve my chances of successful engagement and save time during my outreach efforts."

Description

The Automated Suggestions Engine requirement entails building an intelligent system that automatically suggests optimal communication channels and timings based on historical engagement data and customer preferences. This feature will leverage machine learning algorithms to continuously improve the recommendations as it learns from customer interactions and feedback. By providing real-time suggestions, this requirement aims to streamline the engagement process for CSRs, reduce response times, and enhance overall customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representatives receive alerts from the Automated Suggestions Engine suggesting optimal timing and communication channels for reaching out to customers based on their recent purchase history and engagement.

Given that a CSR is logged into the InventaPro dashboard, when they view the suggestions provided by the Automated Suggestions Engine, then they should see personalized recommendations that include at least three preferred communication channels and specific timings for customer contact.

After a CSR utilizes the Automated Suggestions Engine to contact a customer, the system gathers feedback on the effectiveness of the communication method used.

Given that a communication attempt has been logged, when the customer provides feedback on the communication method, then the Automated Suggestions Engine should update its recommendations based on this feedback, enhancing future suggestions.

The Automated Suggestions Engine uses historical data to propose the best communication channels during marketing campaigns, particularly around holiday sales.

Given that it is the holiday season, when a CSR reviews the suggestions during campaign planning, then the Automated Suggestions Engine should provide at least five data-driven suggestions based on historical engagement metrics to improve customer outreach.

CSRs can access a summary of the performance of prior suggestions made by the Automated Suggestions Engine to evaluate its accuracy and effectiveness.

Given that the CSR accesses the performance dashboard, when they select the 'Prior Suggestions' report, then they should see a detailed summary that includes metrics on customer engagement rates and satisfaction scores from previous interactions prompted by the engine’s suggestions.

New customer profiles are entered into the system, and the Automated Suggestions Engine generates initial communication suggestions based on default settings until enough data is collected.

Given that a new customer profile has been created in the InventaPro system, when the CSR checks the Automated Suggestions Engine within 24 hours, then it should provide at least two default communication suggestions until sufficient engagement data is gathered.

Multi-Channel Communication Support

"As a customer, I want to receive communications through my preferred channel, whether that's email, SMS, or social media, so that I can engage with my favorite brands in the way that suits me best."

Description

The Multi-Channel Communication Support requirement focuses on enabling the system to facilitate communication through various preferred channels, such as email, chat, SMS, and social media. This functionality will allow CSRs to engage with customers through their desired platforms, ensuring a more personalized and responsive communication experience. Integration with external communication tools is also essential to effectively track messages and maintain consistency in customer interactions regardless of the platform used.

Acceptance Criteria

CSRs need to communicate with a customer who prefers to receive messages via email about a recent order status update.

Given a CSR accesses the customer profile, when they select the email option and send the order status update, then the email should be sent successfully and logged in the communication history.

A CSR is interacting with a customer via chat and wants to escalate the conversation to a voice call while maintaining chat history.

Given the CSR is in an active chat with a customer, when they select the 'escalate to call' option, then the chat transcript should be saved and the call initiated with the customer without data loss.

A CSR must reach out to a customer who prefers SMS notifications regarding upcoming promotions or discounts.

Given the CSR identifies the customer preference for SMS, when the CSR sends an SMS about the upcoming promotion, then the SMS should be delivered successfully and recorded in the customer’s communication log.

The system needs to allow CSRs to engage customers through social media channels, using the customer's preferred platform.

Given the customer's preferred social media channel is identified, when the CSR sends a message through that channel, then the message should be sent successfully and the interaction should be documented in the system.

CSRs are required to track the effectiveness of multi-channel communications with metrics displayed on the dashboard.

Given the communication has been sent through various channels, when the CSR accesses the dashboard, then the engagement metrics (open rates, response times, etc.) should be displayed accurately for each channel used.

CSRs need the ability to integrate external communication tools to ensure seamless communication tracking across multiple platforms.

Given an external communication tool is integrated, when a message is sent via that tool, then the message should be logged in the customer’s interaction history within InventaPro.

A CSR receives feedback from a customer who prefers not to engage through one of the available communication channels.

Given the CSR accesses the customer profile, when the customer opts out of a communication channel, then that preference should be updated in the system and reflected in the customer profile for future interactions.

Real-Time Performance Dashboard

"As a manager, I want to see real-time performance metrics for our customer communications, so I can assess their effectiveness and make informed decisions for future engagement strategies."

Description

The Real-Time Performance Dashboard requirement involves creating a comprehensive dashboard that provides an overview of customer interactions and the effectiveness of different communication strategies. It will enable stakeholders to visualize KPIs related to communication success, customer engagement, and satisfaction levels. This dashboard will be vital for making data-driven decisions regarding communication tactics and strategies, ultimately improving overall customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays real-time KPIs for customer engagement after a campaign launch.

Given the user accesses the Real-Time Performance Dashboard, when a communication campaign is initiated, then the dashboard should display updated KPIs for customer engagement within 5 minutes of the campaign launch.

Users can filter performance metrics by communication channels.

Given the user is using the dashboard, when they select a specific communication channel (e.g., email, SMS, social media), then the dashboard should display only the relevant performance metrics associated with that channel.

The dashboard provides a comparative analysis of communication strategy effectiveness.

Given the user has selected multiple communication strategies, when they view the dashboard, then it should display a comparative chart showing engagement rates and satisfaction levels for each selected strategy.

Real-time notifications for performance anomalies are received by stakeholders.

Given the user has set thresholds for performance metrics, when any metric deviates from the established threshold, then the user should receive an instant notification via their preferred method (e.g., email, SMS).

The dashboard integrates customer feedback effectively into performance metrics.

Given the user has collected customer feedback, when they view the dashboard, then the dashboard should incorporate that feedback into the overall performance metrics, reflecting changes in customer satisfaction levels in real-time.

Historical data comparison is available within the dashboard.

Given the user wants to analyze historical performance, when they select a specific date range, then the dashboard should display comparisons of KPIs for that timeframe against current performance metrics.

Feedback Loop Integration

"As a customer, I want the ability to provide feedback on my communication experiences with the brand, so my responses can help improve future interactions."

Description

The Feedback Loop Integration requirement seeks to implement a mechanism by which customers can provide feedback on the communication they receive, allowing for continuous improvement of strategies employed. By analyzing feedback, the system can adjust its suggestions and recommendations for both CSR and retail operations, ensuring that customer preferences are always at the forefront. This requirement is critical for fostering an adaptive communication approach that evolves with customer expectations.

Acceptance Criteria

User Submits Feedback After CSR Interaction

Given a customer has just engaged with a CSR, When the customer receives a feedback request via their preferred communication channel, Then the customer can successfully submit feedback on their experience.

System Analyzes and Updates Communication Preferences

Given multiple customer feedback submissions, When the feedback data is processed, Then the system adjusts the communication strategy and suggestions for the CSR accordingly.

Feedback Loop Triggers New Communication Suggestions

Given that customer feedback indicates a preference change, When the feedback is integrated into the system, Then the updated communication suggestions reflect the new preferences within the next 24 hours.

Dashboard Reflects Feedback Trends

Given ongoing collection of customer feedback, When a CSR views the insights dashboard, Then the dashboard displays trends and statistics on customer feedback in real-time.

Customer Receives Follow-Up Based on Feedback

Given a customer submits feedback about their last communication, When the feedback indicates a need for follow-up, Then the system schedules a follow-up communication with the customer at the optimal time suggested by the analysis.

User Interface for Feedback Submission

Given the need for user-friendly feedback submission, When the customer accesses the feedback interface, Then they can easily navigate and submit their feedback without confusion or errors.

Cross-Sell & Upsell Recommendations

Cross-Sell & Upsell Recommendations leverage analytics to identify complementary products or services based on previous purchases. This feature equips CSRs with tailored suggestions during customer interactions, driving sales while enhancing the overall shopping experience by offering relevant options.

Requirements

Dynamic Product Suggestions

"As a customer service representative, I want to receive real-time product recommendations during customer interactions so that I can provide personalized suggestions that enhance the customer experience and drive sales."

Description

The Dynamic Product Suggestions requirement enables the system to analyze historical purchasing data and real-time trends to provide personalized product recommendations to customers. This leverages AI algorithms to identify patterns in customer behavior, ensuring that recommendations are relevant and contextually appropriate. By integrating this feature into the customer service representative's (CSR) toolkit, retailers can enhance the shopping experience, maximize conversion rates, and increase average order values. Furthermore, it's essential for the system to seamlessly integrate with existing sales data to ensure that recommendations are based on accurate and timely information.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer interacts with the CSR during a purchasing process and inquiries about related products.

Given a customer is looking at a specific product, when the CSR accesses the Dynamic Product Suggestions tool, then the system should display at least three relevant cross-sell and upsell products based on historical purchasing data.

Customer has added products to their online cart and is ready to checkout.

Given a customer has items in their cart, when they view the cart summary, then the Dynamic Product Suggestions feature should display complementary products based on the contents of their cart without any lag.

Customer searches for items on the e-commerce platform and receives relevant product recommendations.

Given a customer performs a search for a product, when they view the search results, then the Dynamic Product Suggestions should highlight at least two products that correlate with the search query and previous purchases.

Customer interacts with the system outside of a direct purchasing scenario.

Given a customer browses the website without making any selections, when the Dynamic Product Suggestions algorithm analyzes their browsing history, then it should display personalized recommendations on the homepage based on their previous interactions.

CSR uses the Dynamic Product Suggestions feature in a call center environment with a customer on the line.

Given the CSR is on a call with a customer discussing their preferences, when the CSR inputs the customer’s information, then the Dynamic Product Suggestions should automatically generate a list of tailored product recommendations in real-time during the call.

The system needs to update recommendations based on new market trends and data.

Given the AI algorithm runs regularly to analyze current data, when a trend is identified in product popularity, then the Dynamic Product Suggestions should refresh to reflect these new trends within 24 hours.

A customer receives follow-up communication after a purchase regarding related products.

Given a customer completes a purchase, when the marketing email is generated, then the email should include at least three Dynamic Product Suggestions based on their recent purchase and browsing history.

Real-time Analytics Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want to have a real-time analytics dashboard so that I can track key performance indicators and make timely decisions based on up-to-date information."

Description

The Real-time Analytics Dashboard requirement focuses on creating a user-friendly interface that provides immediate insights into sales performance, inventory levels, and customer behavior. This dashboard will allow retailers to monitor key metrics at a glance and make data-driven decisions quickly. The implementation should include customizable widgets that display relevant data in an intuitive manner, enabling users to tailor their view according to their business priorities. By having access to real-time data, retailers can respond swiftly to market changes, optimize their inventory strategy, and ultimately improve their profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Real-time Analytics Dashboard to review current inventory levels and sales performance during peak business hours.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a summary of inventory levels, sales performance, and customer behavior metrics displayed in customizable widgets.

Administrator customizes the dashboard widgets to focus on specific sales metrics relevant to recent marketing campaigns.

Given the administrator is on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when they select and apply filters for sales metrics, then the dashboard should immediately update to reflect the customized data view.

A retailer uses the dashboard to identify a sudden dip in sales of a particular product category during a holiday season.

Given the retailer is viewing the Real-time Analytics Dashboard during the holiday season, when they review the sales performance section, then they should be able to identify any product categories with significant dips in sales compared to the previous period.

User sets up alerts for low inventory levels directly from the dashboard.

Given the user is on the Real-time Analytics Dashboard, when they configure threshold alerts for specific inventory levels, then they should receive real-time notifications when stock drops below the set thresholds.

Customer Service Representative (CSR) uses the analytics from the dashboard during a customer interaction to suggest relevant cross-sell products.

Given the CSR is accessing the Real-time Analytics Dashboard while on a call with a customer, when they view the recommended cross-sell products, then they should see tailored suggestions based on the customer's purchase history and current inventory levels.

Automated Marketing Notifications

"As a customer, I want to receive recommendations and reminders about products I've shown interest in so that I am encouraged to complete my purchase or explore related items."

Description

The Automated Marketing Notifications requirement entails setting up a system to send personalized notifications to customers based on their browsing and purchasing behavior. This functionality will include automated email campaigns and in-app alerts that encourage customers to revisit products they viewed or to consider complementary items. The goal is to increase customer engagement and conversion rates while reducing cart abandonment. To ensure effectiveness, the notifications must be tailored to individual customer preferences and behaviors, which necessitates a robust data analysis component to segment users accurately.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives an automated email notification after viewing a product on the InventaPro platform.

Given a customer views a product, When the viewing session ends, Then an automated email notification with product details and complementary items is sent to the customer's registered email address.

A customer is sent an in-app alert for items left in their cart that encourages them to complete the purchase.

Given a customer adds items to their cart, When they do not complete the purchase within 24 hours, Then a personalized in-app alert is triggered reminding the customer of the items left in the cart.

Customers receive automated notifications tailored to their purchase history highlighting complementary items.

Given a customer makes a purchase, When the system identifies complementary products based on purchasing behavior, Then the customer receives an automated email suggesting these complementary products within 48 hours.

The marketing notification system segments customers based on browsing behavior to ensure relevant recommendations.

Given the user database, When the system analyzes browsing behavior, Then customers are segmented into at least three distinct groups for targeted marketing notifications based on their interactions.

CSRs receive access to the automated marketing notifications system to assist customers effectively.

Given that a CSR is interacting with a customer, When the customer inquires about a previous purchase, Then the CSR can view relevant automated recommendations from the marketing notifications system in real-time.

The system tracks the effectiveness of automated notifications in improving customer engagement and conversion rates.

Given the database of sent notifications, When measuring customer engagement, Then the system can generate a report showing at least a 15% increase in conversion rates over the first month of implementation.

Ensure that the automated marketing notifications comply with email marketing regulations.

Given the configuration of the notification settings, When automated emails are set up, Then they include unsubscribe options and comply with GDPR and CAN-SPAM regulations.

Integrated Feedback Mechanism

"As a customer, I want to easily provide feedback on my shopping experience so that I can help improve the service and ensure that I receive relevant recommendations in the future."

Description

The Integrated Feedback Mechanism requirement aims to provide customers with the opportunity to give feedback on product recommendations and their purchasing experience. This feature will collect customer insights through short surveys or rating systems after interactions and purchases. The collected data will be analyzed to improve the recommendation algorithm and overall shopping experience. This is important for fostering customer loyalty and continuously optimizing the service offered to ensure that it meets the evolving needs of the customer base. Implementation should couple ease of use with actionable insights for the development team.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback after receiving product recommendations during a purchase interaction.

Given a customer has made a purchase and received product recommendations, when they complete the transaction, then a prompt for feedback should be displayed within 5 seconds, allowing them to rate their experience on a scale of 1 to 5 and add optional comments.

Customer accesses the feedback survey via a follow-up email after their purchase.

Given a customer has received their order confirmation email, when they click on the feedback survey link within 48 hours, then they should be redirected to a user-friendly survey that collects their insights on the recommendation quality and overall purchase experience.

Customer Service Representatives (CSRs) review feedback to improve product recommendations.

Given that customer feedback has been collected over the past month, when CSRs access the feedback dashboard, then they should be able to view aggregated data showing average ratings, common comments, and suggested product improvements based on feedback.

System analyzes collected feedback data to refine the recommendation algorithm.

Given that feedback data has been collected for at least one month, when the system runs its scheduled analysis, then the recommendation algorithm should be updated based on identified trends and patterns from customer feedback, improving recommendation accuracy by at least 10%.

Customer opts to provide feedback through a quick rating system directly on the website post-purchase.

Given that a customer has completed a purchase, when the prompt for feedback appears, then they should be able to select a rating between 1 and 5 without any additional pop-ups or redirects, ensuring a seamless user experience.

Management reviews feedback reports to make strategic decisions about product offerings.

Given that monthly feedback reports have been generated, when management reviews the reports, then they should see actionable insights that include top rated products, customer suggestions for new products, and trends in purchasing behavior, all presented in a clear and concise format.

Mobile Optimization for Recommendations

"As a mobile shopper, I want to see relevant product recommendations that are easy to access and navigate on my device so that I can shop conveniently while on the go."

Description

The Mobile Optimization for Recommendations requirement concentrates on adapting the cross-sell and upsell recommendations for mobile users. As a significant portion of retail traffic comes from mobile devices, this feature should ensure that product suggestions are displayed in an optimized format for smaller screens, while maintaining clarity and usability. The goal is to enhance the mobile shopping experience and drive conversions through a seamless integration of the recommendations feature within mobile applications or responsive web designs. Proper testing across multiple devices will be crucial to ensure consistency in performance and presentation.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile users accessing InventaPro to browse product recommendations while shopping online.

Given a mobile device with a small screen, when a user views cross-sell and upsell recommendations, then the products must be displayed in a clear, readable font with no horizontal scrolling required.

Customer Support Representatives (CSRs) using mobile devices to assist customers with product recommendations during a call.

Given a CSR uses a mobile device to assist a customer, when the CSR accesses the recommendations feature, then the interface should present recommendations in a simplified format that is easy to navigate touch.

A customer navigating the mobile site to view their cart before checkout.

Given a mobile user viewing their cart, when the cross-sell and upsell recommendations are displayed, then they must be positioned below the cart summary irrespective of device type and maintain consistent alignment.

Different mobile devices being tested for compatibility with the recommendations feature.

Given multiple mobile devices (iOS and Android), when testing the recommendations feature, then the display and functionality must perform consistently across all devices and screen sizes without errors.

User feedback on the usability of cross-sell and upsell recommendations for mobile shopping.

Given a group of beta testers using the mobile application, when they are asked to rate the clarity and usability of the recommendations feature, then at least 80% should indicate that it's easy and intuitive to use.

Mobile users accessing recommendations through the responsive web design version of InventaPro.

Given a user accessing the responsive version of the site on a mobile device, when the recommendations feature is shown, then it should load within 2 seconds and not disrupt the main shopping experience.

Segmented Customer Profiles

Segmented Customer Profiles categorize customers based on their purchasing behaviors and preferences. This feature allows CSRs to tailor their interactions and strategies to distinct customer groups, ensuring that communications and offers resonate with specific audiences.

Requirements

Customer Segmentation Algorithm

"As a Customer Service Representative, I want to view categorized customer profiles based on their purchasing behaviors so that I can tailor my interactions and offers to better meet their needs and enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

The Customer Segmentation Algorithm requirement involves implementing a sophisticated AI-driven algorithm that analyzes customer purchasing behaviors and preferences to classify customers into distinct segments. This function will leverage historical sales data, customer demographics, and shopping patterns to create dynamic profiles that adapt over time. By enabling granular insights into customer segments, retailers can tailor marketing communications and promotional offers, leading to increased engagement, higher conversion rates, and improved customer retention. This requirement is essential for driving user satisfaction as it fosters personalized customer experiences and enhances marketing effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Classification Based on Behavior Analysis

Given a set of historical sales data and customer demographics, when the Customer Segmentation Algorithm is executed, then it should successfully classify customers into at least three distinct segments based on purchasing behaviors.

Dynamic Profile Adjustment Over Time

Given an updated customer purchasing history, when the Customer Segmentation Algorithm is run, then it should update customer segments accordingly, reflecting any changes in behavior or preferences within 24 hours.

Integration with Marketing Tools

Given that customer segments have been created, when these segments are input into the marketing automation tool, then at least 95% of the segments should be accurately reflected to enable tailored marketing strategies.

Reporting on Customer Segment Performance

Given the defined customer segments, when the retailer generates a performance report, then it should present metrics such as engagement rates and conversion rates for each customer segment over the past month.

User Interface for Viewing Segments

Given the need for customer segmentation data, when a user accesses the dashboard, then they should be able to view and interact with customer segments in a user-friendly manner within 2 clicks from the home screen.

Historical Data Analysis for Segmentation

Given a database of at least 12 months of historical purchasing data, when the Customer Segmentation Algorithm analyzes the data, then it should identify trends and patterns that lead to the formation of accurate segments.

Customer Feedback Loop for Segmentation Accuracy

Given that segments have been established, when customer feedback is collected and analyzed, then it should reflect that at least 80% of customers feel aligned with their designated segment.

Interactive Dashboard for Customer Insights

"As a Retail Manager, I want to access an interactive dashboard that displays real-time customer insights so that I can make informed decisions about stock levels and marketing strategies to enhance sales effectively."

Description

The Interactive Dashboard for Customer Insights requirement encompasses the development of a user-friendly dashboard that visually presents segmented customer profiles, key metrics, and insights. This dashboard will allow users to easily navigate, filter, and analyze customer data in real-time, providing valuable information such as purchasing trends, preferred products, and segmentation performance. The integration of interactive graphs and charts will enable retail managers to make data-driven decisions regarding inventory and marketing strategies. This requirement emphasizes the need for intuitive design, ease of use, and actionable insights, empowering retailers to optimize their marketing efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying Segmented Customer Profiles on the Dashboard

Given that the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Interactive Dashboard, then the dashboard must display segmented customer profiles visually, categorized by purchasing behaviors and preferences.

Filtering Customer Profiles by Metrics

Given that the user is on the Interactive Dashboard, when they select specific filters (e.g., purchase frequency, average spend), then the dashboard should update to show only the customer profiles that match the selected criteria.

Real-Time Data Refresh

Given that the dashboard displays customer insights, when a change occurs in the customer database (e.g., a new purchase is made), then the dashboard should refresh automatically to reflect the latest data without requiring a manual refresh.

Interactive Graphs for Purchasing Trends

Given that the user is viewing the Interactive Dashboard, when they hover over the interactive graphs, then detailed information about the purchasing trends for specific customer segments should be displayed in a tooltip format.

Exporting Customer Insight Reports

Given that the user has customized their view of the customer profiles on the dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then a report should be generated and downloaded in CSV format containing the filtered customer insights.

Access Control for Customer Profiles

Given that multiple user roles exist in InventaPro, when a user accesses the Interactive Dashboard, then they should only see customer profiles that their role has permission to view as defined by the admin settings.

User Feedback Collection for Dashboard Usability

Given that the Interactive Dashboard is live, when users interact with the dashboard features, then a feedback mechanism should be available for users to submit their thoughts on usability and features.

Dynamic Reporting on Segmented Profiles

"As a Marketing Analyst, I want to generate customizable reports on segmented customer profiles so that I can analyze purchasing trends and provide actionable recommendations to enhance our marketing strategies."

Description

The Dynamic Reporting on Segmented Profiles requirement entails creating a robust reporting feature that allows users to generate customizable reports based on customer segmentation data. Users will have the option to select specific segments, define reporting periods, and visualize data in formats suitable for their needs, including charts, tables, and graphs. This feature will facilitate deeper analysis of customer behavior over time, enabling retailers to identify trends, forecast future purchases, and refine their market strategies. The reporting tool must integrate seamlessly with the other components of InventaPro and support data exports for external use.

Acceptance Criteria

Generate a custom report for a specific customer segment based on purchase behavior for the last quarter.

Given the user selects the 'Customer Segment A' and sets the reporting period to 'Last Quarter', when the user clicks 'Generate Report', then the system should create a report showing total purchases, average order value, and number of unique customers in that segment during the selected period.

Export the generated report in multiple formats for external analysis.

Given that the report for 'Customer Segment A' has been generated, when the user selects the 'Export' option, then the system should allow the user to export the report in at least three formats including CSV, Excel, and PDF without any data loss.

Visualize customer segmentation data in a graphical format within the report.

Given the user has generated a report for 'Customer Segment A', when the user views the report, then the report should include at least one visual representation of the data, such as a pie chart displaying customer distribution by purchase frequency.

Allow users to filter report details by specific attributes like purchase date and product category.

Given the user has selected 'Customer Segment A', when the user applies filters for 'Product Category X' and 'Purchase Date Range', then the report should update to reflect only the data that matches the selected filters.

Ensure the reporting feature integrates seamlessly with the existing customer database.

Given that the user initiates a report generation, when the user selects a customer segment, then the system should pull data in real-time from the customer database without delays or errors.

Test the system's performance with large datasets when generating reports.

Given the user selects a report for a customer segment with a dataset of at least 10,000 entries, when the user clicks 'Generate Report', then the report should be generated within 10 seconds without any performance degradation.

Provide user documentation and support for generating and exporting reports.

Given that the user is in the reporting section, when the user clicks on the help icon, then the system should display a user guide outlining steps to generate and export reports, along with troubleshooting tips.

Sentiment Analysis Reports

Sentiment Analysis Reports provide CSRs with insights into customer satisfaction levels derived from interactions and feedback. By understanding customer sentiments, CSRs can modify their approaches, addressing pain points and enhancing the customer experience in a proactive manner.

Requirements

Real-Time Sentiment Tracking

"As a customer service representative, I want to track real-time customer sentiment so that I can proactively address customer concerns and improve their overall experience with our services."

Description

The Real-Time Sentiment Tracking requirement enables automated monitoring and analysis of customer interactions and feedback across various channels, such as emails, chats, and social media. This feature leverages natural language processing algorithms to assess sentiments expressed by customers in their communications. By integrating this capability into InventaPro's dashboard, customer service representatives (CSRs) will receive immediate insights into customer satisfaction levels, allowing them to respond more effectively to customer needs. The functionality will include visual indicators for sentiment trends, enabling proactive adjustments in customer engagement strategies. This requirement enhances the overall user experience and empowers CSRs to address pain points promptly, ultimately leading to better customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Service Representatives (CSRs) log into the InventaPro dashboard and access the Real-Time Sentiment Tracking feature during a busy sales period to analyze customer interactions across emails and social media platforms.

Given that the CSR is logged into the InventaPro dashboard, when they access the Real-Time Sentiment Tracking, then they should see a visual representation of sentiment trends categorized as positive, negative, and neutral based on incoming customer feedback.

During a critical customer feedback session, the CSR needs to identify the overall sentiment score from multiple customer interactions to tailor their responses more effectively.

Given that multiple customer interactions have been monitored, when the CSR views the Real-Time Sentiment Tracking report, then the report should display an aggregate sentiment score that reflects the sentiment of all interactions over the last hour.

The CSR analyzes the sentiment report at the end of the day to identify the most common customer pain points and adjust their engagement strategies for the following day.

Given that the CSR accesses the daily sentiment analysis report, when they review the report, then they should be able to identify at least three common customer pain points based on the trending sentiment data presented in the report.

CSRs are alerted in real-time when a high volume of negative sentiments is detected during a product launch to address potential customer dissatisfaction immediately.

Given the Real-Time Sentiment Tracking is active, when the system detects a surge in negative sentiments during the product launch, then the CSR should receive an instant notification prompting immediate action.

To train new CSRs, the team uses historical sentiment data to review how customer interactions affected overall customer satisfaction and business metrics.

Given historical sentiment data is accessible, when new CSRs review the training materials, then they should be able to correlate the sentiment trends with corresponding customer satisfaction scores and business outcomes effectively.

The CSR uses the Real-Time Sentiment Tracking dashboard to compare sentiment trends across different customer interaction channels, such as email, chat, and social media.

Given the CSR is using the Real-Time Sentiment Tracking dashboard, when they select the channel filter, then they should be able to view and compare sentiment trends across all selected channels visually and numerically.

Customized Sentiment Reports

"As a manager, I want to generate customized sentiment reports so I can analyze specific trends in customer feedback that are relevant to our business goals."

Description

The Customized Sentiment Reports requirement allows users to generate tailored reports based on specific metrics and timeframes. This feature enables CSRs and managers to focus on particular aspects of customer interactions—whether they want to analyze satisfaction levels over the past month, view sentiment trends related to specific products, or compare feedback from different channels. The capability to customize reports according to user-defined parameters ensures that key stakeholders receive relevant insights that align with their operational and strategic needs. The integration of customizable reporting will facilitate informed decision-making and enhance the team's ability to address specific customer concerns effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Generating Custom Sentiment Reports for Specific Time Frames

Given a CSR selects a custom report option, when they input a specific date range, then the system should generate a sentiment report reflecting the specified time frame accurately.

Filtering Sentiment Reports by Product

Given a CSR is on the custom report screen, when they select a specific product filter, then the generated report should only reflect sentiment data related to that product.

Comparing Sentiment Across Different Feedback Channels

Given a manager is generating a custom report, when they choose multiple feedback channels for comparison, then the output should clearly display a side-by-side sentiment analysis for each channel.

Saving Customized Sentiment Reports for Future Use

Given a CSR has generated a custom sentiment report, when they click the save button, then the report should be stored in their user account for easy access later.

Exporting Customized Reports to CSV Format

Given that a custom sentiment report has been generated, when the user selects the export option, then the report should be downloadable in CSV format without data loss.

Generating Reports for Multiple Metrics

Given a CSR is creating a custom report, when they select multiple sentiment metrics (e.g., satisfaction, dissatisfaction, neutrality), then the report should accurately reflect all selected metrics in the output.

User Notifications for Report Generation Completion

Given that a custom sentiment report is being generated, when the report is ready, then the system should notify the user via email or in-app notification regarding the completion.

Sentiment Response Recommendations

"As a customer service representative, I want to receive response recommendations based on customer sentiment so that I can provide more empathetic and effective responses."

Description

The Sentiment Response Recommendations requirement provides CSRs with AI-driven suggestions for responding to customer feedback based on the sentiment analysis results. This system will analyze the sentiment score of customer interactions and recommend tailored responses, ensuring that CSRs address customer emotions appropriately. For instance, if a customer expresses frustration, the recommendation will emphasize empathy and offer resolutions based on similar past interactions. By integrating this feature, InventaPro enhances the efficiency and effectiveness of customer interactions, reducing response time and improving customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Sentiment Response Recommendations for a Disgruntled Customer.

Given a customer feedback with a negative sentiment score, when a CSR accesses the Sentiment Response Recommendations feature, then the system should provide at least three tailored response suggestions that focus on empathy and resolutions based on similar past interactions.

Sentiment Response Recommendations for a Satisfied Customer.

Given a customer feedback with a positive sentiment score, when a CSR reviews the Sentiment Response Recommendations, then the system should present at least three tailored responses that encourage customer loyalty and express appreciation.

Sentiment Analysis Impact on Response Times.

Given that a CSR utilizes the Sentiment Response Recommendations in real-time during customer interactions, when comparing response times before and after implementation, then the average response time should decrease by at least 20%.

Integration with Existing Customer Interaction Logs.

Given customer interaction logs containing sentiment scores, when the CSR accesses the Sentiment Response Recommendations, then the system must accurately analyze and retrieve appropriate recommendations based on at least the last three customer interactions for context.

User Feedback on Recommended Responses.

Given a CSR implements a suggested response from the Sentiment Response Recommendations, when the interaction is completed, then the CSR must report an 85% satisfaction rate regarding the relevance and effectiveness of the proposed response in follow-up feedback surveys.

Training of the AI Model for Improved Recommendations.

Given continuous usage of the Sentiment Response Recommendations feature, when feedback is collected on the accuracy and effectiveness of the suggestions, then the AI model should improve its recommendation accuracy by at least 15% after two months of operation.

Performance Reports for Sentiment Analysis Feature Usage.

Given a defined reporting period, when a management report is generated on the usage of the Sentiment Response Recommendations feature, then it should include metrics on the number of interactions assisted by the recommendations alongside customer satisfaction improvements by at least 10%.

Emotion Tagging

"As a product analyst, I want interactions tagged with specific emotions so that I can identify areas where our service excels or needs improvement."

Description

The Emotion Tagging requirement enables automatic tagging of customer feedback and interactions with specific emotions, such as joy, anger, sadness, or confusion. By employing advanced sentiment analysis techniques, this functionality captures the nuances of customer expressions and categorizes them for better insights. The emotion-tagged interactions can then be used for analyzing trends over time, developing targeted interventions, and training CSRs to recognize and appropriately respond to various emotional cues. This level of detail in sentiment analysis allows for a more profound understanding of customer experiences, helping to improve service quality and customer relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer feedback categorized by emotion is displayed on the dashboard for CSRs to review during their interactions.

Given customer feedback with varying emotional cues, when the CSRs access the dashboard, then they should see emotion tags (joy, anger, sadness, confusion, etc.) automatically assigned to each piece of feedback.

A CSR is analyzing customer feedback trends over time during a weekly report meeting.

Given a month of customer interaction data, when the CSR generates a sentiment analysis report, then the report should accurately reflect the percentage distribution of each emotion tagged over the month.

A CSR receives training on recognizing emotional cues in customer feedback.

Given a set of customer feedback samples with various emotion tags, when the CSR completes the training module, then they should correctly identify at least 80% of the emotions in a follow-up assessment.

A customer expresses dissatisfaction through feedback which is tagged automatically.

Given customer feedback containing negative sentiment, when the feedback is submitted, then it should be tagged 'anger' or 'sadness' as appropriate automatically.

A monthly review of emotional tone in customer feedback takes place to adjust service strategies.

Given compiled emotion-tagged data from multiple months, when managers review the trends, then they should be able to identify at least three actionable insights to improve customer service based on the emotional responses observed.

Cumulative Sentiment Trends

"As a stakeholder, I want to view cumulative sentiment trends so that I can assess the long-term effectiveness of our customer service initiatives and make strategic decisions accordingly."

Description

The Cumulative Sentiment Trends requirement provides a visual representation of sentiment analysis data over time, allowing users to identify long-term trends in customer satisfaction. This feature involves the integration of graphical dashboards that display sentiment scores, feedback volume, and emotional categories in a user-friendly manner. By observing trends over extended periods, managers and stakeholders can better understand the overall trajectory of customer satisfaction and make informed strategic decisions. This requirement is crucial for understanding the effectiveness of changes implemented in customer service strategies and identifying areas for future improvement.

Acceptance Criteria

Visual Representation of Sentiment Trends over a 6-Month Period.

Given the user accesses the Cumulative Sentiment Trends dashboard, when the user selects a 6-month view, then the dashboard should display a line graph showing sentiment scores over the selected period with distinct markers for feedback volume.

Emotional Categories Breakdown in Sentiment Trends.

Given the user is viewing the Cumulative Sentiment Trends, when the user clicks on an emotional category filter, then the system should update the graph to show sentiment scores only for the selected emotional category (e.g., positive, negative, neutral).

Comparison of Sentiment Scores Before and After Changes in Customer Service Strategies.

Given the user wants to analyze the impact of customer service changes, when the user selects the date range before and after the service strategy implementation, then the system should provide a comparative analysis visual that highlights any significant changes in sentiment scores in a bar chart format.

Real-Time Updates on Sentiment Trends during Live Customer Interactions.

Given the user is monitoring customer interactions in real-time, when a live feedback entry is made, then the sentiment analysis report should automatically update within 3 seconds to include the new sentiment score and reflect any changes to the cumulative trend.

Downloadable Sentiment Analysis Reports for Presentations.

Given the user wants to prepare a report for an upcoming meeting, when the user selects the download option on the Cumulative Sentiment Trends dashboard, then the system should generate and provide a .csv and .pdf file containing the sentiment scores and graphs for the selected period.

User-Friendly Interface for Historical Data Access.

Given the user is navigating the Cumulative Sentiment Trends dashboard, when the user selects a date range for historical data, then the interface should allow easy navigation through the data without performance lag, and all data should load within 5 seconds.

Seasonal Demand Predictor

The Seasonal Demand Predictor uses historical sales data and seasonal trends to forecast demand for specific products during peak seasons. By allowing Seasonal Sellers to anticipate customer needs, this feature ensures optimal stock levels, helping to minimize overstock while maximizing sales opportunities during critical selling periods.

Requirements

Historical Data Analysis

"As a seasonal seller, I want to analyze historical sales data so that I can identify trends and prepare my inventory accordingly for peak seasons."

Description

The Historical Data Analysis requirement focuses on collecting and analyzing historical sales data to identify trends and patterns. This functionality involves integrating data from various sources, such as past sales records, customer behavior, and seasonal trends over multiple years. By utilizing advanced analytics, this feature will allow users to visualize past performance and identify key periods of high demand. The ultimate goal is to provide retailers with actionable insights that will underpin accurate demand forecasting, enhancing the ability to manage stock levels and optimize inventory for upcoming seasons.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Integration from Multiple Sales Channels

Given that past sales data from online and offline channels has been successfully connected, when the analysis tool is accessed, then it should display a consolidated view of historical sales data.

Trend Identification Over the Years

Given that historical sales data spans over multiple years, when the analysis is performed, then it should accurately identify and highlight at least three significant trends in sales patterns.

Visualization of Historical Data Performance

Given that historical sales data analysis is complete, when the user navigates to the visualization dashboard, then it should present interactive charts showing sales performance for each identified trend.

User-Friendly Interface for Data Interaction

Given that the historical data analysis tool is operational, when users attempt to interact with the data, then it should have a clearly labeled and intuitive interface allowing users to filter and sort data easily.

Actionable Insights Generation

Given that historical trends have been identified, when the system generates insights, then it should provide at least five actionable recommendations for improving stock levels during peak seasons.

Reporting of High Demand Periods

Given that the data analysis is complete, when users request a report, then it should include a detailed summary of the top three periods of high demand identified from the data.

AI-Driven Demand Forecasting

"As a retailer, I want to use AI to forecast product demand so that I can ensure optimal inventory levels and meet customer demands during peak seasons."

Description

The AI-Driven Demand Forecasting requirement leverages machine learning algorithms to predict future product demand based on historical sales data and external factors such as market trends and consumer behavior. This functionality will utilize advanced data analytics to create predictive models that adjust in real-time, helping retailers understand which products are likely to be in demand during specific seasons. By providing more accurate forecasts, retailers can optimize their inventory management, reducing the risk of overstock and stockouts, ultimately leading to increased sales and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal Sellers input their historical sales data for the past three years into InventaPro to generate forecasts for peak holiday sales.

Given the historical sales data of the past three years, when the Seasonal Demand Predictor is utilized, then it should generate at least 90% accurate forecasts for the top five products during the peak holiday season.

A retailer wants to assess the performance of the Seasonal Demand Predictor after a holiday season to determine its effectiveness in stock management.

Given past sales data and the forecast generated by the Seasonal Demand Predictor, when comparing actual sales and stock levels, then there should be no more than 10% variance in stockouts or overstocks.

Retailers are planning to launch a new product during the summer season using the Seasonal Demand Predictor to guide inventory orders.

Given the product has similar historical sales characteristics to existing products, when entering the relevant data into the Seasonal Demand Predictor, then the system should provide actionable insights on recommended stock levels for the summer season.

A retailer integrates the Seasonal Demand Predictor with their existing e-commerce platform to ensure real-time updates to inventory levels based on online sales and forecasts.

Given that an order is placed online for a product during the forecasted peak season, when the Seasonal Demand Predictor is triggered, then it should automatically adjust the inventory levels within 5 minutes of the sale.

After using the Seasonal Demand Predictor, a retailer intends to evaluate customer satisfaction regarding product availability during critical selling periods.

Given the releases of seasonal products forecasted by the Seasonal Demand Predictor, when conducting customer surveys during and after the peak season, then at least 85% of customers should report satisfaction with product availability.

Retailers seek to minimize the time taken for stock reordering based on insights from the Seasonal Demand Predictor.

Given the forecasts generated by the Seasonal Demand Predictor, when a product’s stock falls below the defined threshold, then the system should trigger reorder alerts within 15 minutes to the inventory manager.

Peak Season Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts about upcoming peak seasons so that I can adjust my stock levels proactively and maximize sales opportunities."

Description

The Peak Season Alerts requirement will notify retailers of upcoming peak seasons and potential high-demand periods for specific products. This feature will analyze data from historical sales, market trends, and external events to send timely alerts to users, ensuring they can prepare their inventory adequately in advance. Users will benefit from knowing exactly when to increase stock orders or adjust pricing strategies, thus maximizing profitability during critical sales periods while minimizing last-minute rushes that can lead to errors.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives a notification at least two weeks prior to an upcoming peak season, detailing which products are predicted to be in high demand based on historical data.

Given that the retailer has historical sales data, when the notification is triggered, then the retailer should receive an alert indicating the specific products to prepare for the peak season.

Retailer can view a dashboard that shows projected demand trends for the upcoming peak seasons, allowing them to strategize their orders accordingly.

Given that the retailer accesses the dashboard, when they review the seasonal demand forecasts, then they should see a clear visual representation of predicted demand for each product during the peak season.

Retailer adjusts their inventory orders based on the Peak Season Alerts, ensuring that stock levels are adequate to meet predicted demand.

Given the retailer has received alerts about peak season demand, when they modify their orders in the system, then the inventory levels should reflect the adjustments made in response to the alerts.

Retailer receives notifications of market trends or external events that could affect demand during peak seasons, allowing them to react promptly.

Given that market trends or significant external events are detected, when the alerts are sent, then the retailer should receive timely notifications suggesting appropriate inventory adjustments.

Retailer evaluates the effectiveness of the Peak Season Alerts after a peak season has ended to analyze sales performance.

Given that the peak season has concluded, when the retailer accesses the performance report, then they should see data comparing actual sales against forecasted demand based on the alerts.

Retailer has the option to customize notification preferences for Peak Season Alerts based on their specific product categories.

Given that the retailer accesses their settings, when they configure their notification preferences, then alerts should only be sent for the selected product categories during peak seasons.

Retailer receives a summary report after the peak season highlighting critical sales data and outcomes related to the Peak Season Alerts.

Given that the peak season has ended, when the retailer requests the summary report, then it should provide insights on stock levels, sales performance, and any discrepancies between forecasts and actual sales.

User-Friendly Dashboard Integration

"As a user, I want to access a user-friendly dashboard that displays seasonal demand predictions so that I can easily interpret data and make informed inventory decisions."

Description

The User-Friendly Dashboard Integration requirement involves creating an intuitive dashboard that displays key metrics and insights related to seasonal demand forecasts. This integration will ensure that relevant data is presented in a visually appealing and easily understandable format, allowing users to interact with demand forecasts effortlessly. Features like customizable views, filtering options, and data visualizations will enhance the user experience, helping users make informed decisions quickly and effectively regarding their inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the dashboard to view seasonal demand forecasts for upcoming holiday sales.

Given the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a section displaying seasonal demand forecasts with product categories, expected sales volume, and historical trends for the next quarter.

User filters seasonal demand forecasts by product category and date range to assess stock requirements.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they apply filters for a specific product category and select a date range, then the displayed forecasts should refresh to show only relevant data for the chosen category and time frame.

User customizes the dashboard to include key metrics related to seasonal demand forecasts.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they choose to customize their view, then they should be able to add, remove, or rearrange widgets that display key metrics like expected sales, stock levels, and historical sales data.

User interacts with data visualizations to gain insights into seasonal trends.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard, when they hover over any data visualization, then informative tooltips should display detailed metrics and insights about the data point being examined.

User accesses the dashboard on a mobile device to check seasonal demand forecasts.

Given the user is on a mobile device, when they log into InventaPro and access the dashboard, then the layout should be responsive, displaying all key metrics and insights clearly without any loss of functionality.

User receives a notification alert regarding significant changes in seasonal demand forecasts.

Given the user has set up alert preferences, when there is a significant increase or decrease in forecasted demand, then they should receive a timely notification via email and within the application.

User seeks help regarding the dashboard features through an integrated support option.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they click on the help icon, then a support pop-up should appear with FAQs, tutorials, and contact details for customer support.

Feedback Loop Mechanism

"As a retailer, I want to provide feedback on forecast accuracy so that I can help improve the prediction models and optimize my inventory management process."

Description

The Feedback Loop Mechanism requirement emphasizes continuous improvement in demand forecasting by allowing users to provide feedback on forecast accuracy. This mechanism will encourage retailers to share their own insights related to seasonal trends and actual sales outcomes, thereby refining the predictive models. By integrating user input into the forecasting process, this feature aims to enhance the overall accuracy of demand predictions over time, ensuring that forecasts remain relevant and effective as market dynamics evolve.

Acceptance Criteria

Users providing feedback on forecast accuracy after a seasonal sales period.

Given a user accesses the Seasonal Demand Predictor after a sales period, when they submit feedback on forecast accuracy, then the feedback should be recorded in the system and reflected in future forecasting models.

Retailers reviewing their sales data alongside the forecast accuracy feedback.

Given a retailer wants to evaluate how their actual sales compared to the forecasts, when they access the reporting dashboard, then they should be able to view a comparison of actual sales vs forecasts along with feedback collected.

Retailers utilizing the updated forecasting model after providing feedback.

Given that a user provided accurate feedback on forecast performance, when they generate a new forecast for the upcoming seasonal period, then the system should utilize the improved forecasting model that incorporates the user feedback.

Users receiving notifications about changes in forecast accuracy after feedback submission.

Given that a user has submitted feedback on forecast accuracy, when the forecast model is updated, then the user should receive a notification detailing how their feedback influenced the model.

Retailers correlating their sales outcomes with seasonal trends and forecast adjustments.

Given a user accesses the forecasting tool, when they apply filters to view seasonal trends alongside actual sales outcomes, then the system should display valid correlations between trends and adjustments made post-feedback.

Users accessing historical feedback trends for predictive modeling.

Given that a user navigates to the feedback analysis section, when they request historical feedback trends, then the system should provide a detailed report showing trends over time and their impact on forecasting accuracy.

Trend Alerts Manager

Trend Alerts Manager sends proactive notifications about emerging sales trends and shifts in consumer preferences relevant to seasonal products. This gives Seasonal Sellers the foresight to adjust their inventory strategy promptly, enabling more agile responses to market changes and improved sales performance.

Requirements

Real-Time Trend Analysis

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want to receive real-time alerts about emerging sales trends so that I can adjust my inventory strategies promptly and improve my sales performance."

Description

The Real-Time Trend Analysis requirement enables the Trend Alerts Manager to analyze sales data continuously, utilizing AI algorithms to identify emerging trends and shifts in consumer preferences. This functionality will ensure that seasonal sellers receive up-to-date insights on their inventory, allowing them to make informed decisions rapidly. The benefits include improved accuracy in stock level adjustments, enhanced ability to capitalize on emerging opportunities, and a reduced risk of missed sales due to inappropriate stock levels. This requirement plays a critical role in aligning inventory strategies with real market behavior, thus directly impacting sales performance.

Acceptance Criteria

New sales data is recorded in the InventaPro system for seasonal products during a major holiday period.

Given that new sales data is recorded, when the Trend Alerts Manager analyzes the data, then it should provide real-time alerts on emerging trends and demand shifts within 5 minutes.

A retail manager wants to understand trend changes in consumer preferences for a specific seasonal item.

Given that the retail manager accesses the Trend Alerts Manager, when they request insights on a specific seasonal item, then the system should display an analysis of at least the last 30 days of sales data, highlighting any significant trends or shifts.

A seasonal seller is alerted of a sudden increase in demand for a particular product due to an emerging trend.

Given that the system identifies an emerging trend, when the Trend Alerts Manager sends a notification to the seller, then the seller should receive the alert via email and in the dashboard in real-time.

The Trend Alerts Manager needs to perform optimally during peak selling seasons.

Given that the sales volume increases during peak seasons, when multiple data inputs are received simultaneously, then the Trend Alerts Manager should maintain an uptime of 99.9% and respond to data analysis requests within 5 seconds.

A seasonal seller reviews past trends to make informed inventory decisions.

Given that the seller wants to analyze historical trend data, when they access the Trend Alerts Manager, then they should be able to view and filter trend reports for the last 12 months, including data on sales volumes and customer preferences.

The system needs to adjust its forecasting algorithms based on real-time sales data.

Given the real-time sales data is being analyzed, when the AI algorithms identify a significant change in consumer behavior, then the system should automatically adjust its demand forecasts and provide recommendations for stock adjustments within the same day.

Customizable Alert Settings

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want to customize my alert settings so that I receive notifications that are specifically relevant to my inventory and business needs."

Description

The Customizable Alert Settings requirement allows users to personalize their notification preferences for trends that matter most to them. This includes the ability to select specific product categories, set thresholds for alert triggers, and choose notification channels such as email or in-app alerts. This flexibility empowers users to tailor the alerts to their unique business needs, enhancing engagement and ensuring that they are only alerted for relevant trends. The expected outcome is a higher relevance of notifications leading to more prompt and effective inventory adjustments.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes alert settings for product categories during a peak season.

Given the user has logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Trend Alerts Manager, then they should be able to select specific product categories for alerts from a list and save their preferences successfully.

User sets thresholds for alert triggers based on sales volume fluctuations.

Given the user has selected specific product categories, when they set a minimum sales volume threshold for notifications, then alerts should only be triggered when sales exceed this volume.

User selects notification channels for receiving alerts about trends.

Given the user has established custom alert settings, when they choose to receive alerts via email or in-app notifications, then they should receive the alerts through their selected channels without any issues.

User tests the alert settings after saving them.

Given the user has saved their customized alert settings, when they simulate a sales trend shift that meets the alert criteria, then the user should receive a notification as per their selected preferences.

User reviews and adjusts their alert settings based on feedback from sales performance.

Given the user has been receiving trend alerts for a month, when they access the Trend Alerts Manager, then they should be able to modify the product categories and thresholds based on their sales performance data.

User searches for historical trend alerts within the system.

Given the user is looking for past trend alerts, when they search within the Trend Alerts Manager, then they should be able to view a complete history of notifications sent, categorized by date and product line.

Historical Trend Comparison

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want to compare emerging trends with historical data so that I can understand the context of current trends and make better inventory decisions."

Description

The Historical Trend Comparison requirement enables users to analyze past performance and compare current trends against historical data. This feature will allow users to create contextual insights about how similar trends have performed in the past, aiding in making data-driven decisions regarding stock adjustments. By understanding historical patterns, seasonal sellers can better anticipate demand fluctuations and optimize their inventory more effectively. The integration of this feature into the Trend Alerts Manager will further enhance its predictive capabilities, providing invaluable data insights for future planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Historical Trend Comparison feature within the Trend Alerts Manager to analyze the sales performance of a seasonal product over the past two years.

Given the user selects a seasonal product from their inventory, when they request a historical trend comparison, then the system should display a graphical representation of sales data for that product over the past two years, including key metrics such as average monthly sales and peaks during specific seasons.

A retail user receives a notification about a new emerging trend that is similar to a past trend they analyzed in the Historical Trend Comparison feature.

Given an emerging trend notification is triggered, when the user accesses the Historical Trend Comparison for the relevant product category, then the user should be able to view past sales data alongside current trend indicators to assess the potential impact on inventory strategy.

The user wants to export the insights gained from the Historical Trend Comparison for a presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user identifies key insights from the Historical Trend Comparison, when they click on the export option, then the system should generate a downloadable report in PDF format containing all relevant data visualizations and summary insights about past sales performance and current trend analyses.

A user seeks to understand the effectiveness of their previous inventory adjustments based on historical sales trends.

Given the user accesses the Historical Trend Comparison, when they filter results by previous inventory adjustments, then the system should show sales performances of the product before and after adjustments, indicating whether the changes had a positive, negative, or neutral impact on sales.

A seasonal seller is evaluating upcoming trends for multiple products and wants to compare them simultaneously against historical data.

Given the user selects multiple seasonal products for comparison, when they initiate the historical trend analysis, then the system should display a comparative chart that allows the user to visualize and analyze trends for all selected products side by side, highlighting significant differences and similarities in performances.

The user rolls out a promotional campaign for a seasonal product based on insights gathered from historical comparisons.

Given the user applies insights from the Historical Trend Comparison in strategizing a promotional campaign, when they implement the campaign, then the system should track sales performance and update the user on the campaign effectiveness relative to previous historical data for that product.

Trend Impact Projection

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want to know how emerging trends may impact my inventory levels so that I can plan my stock accordingly and maximize sales."

Description

The Trend Impact Projection requirement provides users with analytical forecasts on how identified trends might affect their sales and inventory levels. By using predictive analytics, this feature helps sellers project how emerging consumer preferences could influence demand for specific products. This capability allows users to prepare more effectively, maintaining optimal inventory levels in anticipation of these shifts. The expected outcome is enhanced inventory management strategies that minimize the risk of overstocking or stockouts during critical sales periods.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to receive real-time trend impact projections for their seasonal products before the high sales period begins.

Given that a user has set up their account with seasonal products, When the Trend Alerts Manager detects an emerging trend relevant to those products, Then the system should send a notification to the user with predicted changes in demand and suggested actions.

Users need to visualize how projected trends will affect their inventory levels over the next three months.

Given that a user accesses their Trend Impact Projection dashboard, When the user selects a specific seasonal product, Then the system should display a graph that shows projected demand levels alongside current inventory levels for that product over the next three months.

A user wants to compare previous sales data against the trend impact projections to make informed decisions about reordering.

Given that a user has historical sales data for a product, When the user requests a report comparing past sales data with current trend projections, Then the system should generate a report that highlights discrepancies and insights, allowing the user to adjust ordering strategies accordingly.

Users wish to receive alerts when projected inventory levels fall below a critical threshold based on trend impact analysis.

Given that a user has predefined critical inventory thresholds for their products, When a trend projection indicates a potential drop below this threshold, Then the system should automatically alert the user via email and in-app notification.

Users need to adjust their inventory strategy based on alternative projection scenarios provided by the Trend Impact Projection feature.

Given that a user has accessed the alternative projection feature, When the user selects different projected scenarios, Then the system should provide them with a summary of the expected impact on inventory and sales for each scenario.

Integration with Sales Platforms

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want my trend alerts to integrate with my sales platforms so that I can quickly act on insights and adjust my inventory strategy without disruption."

Description

The Integration with Sales Platforms requirement facilitates seamless synchronization of trend alerts with various e-commerce and sales platforms. This integration ensures that alerts are actionable, allowing users to make immediate adjustments to their online and offline sales strategies based on the alerts received. By linking trend insights to operational platforms, sellers can capitalize on emerging trends without missing a beat. This requirement is crucial for enhancing the overall functionality of the Trend Alerts Manager while streamlining users' workflow.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales trend alert integration triggers on the InventaPro dashboard when a significant shift in consumer preferences is detected, prompting the Seasonal Seller to adjust inventory or pricing strategies immediately.

Given the user receives a trend alert notification on the InventaPro dashboard, when they click on the notification, then they should be redirected to the relevant sales platform with pre-loaded inventory adjustment suggestions based on the alert.

A Seasonal Seller accesses the trend alerts received in InventaPro while logged into their integrated e-commerce platform to assess the current stock levels in relation to the alerted trends and make adjustments accordingly.

Given the Seasonal Seller is logged into both InventaPro and their e-commerce platform, when they view an alert for a seasonal trend in their dashboard, then they should see real-time stock data reflecting the ability to meet demand.

The integration with sales platforms is tested to ensure that alerts regarding emerging trends are being sent to all connected accounts without any delay, allowing for swift adjustments to sales strategies.

Given that the trend alert feature is activated, when a new trend is identified, then all connected sales platforms should receive the alert within 5 minutes of detection.

The Seasonal Seller wants to ensure that the trend alert notifications are helpful and actionable, providing insights that directly correlate with the inventory on hand and market demand.

Given that a Seasonal Seller views a trend alert, when they analyze the suggested inventory adjustments, then at least 90% of the suggestions should align with real-time sales data and lead to actionable insights.

The integration feature needs to function across different types of sales platforms to accommodate varying setups used by different retailers in managing their inventory.

Given that a trend alert is generated, when the alert is sent, then it should be successfully delivered and actionable on at least three different e-commerce platforms, such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento.

The Seasonal Seller seeks feedback on the effectiveness of trend alerts to optimize future updates and improve user experience.

Given the user receives a trend alert, when they respond with feedback on its usefulness on a scale from 1 to 5, then at least 80% of the feedback collected should indicate that the alerts are useful for inventory management.

Inventory Rotation Insights

Inventory Rotation Insights assist Seasonal Sellers in managing the timing of stock replenishment and sales strategies throughout the season. By identifying the most effective rotation strategies, this feature helps reduce unsold inventory and enhances cash flow while optimizing sales during peak demand periods.

Requirements

Automated Stock Analysis

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want automated stock analysis so that I can make informed decisions about stock replenishment and minimize excess inventory."

Description

The Automated Stock Analysis feature will provide real-time inventory data analytics, utilizing AI algorithms to assess stock levels, sales trends, and seasonality patterns. This functionality is critical for Seasonal Sellers, as it allows them to gain insights into which products need replenishing and when, making data-driven decisions that align with market demand. The feature will integrate seamlessly into the InventaPro dashboard, offering users an intuitive visual representation of stock performance. By implementing this requirement, retailers will reduce excess stock, minimize stockouts, and improve overall cash flow, ultimately boosting sales and profitability during peak seasons.

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal Seller using Automated Stock Analysis to identify when to replenish stock of holiday items based on sales trends and projected demand.

Given that the Seasonal Seller accesses the Automated Stock Analysis, when they input the sales data, then the system should display recommendations for stock replenishment based on projected demand for the next month.

Retail manager reviews the real-time inventory data during peak sales periods to optimize stock levels and avoid stockouts.

Given that the retail manager is logged into InventaPro, when they access the dashboard, then they should see an up-to-date visual representation of stock levels and alerts for items that are low in stock.

A Seasonal Seller wants to assess the historical sales patterns of specific items to inform their next ordering strategy.

Given that the Seasonal Seller has selected a product category, when they view the sales trend report, then it should display a breakdown of historical sales data, including seasonality patterns for the last three years.

Inventory manager needs to evaluate the financial impact of excess stock on overall cash flow before the seasonal sale period.

Given that the inventory manager requests a cash flow report, when the report generates, then it should include an analysis of potential lost revenue from unsold inventory along with recommendations for markdown strategies.

User wants to seamlessly integrate Automated Stock Analysis with their existing e-commerce platform to synchronize inventory data.

Given that the user has connected their e-commerce platform with InventaPro, when they enable Automated Stock Analysis, then the system should automatically update stock levels based on online sales data in real-time.

Peak Demand Forecasting

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want peak demand forecasting so that I can prepare my inventory in advance and maximize sales during high-demand periods."

Description

Peak Demand Forecasting is a critical requirement that will enhance the Inventory Rotation Insights capability by predicting when specific items are likely to experience increased demand based on historical sales data and market trends. This feature will leverage machine learning techniques to analyze past seasons and forecast future sales spikes. By receiving timely alerts regarding peak periods, retailers can proactively adjust their inventory strategies to capitalize on high-demand windows. The integration of this feature with InventaPro will empower retailers to optimize their inventory turnover rates, improve customer satisfaction through product availability, and ultimately increase revenue during peak selling times.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives a notification of upcoming peak demand for a specific product based on historical data analysis.

Given that the retailer has integrated Peak Demand Forecasting, when historical sales data indicates a forecasted spike for Product A, then the retailer should receive a timely alert with projected demand figures at least 7 days in advance.

Retailer adjusts stock levels for a product based on peak demand forecasts provided by InventaPro.

Given that an alert has been received for Product B for an upcoming peak period, when the retailer accesses their inventory dashboard, then they should see recommended stock levels and reorder points clearly outlined based on the forecast data.

Retailer tracks the accuracy of peak demand forecasts over multiple seasons to assess the effectiveness of the feature.

Given that Peak Demand Forecasting has been utilized for three consecutive peak seasons, when the retailer reviews the forecasting report, then at least 85% of the forecasted peak periods should align with actual sales spikes observed in historical data.

Retailer plans marketing strategies around predicted peak demand periods for seasonal products.

Given that the retailer has received peak demand predictions for Product C, when they access the marketing tool, then they should see automated recommendations for promotional activities aligned with the forecasted demand dates.

Retailer re-evaluates inventory turnover rates after implementing the Peak Demand Forecasting feature.

Given that the retailer has used the forecasting tool for one full season, when they review the inventory turnover metrics, then there should be at least a 15% improvement in turnover rates compared to the previous season without the forecasting feature.

Dynamic Replenishment Alerts

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want dynamic replenishment alerts so that I can efficiently manage my stock and respond quickly to changing demand."

Description

Dynamic Replenishment Alerts will notify users of low stock levels and recommend restocking based on predictive analytics. This requirement focuses on providing actionable insights for Seasonal Sellers, ensuring they never miss an opportunity to restock items in demand. The alerts will be triggered by inventory thresholds set by the user, tailored to their specific business needs, allowing retailers to customize their replenishment strategies. Integrating this feature with existing alert systems within InventaPro will help improve inventory turnover rates and reduce the risk of lost sales, enabling retailers to respond swiftly to consumer needs and maintain optimal stock levels throughout the season.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification for low stock levels when inventory drops below the user-defined threshold.

Given a user has set a low stock threshold for an item, When the inventory of that item drops below the set threshold, Then the user should receive a notification alerting them to restock the item.

User receives a recommendation for restocking based on predictive analytics.

Given that predictive analytics indicate a rise in demand for a particular item, When the item's current stock falls below the user-defined threshold, Then a recommendation for restocking should be displayed to the user with suggested quantities.

User can customize alert thresholds for different products.

Given a user is in the alert settings menu, When the user adjusts the low stock threshold for a product and saves the settings, Then the customized alert threshold should be reflected in the inventory management system.

User can integrate the dynamic replenishment alerts with existing alert systems.

Given an active integration setup, When an alert is triggered for low stock, Then it should appear seamlessly within the existing alert systems in InventaPro without duplication or error.

User views a log of all past replenishment alerts for analysis.

Given that replenishment alerts have been triggered, When the user accesses the alert history section, Then they should see a complete log of all past alerts with timestamps and action taken notes.

User receives a confirmation of actions taken after receiving an alert.

Given a user receives a low stock alert, When the user takes action based on the alert, Then a confirmation message should be displayed indicating the action taken and suggesting next steps if applicable.

User can set different thresholds for different types of inventory (i.e., perishable vs non-perishable).

Given a user is managing different types of inventory, When the user sets specific low stock thresholds for perishable items distinct from non-perishable items, Then the system should separately apply these thresholds and send alerts accordingly.

Inventory Performance Dashboard

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want an inventory performance dashboard so that I can easily monitor my stock metrics and make informed inventory decisions."

Description

The Inventory Performance Dashboard will deliver a comprehensive overview of stock metrics, including turnover rates, product performance, and sales velocity, tailored specifically for Seasonal Sellers. This requirement enhances the user experience by providing a visually engaging and interactive dashboard that aligns with InventaPro's goal of offering real-time insights. It will allow users to monitor inventory performance at a glance and delve deeper into specific items to analyze trends and make strategic decisions. The expected outcome is improved operational efficiency, reduced excess inventory, and maximized revenue through informed decision-making based on clear, visual data representations.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Inventory Performance Dashboard after logging into InventaPro to review their inventory metrics at the beginning of a new season.

Given the user is logged in to InventaPro, when they navigate to the Inventory Performance Dashboard, then the dashboard should load successfully within 3 seconds and display an overview of stock metrics including turnover rates and sales velocity.

User looks for specific product performance metrics to analyze trends for certain items during a seasonal peak.

Given the user is on the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they select a specific product from the inventory list, then detailed performance metrics for that product, including historical sales data and stock levels, should be displayed within 2 seconds.

Seasonal Seller seeks to identify underperforming products to strategize for upcoming sales events.

Given that the user is using the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they filter products based on sales velocity, then the dashboard should accurately display a list of products with low sales velocity, enabling the user to make informed decisions on inventory rotation.

User wants to compare the turnover rates of two different product categories during the current season.

Given the user is on the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they select two product categories to compare, then the dashboard should show a side-by-side comparison of turnover rates for both categories, along with graphical representations for clarity.

User wishes to assess the overall performance of their inventory to enhance cash flow management.

Given that the user has access to the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they review the summary metrics, then the dashboard should provide insights including total revenue, total inventory costs, and cash flow forecasts based on current stocks within one transaction cycle.

User is interested in receiving alerts about overstock items displayed on the dashboard.

Given the user has configured their dashboard preferences, when items exceed a predetermined stock level, then the dashboard should provide visual alerts highlighting those overstock items dynamically on the homepage.

Seasonal Seller wants to download their inventory performance report for external presentation.

Given the user is viewing the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they click the 'Download Report' button, then a CSV report containing all displayed metrics should be generated and downloaded successfully without data loss within 2 minutes.

Sales Strategy Recommendations

"As a Seasonal Seller, I want sales strategy recommendations so that I can optimize my pricing and promotions to increase sales while managing my inventory effectively."

Description

Sales Strategy Recommendations will offer tailored suggestions for pricing and promotions based on inventory levels and expected demand throughout the season. This requirement is vital for aiding Seasonal Sellers in optimizing their sales strategies, fostering higher conversion rates by aligning pricing and promotional efforts with stock availability. The recommendations will leverage historic sales data and current trends to guide users on the best approaches for maximizing sales efficiency. Integration with InventaPro's existing recommendation engine will enhance its overall functionality, encouraging smarter inventory management and ultimately boosting sales during critical sales periods.

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal sellers enter their current inventory levels and historical sales data into InventaPro to receive tailored sales strategy recommendations for an upcoming holiday season.

Given the seasonal seller has input their current inventory levels and historical sales data, when they request sales strategy recommendations, then the system should provide at least three tailored pricing and promotion suggestions for maximum efficiency.

A seasonal seller wants to assess the performance of pricing strategies suggested by InventaPro during a peak sales period.

Given the seasonal seller applied the suggested pricing strategies, when they analyze sales performance data post-implementation, then there should be a minimum 10% increase in conversion rates compared to previous periods without recommendations.

Multiple seasonal sellers view the sales strategy recommendations page within the InventaPro dashboard during a peak season.

Given multiple users are accessing the Sales Strategy Recommendations feature, when they refresh the page, then the system should handle concurrent access without crashing or slowing down significantly, ensuring all users receive real-time data.

A seasonal seller receives a notification about a recommended promotion based on declining inventory levels.

Given the inventory levels for a high-demand item are below a certain threshold, when the system generates a promotion recommendation, then the seller should receive a notification highlighting the urgency and potential sales impact of the promotion.

Seasonal sellers need to view recommendations on the InventaPro platform's user interface to strategize before a major sales event.

Given the seasonal seller is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Recommendations section, then they should see a user-friendly interface displaying timely and relevant pricing and promotion recommendations aligned with current inventory status.

Seasonal Sales Reporting

Seasonal Sales Reporting provides in-depth analyses of sales performance during seasonal peaks and troughs. By offering visual summaries and actionable insights, this feature allows sellers to evaluate their strategies, adjust future inventory orders, and enhance planning for upcoming seasons.

Requirements

Dynamic Data Visualization

"As a retailer, I want to see dynamic visual representations of my seasonal sales data so that I can easily identify trends and make informed decisions about my inventory management and marketing strategies."

Description

The Dynamic Data Visualization requirement involves creating interactive graphical displays that showcase sales data trends over different seasons. This feature is crucial for retailers to quickly grasp their sales performance through visual representations, such as graphs and charts, enabling better strategic decisions based on real-time data. By offering customizable views according to product categories, locations, or other relevant parameters, users can tailor their analysis to fit their specific needs, ultimately leading to informed inventory management and sales strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User views seasonal sales trends through dynamic data visualizations on the InventaPro dashboard.

Given that the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Seasonal Sales Reporting section, then the interactive graphical displays of sales data trends for selected seasons should be displayed accurately.

User customizes data visualization parameters to analyze specific product categories during a seasonal peak.

Given that the user is on the Seasonal Sales Reporting page, when they select a specific product category and seasonal timeframe, then the visualization should update to reflect only the sales data relevant to those parameters.

User generates a report based on visualized sales data for strategic planning purposes.

Given that the user has navigated to the seasonal sales trends visualization, when they click on the 'Export Report' button, then they should receive a downloadable report that includes all visual data representation in PDF format.

User evaluates the effectiveness of marketing campaigns displayed through sales trend visualizations.

Given that the user accesses sales visualizations, when they compare sales data before and after a marketing campaign, then they should be able to see clear trends indicating the impact of the campaign on sales performance.

User interacts with the visualization tool to drill down into sales data.

Given that the user is viewing the data visualization, when they hover over a data point on the graph, then a tooltip should appear providing detailed sales information for that point, including date, amount, and percentage change.

User assesses inventory needs based on visualized seasonal sales trends.

Given that the user is analyzing the seasonal sales trend visualizations, when they identify a significant drop in sales during a particular season, then the system should suggest adjustments to their inventory levels for that season based on historical data.

Automated Report Generation

"As a retailer, I want to receive automated seasonal sales reports so that I can save time on reporting and focus more on analyzing and adjusting my inventory strategies."

Description

The Automated Report Generation requirement will enable the system to automatically generate sales reports at the end of each season, summarizing overall performance, inventory levels, and sales trends. This feature will save retailers significant time and effort by eliminating the need for manual reporting, allowing them to focus on strategic planning. The automated reports will be customizable, allowing retailers to choose which metrics to include and receive them in formats such as PDF or Excel, further enhancing usability and accessibility.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Report Generation for Seasonal Sales at the end of Q4

Given that the sales period of Q4 has ended, when the retailer requests the automated report generation, then the system should generate and deliver a report in PDF format summarizing total sales, inventory levels, and sales trends for Q4 within 2 hours.

Customizable Metrics Selection for Automated Reports

Given the retailer has selected specific metrics to include in the automated report, when the report is generated, then it should only include the metrics chosen and format them as per the retailer's selection.

E-mail Notification for Generated Reports

Given that the automated report has been successfully generated, when the report is ready, then the retailer should receive an email notification with a link to download the report within 30 minutes of generation.

Multiple Formats for Automated Report Delivery

Given the retailer's preferences, when the automated report is generated, then it should be available for download in both PDF and Excel formats.

Storage of Historical Reports for Future Access

Given that automated reports have been generated for past seasons, when the retailer accesses the reporting dashboard, then they should be able to view, download and analyze historical sales reports for the last 5 seasons.

User-Friendly Interface for Report Customization

Given the requirement for customizable reports, when the retailer accesses the report settings, then they should be able to easily select and deselect metrics using a user-friendly interface.

Comparative Seasonal Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to compare my current seasonal sales data with past seasons so that I can identify patterns and optimize my inventory purchasing decisions for the upcoming seasons."

Description

The Comparative Seasonal Analysis requirement grants users the ability to analyze sales performance against previous seasons, providing insights into patterns of consumer behavior and inventory performance. This feature is beneficial for retailers seeking to understand how their sales fluctuate over time and to assess the effectiveness of marketing strategies and stock levels. By offering side-by-side comparisons, this tool will help users make informed decisions for future inventory orders, ensuring they are prepared for upcoming seasonal demands.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to compare the sales of winter season 2024 against winter season 2023 to evaluate changes in consumer purchasing behavior.

Given the user inputs the desired seasonal periods, when they request a comparative analysis, then the system should display side-by-side graphs for both seasons highlighting key sales metrics.

A retailer needs to analyze how a specific marketing campaign impacted their spring sales compared to the previous year.

Given the user has selected the campaign period, when they run the report, then the system should show a summary of sales before and after the campaign along with percentage changes in performance.

An e-commerce seller wants to assess inventory levels during the holiday season compared to last year to adjust future orders accordingly.

Given the user selects the holiday season date ranges for comparison, when they initiate the analysis, then the results must include total units sold, remaining inventory, and highlight any overstock or stockout situations.

An owner wants to understand sales trends across multiple seasons to make informed stock purchasing decisions for the upcoming year.

Given the user selects multiple seasonal periods, when the analysis is generated, then the system should provide a consolidated report detailing year-over-year sales growth, customer ordering patterns, and product performance comparisons.

A retailer is preparing for next summer and needs to compare last summer’s sales with the previous two years to identify consistent growth trends.

Given the user chooses the summer seasons for the last three years, when they request the comparative analysis, then the tool must present historical sales trends in a visual format, highlighting increases or decreases by percentage.

A small business owner wants to evaluate how changes in pricing strategies affected sales volume compared to previous seasons.

Given the user inputs the period of a new pricing strategy, when they run a seasonal analysis, then the report should reflect sales volume changes and correlate them with the pricing adjustments made during that period.

Inventory Adjustment Recommendations

"As a retailer, I want AI-driven recommendations for inventory adjustments based on seasonal sales data so that I can optimize my stock levels and avoid costly overstock or stockouts during peak seasons."

Description

The Inventory Adjustment Recommendations requirement will provide AI-driven suggestions for inventory adjustments based on seasonal sales data analysis. This feature will leverage historical sales performance and current inventory levels to recommend optimal stock levels, thus preventing both overstock and stockouts. By integrating with the inventory management system, it enhances overall operational efficiency and ensures that retailers maintain appropriate stock throughout seasonal peaks and troughs.

Acceptance Criteria

AI-driven inventory adjustment suggestions for a retailer experiencing high demand due to a seasonal sale event.

Given historical sales data indicating a 30% increase in sales during the seasonal event, when the retailer inputs current inventory levels into the system, then the system should provide recommendations to adjust stock levels to meet the projected demand accurately.

A retailer reviewing the inventory adjustment recommendations at the end of the holiday season to assess effectiveness and make further adjustments.

Given past inventory levels and sales performance data, when the retailer evaluates the AI recommendations against actual sales, then the system should reflect an accuracy rate of at least 85% in predicting necessary inventory changes.

Generate inventory recommendations for a product that consistently sells well but has shown unusual stock levels due to a new supplier.

Given that the product's average monthly sales are 100 units, when inventory levels drop to 50 units due to supplier delays, then the system should alert the retailer with a recommendation to reorder sufficient stock to meet the expected demand for the next month, calculated using the historical data.

A retailer using real-time sales data to make quick decisions regarding inventory adjustments ahead of an unexpected sales surge.

Given that sales surge information is integrated into the system, when an increase is detected in real-time analytics, then the system should generate and display immediate recommendations for inventory adjustments within 15 minutes of the data update.

Comparing recommended inventory levels with actual stock levels before a new season begins.

Given the seasonal sales report is available, when the retailer views the recommended stock levels, then the system should show a comparison report that highlights any discrepancies of more than 20% between the recommended inventory and actual stock levels.

Custom Alerts for Performance Metrics

"As a retailer, I want to set custom alerts for key performance metrics during seasonal sales so that I can quickly respond to changes in sales or inventory levels and ensure optimal performance."

Description

The Custom Alerts for Performance Metrics requirement allows users to set configurable alerts for various performance indicators during peak sales periods. Retailers can customize alerts for metrics such as sales drop, stock depletion, or significantly high turnover rates, prompting timely actions to adapt or respond. This proactive approach ensures retailers remain agile and responsive to changing sales conditions, ultimately improving customer satisfaction and profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Setting Custom Alerts for Sales Drop during Holiday Season

Given the user is in the Custom Alerts settings, when they configure an alert for a sales drop of 20% over a 24-hour period, then the alert should be triggered and a notification sent when sales drop below this threshold.

Configuring Stock Depletion Alerts for Peak Sale Days

Given the user is monitoring inventory levels, when they set an alert for stock depletion at 10 units for a specific product during peak sales days, then the alert should activate and notify the user when stock reaches the set level.

Creating Turnover Rate Alerts for Fast-Moving Products

Given the user is analyzing product performance, when they configure an alert for a turnover rate exceeding 50% within one week, then the system should send a notification as soon as the turnover rate surpasses this limit.

Editing Existing Alert Settings

Given the user has created custom alerts, when they access the alert settings, then they should be able to modify the criteria of these alerts, and the changes should save properly without errors.

Testing Alert Notifications for Accuracy

Given the user has set up multiple custom alerts, when sales metrics trigger these alerts, then the user should receive accurate notifications reflecting the specified metric changes promptly.

Reviewing Alert History for Previous Notifications

Given the user has activated alerts, when they navigate to alert history, then they should see a comprehensive log of all triggered alerts, including timestamps and affected metrics.

Integrating Alerts with External Notification Channels

Given the user wants to receive alerts via email, when they configure their notification settings to include email notifications, then they should receive timely alerts through their specified email for any triggered alerts.

Promotion Performance Analytics

Promotion Performance Analytics evaluates the effectiveness of marketing campaigns and promotions during seasonal sales events. By analyzing customer response and sales growth linked to specific promotions, sellers can refine their marketing strategies for future seasons, ensuring enhanced customer engagement and sales results.

Requirements

Promotion Effectiveness Metrics

"As a marketing manager, I want to analyze the effectiveness of my seasonal promotions so that I can adjust future campaigns based on customer responses and sales data."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing detailed metrics that evaluate the success of marketing campaigns and promotions during sales events. It will include data points such as sales growth, customer engagement rates, and conversion rates linked to specific promotions. The functionality will allow users to filter reports based on various parameters, such as time frame and product categories, helping retailers understand which promotions resonate the most with their customers. This will empower businesses to make data-driven decisions to refine future marketing strategies, ultimately optimizing performance and maximizing return on investment for marketing efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

Evaluating the success of a promotional campaign during a seasonal sale for an online retail store.

Given a promotional campaign has run for a specified time frame, when the user accesses the Promotion Performance Analytics dashboard, then they should see metrics displaying sales growth and customer engagement rates associated with that campaign.

Analyzing the effectiveness of a discount promotion compared to a buy-one-get-one (BOGO) offer during sales events.

Given the user has set parameters to compare different types of promotions, when they generate a report, then the system should display a comparison of sales growth, engagement rates, and conversion rates for the selected promotions clearly.

Filtering promotional performance data by specific product categories to assess targeted marketing efforts.

Given the user wishes to analyze promotions for a particular product category, when they apply the category filter on the analytics report, then the report should refresh to only display metrics related to that category's promotions.

Understanding customer engagement rates over time for various promotional strategies.

Given the user selects a time frame for analyzing customer engagement, when the report is generated, then it should include engagement rates per promotion over the selected period, allowing for historical comparisons.

Identifying which promotions resulted in the highest conversion rates during the last holiday season.

Given the user navigates to the conversion rates section of the Promotion Performance Analytics, when they view the data, then the report should show a list of promotions sorted by conversion rates, detailing the highest performing promotions clearly.

Reviewing the overall performance of a marketing campaign to inform future strategies.

Given the promotional campaign has recently ended, when the user requests the final performance report, then the report should include all required metrics, such as sales growth, engagement, and conversion rates, with insights for future improvements.

Customer Segmentation Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to segment my customers based on their response to promotions so that I can provide more targeted marketing efforts to boost sales."

Description

This requirement entails creating a segmentation tool that categorizes customers based on their purchasing behavior during promotional events. By implementing this feature, retailers can identify key demographics and segments that respond best to specific promotions. The output will enable businesses to tailor marketing strategies to those segments, providing more personalized promotions in the future, thus increasing customer loyalty and engagement. Integration with customer relationship management (CRM) systems will facilitate seamless data input and analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Segmentation Analysis Tool enables retailers to categorize customers based on their purchasing behavior during promotional events, allowing for targeted marketing strategies.

Given that a retailer runs a promotional event, when the Customer Segmentation Analysis tool is applied, then it should categorize customers into at least three distinct segments based on their purchasing behavior during that event.

The Customer Segmentation Analysis tool integrates smoothly with existing CRM systems to retrieve customer data for analysis during promotional events.

Given that the retailer has a compatible CRM system, when the Customer Segmentation Analysis tool is activated, then it should successfully pull customer data without errors and within a timeframe of 10 seconds.

Retailers need to view detailed reports of customer segments after promotional events to evaluate effectiveness and strategy adjustment.

Given that promotions have been conducted, when the retailer accesses the segmentation report generated by the tool, then it should display at least five key metrics including total sales, number of customers, and segment performance comparisons.

The segmentation tool allows retailers to refine their marketing strategies based on customer response to past promotions effectively.

Given a set of promotional data, when a retailer analyzes the segments produced by the tool, then it should provide actionable insights that suggest at least three potential tailored marketing strategies for future promotions.

Retailers desire the ability to export segmented customer lists for targeted email marketing campaigns after using the segmentation tool.

Given that customer segments are generated, when the retailer selects a segment to export, then the system should allow the export of the segmented customer list in CSV format without data loss.

The Customer Segmentation Analysis tool needs to provide a user-friendly interface to help retailers navigate and understand customer segments easily.

Given the retailer has logged into the tool, when they access the customer segmentation dashboard, then it should load within 5 seconds and display a user-friendly graphical representation of the segments.

Real-time Performance Dashboard

"As a store owner, I want to view real-time analytics of my promotions so that I can monitor their success and make adjustments on the fly."

Description

The real-time performance dashboard will display live analytics on ongoing promotions, showcasing key metrics such as current sales, customer participation rates, and feedback scores. This requirement aims to offer retailers instant insight into how their promotions are performing during live events, enabling them to make quick adjustments if necessary. The dashboard will be designed to be user-friendly, presenting data visually through graphs and charts for easy interpretation and timely decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

Promotion Performance Analytics: Real-time performance dashboard for seasonal sales events.

Given that the retailer is accessing the real-time performance dashboard during a seasonal sale, when they view the promotional metrics, then they must see current sales figures that are updated at least every minute.

Promotion Performance Analytics: Customer participation rates displayed on the dashboard.

Given that the retailer is on the performance dashboard, when they look for customer participation rates for current promotions, then they must be able to view participation percentages updated in real-time.

Promotion Performance Analytics: User-friendly visual representation of data.

Given that the retailer is investigating promotional performance on the dashboard, when they examine the charts and graphs, then they must find the data presented in intuitive formats that are easy to interpret at a glance.

Promotion Performance Analytics: Real-time feedback scores from customers.

Given that the retailer is utilizing the performance dashboard during a promotion, when they check feedback scores, then they must see scores that reflect customer responses collected during the ongoing promotion.

Promotion Performance Analytics: Ability to filter promotional data by date range.

Given that the retailer is viewing the dashboard, when they apply filters to check the performance of past promotions, then they must be able to select different date ranges to review historical data.

Promotion Performance Analytics: Immediate alerts for underperforming promotions.

Given that the dashboard is displaying current promotional metrics, when a promotion's performance falls below a predefined threshold, then the system must trigger an alert for the retailer to take action.

Promotion Performance Analytics: Integration with e-commerce platforms for synchronized data.

Given that the retailer is using the dashboard, when promotions run across various e-commerce platforms, then the dashboard must aggregate and display data accurately reflecting all sales channels in real-time.

Post-Promotion Reports

"As a business analyst, I want to receive detailed reports on promotion performance post-campaign so that I can analyze results and prepare for future marketing strategies."

Description

This requirement involves generating comprehensive reports after the conclusion of promotional campaigns, summarizing performance metrics and customer feedback. These reports will provide insights into what worked and what didn’t, allowing retailers to identify trends over time. It will include graphical representations of data for better clarity and an executive summary that highlights key findings. This reporting feature is critical for ongoing improvement and strategic planning for future promotional activities.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retailer, I want to generate a post-promotion report after a seasonal sale to review the effectiveness of the promotions implemented during the event.

Given that the promotional campaign has ended, when I request the post-promotion report, then the system should generate a report that includes key performance metrics, customer feedback, and graphical data representations within 30 seconds.

As a marketing manager, I need access to historical post-promotion reports to analyze trends over multiple campaigns and refine future marketing strategies.

Given that I am logged into the InventaPro platform, when I navigate to the reports section, then I should be able to view a list of available historical post-promotion reports and download them in PDF format.

As a user, I want the post-promotion report to include an executive summary that highlights key findings to quickly assess the overall performance without reviewing all the detailed metrics.

Given that the post-promotion report is generated, when I open the report, then it should contain an executive summary section at the beginning that summarizes the key insights and overall performance of the promotion.

As a retailer, I want to ensure the graphical representations in the post-promotion report are clear and accurately depict the performance metrics to help visualize data trends.

Given that the post-promotion report has been created, when I review the graphical data within the report, then the graphs should be correctly labeled, accurately represent the underlying data, and be visually easy to interpret.

As a business owner, I want the option to schedule automated sending of post-promotion reports to my email to keep track of performance without manually checking the platform.

Given that I have generated a post-promotion report, when I set up a schedule for sending the report to my email, then I should receive the report in my inbox at the specified time without any errors.

Promotion Optimization Recommendations

"As a retail strategist, I want to receive AI-driven recommendations for optimizing promotions so that I can enhance customer engagement and maximize sales during future campaigns."

Description

This requirement will leverage AI to analyze promotion data and provide actionable insights and recommendations for optimizing future campaigns. The system will identify patterns in promotional effectiveness, suggest best practices, and even offer amendments to existing promotions for better results based on historical data. By harnessing machine learning algorithms, retailers can receive tailored suggestions that are data-driven, ensuring continuous improvement of marketing strategies in line with customer preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Promotion Optimization Recommendations for Seasonal Sales Events

Given a set of historical promotion data, when the AI analyzes the data, then it should provide at least three actionable recommendations for optimizing future promotions based on identified patterns.

User Interface for Viewing Recommendations

Given a retailer accesses the promotion performance analytics dashboard, when they navigate to the recommendations section, then the dashboard should display a clear list of personalized optimization suggestions along with their expected impact metrics.

Integration with Existing Promotion Data

Given the promotion optimization recommendations feature is implemented, when a retailer inputs their past promotional data into the system, then the system should successfully integrate and analyze this data within 1 minute without errors.

Feedback Mechanism on Recommendations

Given a retailer receives promotion optimization recommendations, when they implement one of the suggestions, then they should be able to provide feedback on its effectiveness, which is stored in the system for future analysis.

Real-time Analysis of Campaign Performance

Given a current promotional campaign is active, when the system analyzes sales data, then it should update recommendations in real-time based on customer response within 5 minutes of data input.

Actionable Insights Dashboards

Given successful analysis of promotion effectiveness, when a retailer views the insights dashboard, then it should provide at least five key performance indicators (KPIs) related to promotional success, such as conversion rates and customer engagement statistics, in a visual format.

Historical Data Comparison

Given multiple past promotional campaigns, when the retailer requests a comparative analysis, then the system should generate a report highlighting the effectiveness of promotions over time with visual representations like graphs and charts.

Adaptive Restocking Recommendations

Adaptive Restocking Recommendations suggest optimal restocking schedules and quantities based on live sales data and seasonal patterns. This feature ensures that sellers maintain balanced inventory levels, reducing the risk of stockouts or excess inventory during fluctuating seasonal demands.

Requirements

Dynamic Sales Data Analysis

"As a retailer, I want to receive real-time insights into my sales data so that I can make informed decisions on reordering inventory and avoid costly stockouts or excess stock during peak and off-peak seasons."

Description

The Dynamic Sales Data Analysis requirement entails integrating real-time sales data analysis capabilities into InventaPro. This functionality will utilize AI algorithms to assess live sales trends, provide actionable insights, and generate forecasts helping retailers to make informed reordering decisions. By implementing this requirement, InventaPro will enable sellers to react swiftly to sales fluctuations, ultimately reducing the likelihood of stockouts or overstock situations and enhancing overall inventory management efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time sales trend analysis during peak shopping hours.

Given that sales data is being captured in real-time, when a sudden increase in sales is detected during peak hours, then the Adaptive Restocking Recommendations feature should trigger a notification to the retailer suggesting an immediate restock of high-demand items.

Utilization of seasonal patterns to inform restocking decisions.

Given that seasonal sales trends are analyzed, when the system identifies a seasonal pattern in sales data, then it should generate a restocking recommendation two weeks prior to the expected peak sales period based on historical data.

Integration with e-commerce platforms for accurate inventory levels.

Given that InventaPro is integrated with e-commerce platforms, when an online order is placed, then the inventory levels should be updated in real-time to reflect the new stock availability immediately, ensuring accurate restocking recommendations.

Generating forecasts based on historical sales data.

Given that historical sales data is available, when the AI algorithm analyzes the data, then it should produce a sales forecast that predicts monthly sales for the next quarter with at least 85% accuracy.

User interface display of restocking recommendations.

Given that restocking recommendations have been generated, when a retailer logs into the dashboard, then they should see a clearly displayed list of recommended items to restock along with suggested quantities and reorder timings.

Feedback mechanism for retailers on restocking recommendations.

Given that a retailer receives a restocking recommendation, when they action the recommendation, then they should be able to provide feedback on the recommendation's accuracy and effectiveness, which is stored for future algorithm training.

Performance monitoring of AI-driven recommendations.

Given that the AI system has been in use for three months, when performance metrics are analyzed, then the average reduction in stockouts and overstock situations should show at least a 30% improvement compared to the previous quarter.

Seasonal Demand Prediction

"As a retailer, I want to understand the seasonal patterns of my products so that I can stock the right amount of inventory at the right times, ensuring customers find what they need when they shop."

Description

The Seasonal Demand Prediction requirement focuses on developing advanced algorithms that analyze historical sales data and seasonal trends to predict future product demand. This capability will allow InventaPro to advise retailers on optimal stock levels and restocking times, tailored to seasonal fluctuations. By accurately forecasting demand, retailers can improve customer satisfaction by ensuring product availability and effectively managing inventory costs throughout the year, thereby enhancing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer receives seasonal demand predictions for summer products to ensure adequate stock levels before the summer season begins.

Given the retailer inputs sales data from previous summers, when the Seasonal Demand Prediction algorithm processes this data, then it should generate an ordered list of products with recommended stock levels for the upcoming summer.

A retailer utilizes the adaptive restocking recommendations feature to adjust inventory levels based on predicted seasonal demand.

Given the seasonal demand prediction is generated, when the retailer reviews the adaptive restocking recommendations, then they should observe an increase in recommended stock levels for high-demand products and a decrease for low-demand products during peak season.

The retailer analyzes the impact of recommended stock levels on sales during the holiday season.

Given the holiday season begins, when the retailer follows the recommended restocking quantities, then they should experience at least a 20% decrease in stockouts and a 15% increase in sales compared to the previous holiday season.

The algorithm updates recommendations based on real-time sales data during a seasonal promotion period.

Given the real-time sales data shows an unexpected surge in demand for a specific product, when the Seasonal Demand Prediction algorithm recalculates recommendations, then it should alert the retailer within one hour to increase stock levels for that product.

Retailers receive alerts for products at risk of being overstocked as predicted demand decreases.

Given the Seasonal Demand Prediction has indicated lower expected sales for certain products, when these changes are detected, then the retailer should receive an alert recommending a reduction in future orders for those products.

Retailers can view a dashboard summarizing seasonal demand predictions and stock level recommendations.

Given the Seasonal Demand Prediction is complete, when the retailer accesses the dashboard, then they should see a clear summary of predicted demands, suggested stock levels, and highlights of products to watch for seasonal trends.

Retailers assess the accuracy of demand predictions after the seasonal period has concluded.

Given the seasonal period has ended, when the retailer compares actual sales data against predicted sales, then the prediction accuracy should be at least 85% for the top 10 selling products in that season.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts when my inventory is low so that I can reorder supplies promptly and avoid running out of popular products."

Description

The Automated Restocking Alerts requirement will allow InventaPro to send proactive notifications to users when stock levels reach predefined thresholds. This feature will ensure that retailers are alerted in real-time, allowing them to reorder inventory before running out. Implementing this requirement will help maintain optimal stock levels, enhancing sales opportunities and reducing the risk of missed sales due to out-of-stock conditions.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Restocking Alerts for Low Stock Items

Given a product's stock level falls below the predefined threshold, When the stock level is checked, Then a notification is sent to the retailer indicating that the product needs to be restocked.

Automated Restocking Alerts During Seasonal Demand

Given the inventory level of a seasonal product decreases rapidly during a peak season, When the stock level is monitored in real-time, Then an alert is generated if the inventory level reaches the defined threshold before running out.

Automated Notification Delivery to Retailers

Given that the stock level falls below a predefined threshold, When the alert is triggered, Then the notification must be delivered via email and in-app messaging to ensure the retailer receives it promptly.

Customization of Alert Thresholds by Retailers

Given that a retailer wants to set specific alert thresholds for different products, When the retailer adjusts the settings for a product, Then the system must update the thresholds accordingly and generate alerts as per the new settings.

Monitoring Historical Alert Effectiveness

Given the system has been live for a period, When analyzing historical data, Then at least 90% of alerts should correspond to out-of-stock events that the retailer faced.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms for Alert Synchronization

Given that InventaPro is integrated with an e-commerce platform, When stock level alerts are generated, Then alerts must synchronize with the e-commerce platform to prevent listing of out-of-stock items.

Customizable Restocking Strategies

"As a retailer, I want to customize my restocking strategies according to my specific inventory needs and sales trends, so that I can optimize my restocking processes accordingly."

Description

The Customizable Restocking Strategies requirement will empower retailers to tailor restocking recommendations based on their unique business models, sales trends, and inventory policies. This feature will provide users with the flexibility to set their criteria for restocking alerts, allowing businesses to adapt their inventory control methods to fit their specific needs. This customization will lead to improved efficiency and better alignment with each retailer’s operational workflow.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer customizes restocking strategies based on unique sales trends and inventory policies.

Given a retailer with unique sales trends, when they access the customizable restocking strategies feature and set their criteria, then the system should save this configuration and apply it to future restocking alerts.

Retailer receives restocking alerts based on their personalized settings.

Given a retailer has set specific restocking criteria, when the inventory level falls below the defined threshold, then the system should trigger an alert to notify the retailer of the need to restock.

Retailer tests the responsiveness of the restocking recommendations after making adjustments.

Given a retailer adjusts their restocking settings, when the system recalculates the recommendations based on live sales data, then the updated recommendations should reflect in the dashboard within 5 minutes.

Retailer evaluates the effectiveness of customizable restocking strategies over a sales period.

Given a retailer has implemented their custom restocking strategies, when the sales data is analyzed after a month, then inventory levels should demonstrate improved balance, indicated by a reduction in both stockouts and overstock instances by at least 20%.

Retailer integrates seasonal patterns into restocking strategies.

Given a retailer identifies seasonal sales trends, when they input these patterns into the customizable strategies, then the system should automatically adjust the restocking recommendations accordingly to reflect the updated seasonal demand.

Retailer utilizes the restocking alert report to optimize inventory decisions.

Given a retailer accesses the restocking alert report, when they analyze the data, then the report should provide insights on past alerts and suggestion improvements to optimize future restocking strategies.

Retailer shares customized restocking settings with team members for collaboration.

Given a retailer customizes their restocking strategies, when they select the option to share this information, then other team members should receive access to view and adjust these settings as needed.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a retailer, I want InventaPro to sync with my e-commerce platforms so that I can manage my inventory across all my sales channels in real-time and maintain accurate stock levels."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement ensures that InventaPro can seamlessly connect with major e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon. This integration will allow for real-time synchronization of online and offline sales data, making it easier for retailers to manage their inventory across different sales channels effectively. Ensuring that data flows seamlessly between platforms is crucial for accurate forecasting and streamlined operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Shopify platform

Given that the retailer has an active Shopify account, when I connect InventaPro to Shopify, then sales data from Shopify should be synchronized in real-time, reflecting any changes made in either platform within a 5-minute interval.

Integration with WooCommerce platform

Given that the retailer has an active WooCommerce account, when I connect InventaPro to WooCommerce, then product inventory levels should be updated in InventaPro immediately after a sale occurs on the WooCommerce platform.

Integration with Amazon platform

Given that the retailer has an active Amazon Seller account, when I connect InventaPro to Amazon, then the sales data from Amazon should be consolidated in InventaPro, allowing for accurate reporting and forecasting without manual entry.

Real-time data synchronization

Given that integrations with Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon are established, when a product is sold on any platform, then the inventory levels in InventaPro should reflect the sale within 5 minutes, maintaining accuracy across all channels.

Error handling and notifications

Given that there is a failure in data synchronization, when the connection to any e-commerce platform encounters an error, then InventaPro should send an immediate notification to the retailer and log the error in the system for further review.

User access control for integration settings

Given that a retailer wants to manage integration settings, when accessing the integration management section, then I should see options to connect or disconnect each e-commerce platform and set user permissions for access, ensuring data security.

Performance monitoring of integrations

Given that InventaPro is integrated with e-commerce platforms, when accessing the performance monitoring dashboard, then I should see metrics on data synchronization success rates, average sync times, and any errors encountered, allowing for quick troubleshooting.

Cross-Seasonal Insights

Cross-Seasonal Insights provide analysis on how products performed in prior seasons to help secure better outcomes in the future. By understanding long-term purchase behaviors and trends, Seasonal Sellers can create more effective inventory and marketing strategies tailored to each upcoming season.

Requirements

Historical Sales Analysis

"As a seasonal retailer, I want to analyze past sales data for my products so that I can identify trends and make better inventory decisions for the upcoming season."

Description

The Historical Sales Analysis requirement involves the development of a feature that analyzes past sales data to identify trends and patterns specific to products sold in each season. This analysis will utilize advanced analytical techniques, integrating AI algorithms to parse through sales data and generate actionable insights that help retailers make informed inventory decisions. By examining previous seasonal sales performance, retailers can proactively adjust their stock levels, potentially increasing their sales efficiency, minimizing excess inventory, and avoiding stockouts. This feature will be seamlessly integrated into the existing InventaPro dashboard, enabling users to easily access and interpret their sales history relevant to cross-seasonal trends, which ultimately helps them enhance their strategy for upcoming selling periods.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Historical Sales Analysis feature to view sales data from the previous winter season.

Given the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Historical Sales Analysis section and select the winter season, then the system displays a comprehensive report of sales data including total units sold, revenue, and stock levels for each product during the previous winter season.

User utilizes the AI-driven insights to make inventory decisions for the upcoming spring season.

Given the user has accessed the Historical Sales Analysis, when they review the AI-generated insights for spring season trends, then the system provides actionable recommendations for stock adjustments, including suggested quantities and products to focus on based on historical data.

User wants to compare sales trends between two consecutive seasons to evaluate performance changes.

Given the user is in the Historical Sales Analysis section, when they select two seasons to compare, then the system generates a side-by-side analysis including key metrics such as average sales, inventory turnover, and customer feedback for both seasons.

User checks the functionality of exporting historical sales data for further analysis.

Given the user is on the Historical Sales Analysis page, when they click on the 'Export' button, then the system successfully generates a downloadable CSV file containing all relevant historical sales data for the selected season.

User expects to receive a notification for significant changes in sales patterns based on the historical analysis.

Given the user has opted in for notifications, when the Historical Sales Analysis detects a significant deviation in sales trends compared to the previous year, then the user receives an alert with details of the changes and suggested actions.

User evaluates the user interface and overall experience of the Historical Sales Analysis feature.

Given the user is accessing the Historical Sales Analysis feature for the first time, when they navigate through the interface, then they should find it intuitive and user-friendly, requiring no training to interpret the data provided.

Seasonal Demand Forecasting

"As a retailer, I want to forecast seasonal demand for my products so that I can optimize inventory levels and prevent stockouts during peak seasons."

Description

The Seasonal Demand Forecasting requirement encompasses the ability to predict future product demand based on historical seasonal data. This capability will be powered by machine learning algorithms that analyze variations in sales across different seasons, factoring in multiple variables like promotions, holidays, and market conditions. By deploying this forecasting tool, retailers can make data-driven decisions about inventory purchases, optimize stock availability, and improve service levels to meet customer demand without overstocking. The feature will be integrated into InventaPro's daily operational reminders, helping retailers to stay prepared for peak sales times and adjust supply accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Scenario for analyzing historical sales data to forecast demand for the upcoming summer season using machine learning algorithms.

Given that the retailer has historical sales data for the previous summer, When the Seasonal Demand Forecasting tool is activated, Then it should provide a forecast of demand for each product category, taking into account any promotions and holidays.

Scenario where a retailer integrates Seasonal Demand Forecasting into the daily operational reminders of InventaPro.

Given that the Seasonal Demand Forecasting tool has been integrated into InventaPro, When the daily reminder is triggered, Then it should display the expected seasonal demand forecasts and highlight any critical inventory levels that need immediate attention.

Scenario for testing the accuracy of demand predictions against actual sales data after the season has ended.

Given that the season has concluded, When the actual sales data is compared with the Seasonal Demand Forecasting predictions, Then the forecasting accuracy should be within a defined threshold (e.g., 10% variance).

Scenario for evaluating the usability of the Seasonal Demand Forecasting feature in helping retailers make inventory decisions.

Given a retailer using InventaPro, When they access the Seasonal Demand Forecasting tool, Then they should be able to easily interpret the provided forecasts and generate actionable inventory purchase recommendations within 5 minutes.

Scenario for incorporating external market conditions into the seasonal demand forecasting model.

Given that external market conditions (such as economic indicators or competition trends) have been identified, When the forecasting model is updated, Then the predictions should reflect these factors appropriately in the demand forecasts provided.

Scenario for integrating the forecasting tool with popular e-commerce platforms to sync inventory levels accurately.

Given that the Seasonal Demand Forecasting tool has been properly linked with an e-commerce platform, When a peak sales period is anticipated, Then the inventory levels for products should automatically adjust based on the forecasted demand and be reflected in real time in both InventaPro and the e-commerce dashboard.

Cross-Seasonal Inventory Optimization

"As a retailer, I want to receive recommendations for optimal inventory levels across seasons so that I can reduce costs while maximizing sales projections."

Description

The Cross-Seasonal Inventory Optimization requirement aims to create a comprehensive tool that analyzes product performance across different seasons and suggests optimal inventory levels for each season. This tool will leverage insights derived from the Historical Sales Analysis and Seasonal Demand Forecasting to recommend ideal stock quantities that align with expected demand fluctuations. By optimizing inventory levels based on these insights, retailers can minimize carrying costs and maximize revenue potential by ensuring that the right products are available at the right times. The feature will be presented through easy-to-understand visual dashboards and reports within InventaPro, offering retailers actionable insights at a glance.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Cross-Seasonal Insights dashboard to analyze inventory levels from past seasons before planning the upcoming season's stock.

Given the user accesses the Cross-Seasonal Insights dashboard, when they select a previous season, then the dashboard must display the accurate sales data, stock levels, and performance metrics for the selected products during that season.

Retailer generates a report based on Cross-Seasonal Inventory Optimization to adjust stock levels for the upcoming season.

Given the retailer requests a report for upcoming season inventory, when the report is generated, then it must include recommended stock levels, historical stock patterns, and expected demand fluctuations for each product category.

User interacts with the inventory optimization tool to receive suggestions on ideal stock quantities for their seasonal products.

Given the user inputs their seasonal product list into the inventory optimization tool, when they initiate the analysis, then the tool must provide tailored stock level recommendations based on historical sales and seasonal demand forecasting.

Retailer compares current inventory levels with the recommendations from the Cross-Seasonal Inventory Optimization tool.

Given the retailer accesses their current inventory, when they view the comparison with the recommended stock levels, then the system must highlight discrepancies and suggest necessary adjustments to avoid overstock or stockouts.

User receives an alert about significant changes in purchasing trends indicated by Cross-Seasonal Insights.

Given the system analyzes current sales data and historical patterns, when there is a significant change in purchasing trends, then the user must receive an alert with actionable insights and recommendations to adjust inventory.

Retailer visually analyzes cross-seasonal performance through interactive graphs on the dashboard.

Given the retailer accesses the interactive dashboard, when they view cross-seasonal performance graphs, then the graphs must accurately represent sales trends, highlighted peaks, and troughs for their products over several seasons.

User navigates through different seasonal analysis for better marketing strategy formulation.

Given the user is on the Cross-Seasonal Insights section, when they switch between different seasonal analyses, then the application must maintain the context and allow for seamless comparisons between seasons' performance metrics.

Marketing Strategy Recommendations

"As a seasonal seller, I want tailored marketing recommendations based on past performance so that I can engage my customers effectively and increase sales during peak seasons."

Description

The Marketing Strategy Recommendations requirement focuses on generating tailored marketing strategies based on product performance data collected from previous seasons. By analyzing marketing efforts alongside inventory performance, this feature will leverage AI to offer retailers specific and actionable recommendations for how to effectively market their products during upcoming seasons, enhancing customer engagement and sales potential. Integration into the InventaPro platform will allow for real-time updates to marketing strategies, ensuring that retailers can respond dynamically to market changes.

Acceptance Criteria

Retailer analyzes past seasonal product performance to prepare marketing strategies for an upcoming holiday season.

Given a retailer has access to previous season's product performance data, when they use the Marketing Strategy Recommendations feature, then they should receive at least three tailored marketing strategies based on analyzed trends and inventory performance.

Retailer integrates updated marketing strategies into their e-commerce platform to enhance promotional efforts.

Given the retailer has implemented the recommendations from the Marketing Strategy Recommendations, when they update their marketing campaigns in the e-commerce platform, then the campaigns should reflect the new strategies within 10 minutes of integration.

Retailer tracks the effectiveness of implemented marketing strategies post-launch.

Given the retailer has launched the new marketing strategies, when they access the performance dashboard, then they should see a 15% increase in customer engagement metrics within 2 weeks of the campaign start date.

Retailer wants to view historical data to compare the effectiveness of different marketing strategies across seasons.

Given the retailer requests historical marketing performance data, when they access the analytics section, then they should be able to view comparative reports of marketing strategies used in the last three seasons.

Retailer seeks to adjust their marketing strategies based on real-time sales data during the current season.

Given the retailer is using InventaPro's dashboard during the current season, when they encounter a significant drop in sales for a product, then they should receive an automated alert recommending adjustments to the marketing strategy for that product.

Retailer evaluates the AI recommendations provided by the Marketing Strategy Recommendations feature.

Given the retailer receives marketing strategy recommendations, when they rate the effectiveness of these recommendations on a scale of 1 to 5, then at least 70% of the recommendations should receive a rating of 4 or higher within the first two weeks of use.

Performance Reporting Dashboard

"As a retailer, I want a performance reporting dashboard that shows me real-time metrics on my seasonal inventory performance so that I can make timely decisions to enhance my operations."

Description

The Performance Reporting Dashboard requirement is designed to provide retailers with a real-time overview of their inventory performance relative to seasonal trends and demands. This dashboard will consolidate data from the Historical Sales Analysis, Seasonal Demand Forecasting, and Marketing Strategy Recommendations, visually presenting it in an easily understandable format. Key metrics such as inventory turnover rates, seasonal sales growth, and marketing campaign effectiveness will be included, enabling retailers to make informed decisions quickly and adjust their strategies as necessary. This feature is crucial for helping retailers assess their performance continuously and adapt their operations immediately to ongoing trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the Performance Reporting Dashboard from the main user interface.

Given I am a retailer logged into InventaPro, When I navigate to the Performance Reporting Dashboard, Then I should see a consolidated view of inventory performance metrics relative to seasonal trends.

Viewing real-time inventory performance metrics on the dashboard.

Given I am viewing the Performance Reporting Dashboard, When I check the dashboard, Then I should be able to see real-time metrics displayed for inventory turnover rates, seasonal sales growth, and marketing campaign effectiveness.

Customizing timeframes for performance reporting on the dashboard.

Given I am accessing the Performance Reporting Dashboard, When I select a custom date range for report generation, Then the dashboard should update to display metrics only for that specified timeframe.

Downloading performance reports from the dashboard.

Given I am on the Performance Reporting Dashboard, When I request to download the performance report, Then I should receive a CSV file containing all relevant metrics for the selected period.

Setting alerts for performance metrics that fall below a defined threshold.

Given I am viewing the Performance Reporting Dashboard, When I configure alert settings for specific metrics, Then I should receive notifications if any metrics fall below the defined thresholds.

Integrating seasonal performance insights with e-commerce platforms.

Given I have access to the Performance Reporting Dashboard, When I link the dashboard to my e-commerce account, Then seasonal performance insights should automatically synchronize to reflect on the e-commerce platform.

Barcode Scanning

The Barcode Scanning feature enables Small Business Owners to quickly and accurately add or update inventory items by scanning product barcodes using their smartphone cameras. This feature significantly reduces the time spent on manual entry, minimizes errors, and enhances inventory accuracy, allowing users to efficiently manage stock levels and streamline their operations.

Requirements

Barcode Scanning Integration

"As a small business owner, I want to quickly add or update inventory items by scanning barcodes using my smartphone so that I can save time and reduce errors in manual data entry."

Description

The Barcode Scanning Integration requirement involves enhancing the existing inventory management system to allow small business owners to use their smartphone cameras to scan product barcodes effortlessly. This function should be capable of recognizing various barcode formats and translating that data into the inventory system, allowing for quicker updates and checks on stock levels. By reducing manual entry errors and saving time, this integration aims to tighten the accuracy of the inventory data and improve overall operational efficiency. Additionally, it should provide feedback on successful scans and highlight any discrepancies in inventory levels, reinforcing real-time data accuracy within the system.

Acceptance Criteria

Barcode scanning for adding new inventory items using a smartphone camera.

Given a user has the InventaPro app open, when they scan a valid product barcode, then the system should add the corresponding item to the inventory with accurate details reflected in the dashboard.

Barcode scanning for updating existing inventory levels.

Given a user has the InventaPro app open, when they scan a barcode for an item that already exists in the inventory, then the system should prompt the user to enter the new quantity and update the inventory accordingly.

Feedback mechanism for successful barcode scans.

Given a user scans a barcode, when the scan is successful, then the system should provide immediate visual and audio feedback confirming the successful scan, and the item should appear in the recently accessed inventory list.

Handling discrepancies in inventory levels during barcode scanning.

Given a user scans a barcode and the scanned quantity differs from the inventory records, when prompted, then the user should receive an alert detailing the discrepancy and options to resolve it (adjust quantity or ignore).

Recognition of multiple barcode formats.

Given a user scans a barcode, when the barcode format is compatible, then the system should accurately read and integrate data from various barcode formats including UPC, EAN, and QR codes into the inventory system.

User interface for barcode scanning feature.

Given the user is on the inventory management screen, when they access the barcode scanning feature, then the interface should be intuitive with clear instructions, ensuring users of all tech levels can utilize the function without confusion.

Real-Time Inventory Updates

"As a small business owner, I want my inventory to be updated in real-time after scanning barcodes so that I can manage stock levels effectively and avoid running out of products."

Description

The Real-Time Inventory Updates requirement ensures that any changes made via barcode scanning are reflected in the inventory system instantly. This functionality is crucial for maintaining up-to-date stock levels and avoiding overstock or stockout situations. The requirement should encompass a seamless connection between the scanning feature and the inventory database that supports automatic updates without manual intervention. Additionally, it should include notifications for stock level changes, enabling small business owners to respond proactively to inventory fluctuations. This enhances decision-making based on accurate, real-time data.

Acceptance Criteria

Barcode Scanning of Inventory Items

Given the user has a smartphone with the InventaPro app open, When they scan a product barcode, Then the system should immediately update the inventory database with the new stock level in real-time.

Notification of Stock Level Changes

Given an inventory item has been updated through barcode scanning, When the stock level changes exceed the predefined thresholds, Then the system should send a notification to the user regarding the stock level change.

Accuracy of Scanned Data

Given the user scans multiple items with the barcode scanning feature, When the data is submitted to the inventory database, Then the system should confirm that all scanned items are accurately recorded without discrepancies.

Automatic Inventory Synchronization

Given inventory changes are made via barcode scanning, When the user checks the inventory dashboard, Then the current stock levels should reflect the most recent changes made by scanning.

Error Handling for Invalid Barcodes

Given a user scans an invalid barcode, When the scan is processed, Then the system should alert the user with an error message without making any changes to the inventory.

Performance under Load

Given multiple users are simultaneously scanning barcodes, When inventory updates are made, Then the system should update the inventory in real-time without performance degradation or delays.

User Interface for Barcode Scanning Feedback

Given a successful scan is completed, When the inventory is updated, Then the user should see a confirmation message on the screen indicating the success of the operation.

User-Friendly Scanning Interface

"As a new user, I want a simple and intuitive scanning interface so that I can quickly learn how to use the barcode scanning feature without any confusion."

Description

The User-Friendly Scanning Interface requirement focuses on the design and usability of the scanning feature within the InventaPro mobile application. It should provide an intuitive user experience that enables users to initiate a scan with minimal steps, visualize the scanning process, and receive clear feedback upon completion. This feature should also incorporate a guided tutorial for first-time users to promote ease of use and efficient learning. Ensuring the interface is visually appealing and straightforward will drastically enhance user adoption and satisfaction, paving the way for effective inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Scanning Inventory Items in a Retail Store

Given the user is on the scanning interface, when they position the smartphone camera over a product barcode and the barcode is successfully scanned, then the application should display a confirmation message that includes the product name and current stock level, and the scanned item should be added to the inventory list.

First-Time User Experience When Scanning

Given a first-time user accesses the scanning feature, when they open the interface, then they should see a guided tutorial that describes how to initiate a scan and what feedback to expect post-scan, ensuring they can successfully navigate the feature.

Error Handling During Scanning Process

Given the user attempts to scan a barcode that is not recognized, when the scan fails, then the application should provide a clear error message and an option to retry scanning or enter the product information manually.

Visual Feedback During Scanning

Given the user is scanning a barcode, when the camera successfully detects the barcode, then the interface should provide visual feedback (such as a green frame) and an audible confirmation sound to indicate a successful scan.

Accessibility Features in Scanning Interface

Given the user has enabled accessibility features on their device, when they use the scanning interface, then all elements should be navigable via voice commands, and auditory confirmation should be provided upon successful scan.

Performance of Scanning Interface

Given the user tries to scan a barcode in a low-light environment, when they attempt to scan, then the application should still be able to recognize and confirm the scan within 3 seconds, maintaining high performance.

Usability Testing Feedback Incorporation

Given usability tests have been conducted with at least five different users, when feedback is collected, then all identified pain points must be addressed in the next iteration of the scanning interface design before launch.

Barcode Format Support

"As a product manager, I want the barcode scanning feature to support various barcode formats so that I can manage and categorize all types of inventory items effectively."

Description

The Barcode Format Support requirement involves implementing recognition capabilities for a variety of barcode formats, including UPC, EAN, and QR codes. This ensures versatility and wider usability of the scanning feature across different product types. The development needs to accommodate the decoding of these formats accurately while maintaining high performance in scanning speed. Supporting multiple barcode formats not only broadens the user base of InventaPro but also enhances its functionality for retailers who stock diverse products, ultimately leading to improved customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to scan UPC barcodes at checkout quickly to add items to my inventory, ensuring all products are accounted for without manual entry.

Given the barcode scanner is activated, when I scan a valid UPC barcode, then the corresponding inventory item should be added to the database without errors.

As a warehouse staff member, I need to quickly scan EAN codes on incoming shipments to ensure that all items received are correctly logged into the system.

Given the barcode scanner is operational, when I scan a valid EAN code, then the item should show as added in the inventory management system within 2 seconds.

As a store manager, I want to use QR codes on promotional items to update their inventory counts and track sales accurately at the end of a season.

Given the scanner is enabled, when I scan a valid QR code associated with an item, then the inventory count for that item should be updated automatically without manual intervention.

As a retailer, I want to ensure that if a scanned barcode does not display a corresponding item in the inventory system, I can receive a clear error message.

Given I scan a barcode with no corresponding item in the system, then an error message stating 'Item not found' should be displayed immediately.

As a retail employee, I need to scan multiple barcodes in quick succession during a stock audit to check for discrepancies in inventory levels.

Given the scanner is ready, when I scan multiple valid barcodes continuously, then all items should be processed and updated in real-time without any data loss.

As an inventory manager, I want to be able to scan barcodes in low light conditions to ensure that scanning is still effective in any environment.

Given the low light mode is activated, when I scan a valid barcode in a dark environment, then the item should still be recognized and logged correctly.

Scanning Feedback Mechanism

"As a frequent user, I want to receive instant feedback from the scanning feature so that I can know right away if a scan was successful or if I need to try again."

Description

The Scanning Feedback Mechanism requirement is designed to provide users with immediate confirmation of successful scans along with essential details regarding the inventory item scanned. After each scan, users should receive visual or audio alerts about the scan status, acknowledging whether the action was successful or if there were any errors. This feature enhances user confidence in the feature's accuracy and usability, ensuring that they can trust the system for effective inventory management. The feedback mechanism should also log scan history for future reference, supporting analytic capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria

User scans a barcode of a new inventory item using the InventaPro mobile app, expecting immediate feedback regarding the scan's success or failure.

Given that the user scans a valid barcode, When the scan is successful, Then the user receives a visual confirmation and audio alert indicating a successful scan along with the item details displayed on the screen.

A user scans a barcode that does not exist in the inventory database, expecting an error message.

Given that the user scans an invalid barcode, When the scan fails, Then the user receives a visual error notification with audio alert indicating a scan failure and a message stating 'Item not found' is displayed.

A user who has recently scanned multiple items wants to check the scan history for verification and analytics.

Given that scans have been performed, When the user requests to view scan history, Then the application displays a chronological list of all recent scans with timestamps and item details, and the history is logged accurately.

A user scans a barcode for an item that is already in inventory to confirm the item details and ensure accuracy of stock levels.

Given that the user scans an existing barcode in the inventory, When the scan is successful, Then the user receives a confirmation message with the item's current stock level and other details displayed clearly on the screen and an audio alert confirming the successful scan.

The user scans an inventory item and expects the application to log the scan event for future reference and analytics.

Given that the user scans an item, When the scan is completed, Then the scan event is successfully logged in the system with the associated user ID, timestamp, and item details for future reporting purposes.

A user is working in a noisy environment and needs to ensure the audio alerts are sufficient to be heard over ambient noise.

Given that the user is in a noisy environment, When an item is scanned, Then the audio alert should play at a volume level that is clearly audible above ambient noise and has a distinct tone for success and failure alerts.

After scanning, a user wants to quickly perform another scan without delay or lag in the application response.

Given that a scan has just been completed, When the user taps to scan another item, Then the application should be immediately ready for the next scan without any noticeable lag or delay in responsiveness.

Instant Stock Alerts

Instant Stock Alerts notify Small Business Owners in real-time when inventory levels drop below predefined thresholds. This proactive feature helps users avoid stockouts by alerting them to place orders for replenishment before running out of essential items, ensuring they can meet customer demand consistently.

Requirements

Real-time Notification System

"As a small business owner, I want to receive instant notifications when my inventory levels drop below a specific threshold so that I can reorder items in time and avoid disappointing my customers with stockouts."

Description

The Instant Stock Alerts feature requires a real-time notification system that monitors inventory levels continuously and triggers alerts to users when stock levels fall below the predefined thresholds. This system should integrate seamlessly with InventaPro's existing inventory management tools, allowing small business owners to receive notifications via mobile alerts, emails, or dashboard prompts. The functionality must accommodate customizable threshold settings for various products, ensuring users can tailor alerts according to their specific inventory needs. The system's reliability and speed are critical, as timely alerts prevent stockouts and enable efficient inventory management, ultimately enhancing customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time notification of stock levels below threshold for a product during regular business operations.

Given the stock level for a product is monitored in real-time, when the stock level drops below the predefined threshold, then the system should send an immediate alert via mobile notification to the user.

Customization of stock level thresholds for individual products by the user.

Given a user accesses the threshold settings for a product, when they input a new threshold value and save it, then the system should update the threshold and confirm the change with a success message.

Integration of notification delivery methods for stock alerts within the system.

Given a user has selected their preferred notification methods (mobile, email, dashboard), when the stock level falls below the predefined threshold, then the system should trigger alerts across all selected methods without delay.

Validation of the setup process for the notification system within InventaPro.

Given a new user is setting up the Instant Stock Alerts feature for the first time, when they complete the setup process, then the system should provide a confirmation that the feature is enabled and operational.

Monitoring the reliability and speed of stock alert notifications in real-time.

Given the system is actively monitoring stock levels, when stock levels drop below the threshold, then alerts must be received within 60 seconds of the threshold breach in at least 95% of instances.

User feedback on alert effectiveness and relevance after implementation.

Given users have been receiving stock alerts for one month, when they are surveyed about the effectiveness of the alerts, then at least 80% of users should report that the alerts were timely and relevant to their inventory management needs.

Customizable Alert Thresholds

"As a small business owner, I want to set my own inventory thresholds for alerts so that I can manage my stock levels according to my unique business needs and supplier timelines."

Description

To cater to the diverse inventory needs of small retailers, the Instant Stock Alerts feature must allow users to set customizable alert thresholds for each product. This requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface within the InventaPro dashboard where users can modify the minimum stock levels for each item. This capability helps ensure that users can set realistic alert triggers based on the specifics of their product demand, supplier lead times, and sales patterns. Customizable thresholds enhance the utility of the alert system and enable businesses to manage inventory proactively, preventing overstock and stockouts effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets customizable alert thresholds for a product in the InventaPro dashboard.

Given a user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Instant Stock Alerts section, then they should see an option to modify the alert threshold for each product individually.

User saves a new alert threshold for a product in the InventaPro dashboard.

Given a user sets a new alert threshold for a product, when they click the 'Save' button, then the new threshold should be saved and reflected in the dashboard immediately.

User receives a notification when inventory drops below the customized threshold.

Given a product's inventory has dropped below the user's set alert threshold, when the stock level is updated, then the user receives a real-time notification.

User attempts to set an invalid alert threshold (negative or zero).

Given a user tries to set an alert threshold that is negative or zero, when they attempt to save it, then an error message should be displayed indicating that the threshold must be a positive number.

User updates an existing alert threshold for a product.

Given a user has previously set an alert threshold for a product, when they change the threshold value and click 'Update', then the new value should replace the old one and be saved correctly.

User views a summary of all customizable alert thresholds for their products.

Given a user is on the Instant Stock Alerts page, when they request a summary view, then they should see a list of all products along with their respective alert thresholds clearly displayed.

User accesses help documentation on setting customizable alert thresholds.

Given a user is unsure how to set customizable alert thresholds, when they click on the help icon, then they should be directed to a detailed help page explaining the process.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a small business owner, I want my stock alert system to sync with my e-commerce platforms to ensure I never run out of stock both online and offline, allowing for seamless sales operations."

Description

The Instant Stock Alerts feature should integrate with popular e-commerce platforms that the small retailers use for online sales. This requirement includes creating connections to APIs of platforms like Shopify, WooCommerce, and others, enabling the Instant Stock Alerts to reflect real-time changes in inventory levels based on online sales transactions. By maintaining accurate inventory levels across all sales channels, small business owners can prevent stockouts in both their online and offline operations. Integration is essential for creating a unified inventory management experience and providing users with a holistic perspective of their stock status.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Shopify API for Instant Stock Alerts

Given that the retailer has connected their Shopify account, when the inventory level of any product drops below the predefined threshold, then the system should trigger an instant stock alert to the retailer's dashboard and send an email notification.

Integration with WooCommerce for Real-Time Inventory Updates

Given that the retailer sells on WooCommerce, when a product is sold, then the system should update the inventory levels in InventaPro within 5 minutes and notify the user if the updated levels fall below the threshold.

Notification Delivery for Online Orders

Given that an online order is placed that reduces stock levels, when inventory drops below the defined threshold, then the Instant Stock Alert notification must be sent within 2 minutes to the retailer's mobile app.

Cross-Platform Inventory Synchronization

Given that the retailer uses both online and offline sales channels, when stock is sold either online or in-store, then the system must reflect the updated inventory levels across all connected platforms within 5 minutes.

User Preferences for Alert Settings

Given that the user can customize alert settings, when the user sets a threshold for stock alerts, then the system must allow changes to these settings and save them without error.

Dashboard Display of Stock Levels

Given that the retailer is logged into InventaPro, when viewing the Instant Stock Alerts dashboard, then all product inventory levels displayed must accurately reflect the current stock levels from connected e-commerce platforms.

Error Handling for API Connectivity Issues

Given potential connectivity issues with e-commerce platforms, when the Instant Stock Alerts system encounters an API error, then an error notification must be logged, and the user should receive an alert within 10 minutes indicating the issue.

User-friendly Notification Preferences

"As a small business owner, I want to customize how I receive stock alerts so that I can ensure I am notified in ways that suit my schedule and preferences, guaranteeing I don't miss important alerts."

Description

The system should provide users with customizable notification preferences, allowing them to choose how and when they receive stock alerts. This requirement entails developing settings within the user profile where small business owners can select preferred notification methods such as push notifications, email alerts, or in-app messages. Additionally, users should be able to set specific times for alerts, ensuring they receive notifications during business hours or at times that are most convenient for them. This personalization enhances user experience and ensures that critical alerts are attended to promptly.

Acceptance Criteria

User Configures Notification Preferences in Profile Settings

Given a user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to notification preferences in their profile settings, then they should be able to select at least one notification method (push, email, in-app).

User Sets Alert Timing for Stock Notifications

Given a user is on the notification settings page, when they choose to set specific times for receiving alerts, then they should be able to select desired times within a 24-hour format and see a confirmation message for their selection.

User Receives Push Notification for Low Stock

Given a user has enabled push notifications and set an alert threshold for an item, when the inventory for that item drops below the set threshold, then the user should receive a push notification on their mobile device immediately.

User Receives Email Alerts According to Preferences

Given a user has selected email alerts for stock notifications, when an item's stock level falls below the defined threshold, then the user should receive an email alert with details about the item and current stock level.

User Updates Notification Preferences Successfully

Given a user has previously set notification preferences, when they update their preference to a new notification method or timing, then the system should save the changes and reflect the updated preferences in their profile settings without errors.

User Receives In-App Notifications During Set Business Hours

Given a user has configured their in-app notification preference to only alert them during specific business hours, when stock levels drop during that time, then they should receive an in-app alert notification as configured.

Historical Inventory Data Insights

"As a small business owner, I want access to historical inventory data so that I can analyze my stock trends, optimize my alert settings, and make better inventory decisions based on past performance."

Description

To enhance decision-making, the Instant Stock Alerts feature should include historical inventory data insights that allow users to analyze past sales trends and inventory levels. This requirement involves implementing data analytics tools within the dashboard, providing users with visualizations of stock levels over time, sales trends, and alert occurrences. By accessing these insights, small business owners can make informed decisions regarding how to adjust their inventory thresholds and optimize orders based on customer demand patterns. Integration with existing sales and inventory data will be necessary to provide comprehensive analytics and reporting.

Acceptance Criteria

User views historical inventory data on the dashboard to make purchasing decisions.

Given a user has access to the dashboard, when they select the historical inventory data option, then they should see visualizations of past sales trends and inventory levels for at least the last 12 months.

User receives instant stock alerts based on historical data insights.

Given a user has set a stock threshold for an item, when the inventory level drops below this threshold, then the user receives a real-time notification via email and the app.

User analyzes trends in stockout occurrences to adjust thresholds.

Given the user has accessed the historical data insights, when they review stockout occurrences over time, then they should be able to identify patterns and adjust their inventory thresholds accordingly.

User integrates historical sales data with current inventory levels.

Given the user inputs their existing sales data into the system, when the data is processed, then the dashboard should display integrated insights between historical sales and current inventory levels.

User customizes the notification settings for stock alerts.

Given the user is in the settings menu, when they configure their notification preferences, then they should be able to choose the method and frequency of stock alerts (e.g., email, app notification, daily summary).

User generates a report on inventory performance based on historical data.

Given a user selects the reporting feature, when they request an inventory performance report, then the system should generate a report that includes visual charts on stock levels, sales trends, and alert history for the past quarter.

Order Management Dashboard

The Order Management Dashboard provides Small Business Owners with a comprehensive overview of their open orders, pending shipments, and delivery statuses, all within the mobile app. This feature centralizes order processing, allowing users to track purchase orders and manage supplier communications effectively, thereby enhancing overall inventory efficiency.

Requirements

Real-Time Order Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want to track the status of my orders in real time so that I can provide accurate updates to my customers and ensure timely deliveries."

Description

The Real-Time Order Tracking feature provides users with precise updates on the status of their orders at every stage of the shipment process. This functionality empowers small business owners to monitor order progress in real time through the Order Management Dashboard, allowing them to provide customers with timely updates and enhance satisfaction. By integrating GPS tracking and notifications into the system, users can prevent delays and improve communication with customers, contributing to a more efficient operation and better customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates an order from the mobile app and wants to track its status in real-time through the Order Management Dashboard.

Given the user has an active order, when they access the Order Management Dashboard, then they should see the current status of the order, including 'Pending', 'Shipped', 'In Transit', or 'Delivered'.

User receives a notification when their order status changes during the shipping process after placing an order through the mobile app.

Given an order status change occurs, when the status updates, then the user should receive a push notification alerting them of the change and the new status of the order within 5 minutes.

User accesses the GPS tracking link in the Order Management Dashboard to view their order's location during transit.

Given the user is tracking a shipped order, when they click on the GPS tracking link provided in the Order Management Dashboard, then they should see a live map showing the current location of the shipment and estimated delivery time.

User wants to check the delivery status of multiple orders at once in the Order Management Dashboard.

Given the user has multiple ongoing orders, when they access the Order Management Dashboard, then they should see a consolidated view of all orders with their respective statuses and delivery estimates in a tabular format.

User encounters a delayed order and attempts to contact customer support from the Order Management Dashboard for assistance.

Given a user has a delayed order, when they click on the 'Contact Support' option within the Order Management Dashboard, then they should be able to initiate a chat or send a support request directly related to their order within the app.

Automated Supplier Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want to automatically notify my suppliers about order statuses so that I can reduce manual follow-ups and improve communication efficiency."

Description

This requirement involves the development of an Automated Supplier Notifications system that alerts suppliers about order statuses, enabling seamless communication and timely updates. This feature will help streamline the ordering process by automatically notifying suppliers when orders are placed, shipped, or require attention. The automation of this communication reduces manual errors and enhances supplier relationships, ultimately improving inventory management and ensuring timely supply chain operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier receives automated notifications for new orders.

Given a new order is placed, when the order is confirmed, then the supplier should receive an automated email notification containing order details including item descriptions, quantities, and expected shipping dates.

Supplier receives notifications for shipped orders.

Given an order is marked as shipped in the system, when the shipment confirmation is generated, then the supplier should receive an automated notification with tracking information and expected delivery date.

Supplier is alerted for orders requiring attention.

Given an order is delayed or requires supplier action, when the delay status is generated, then the supplier should receive an automated notification indicating the issue and necessary actions to be taken.

Notifications are sent in real-time to suppliers.

Given any order status change, when the status is updated, then the supplier should receive a notification within 5 minutes of the status change being recorded.

Notification delivery system logs all sent notifications.

Given a notification is sent to a supplier, when checking the system logs, then the log should accurately reflect the timestamp, recipient, and content of the notification sent.

User interfaces to manage notification settings.

Given a user is in the notification settings interface, when they update their notification preferences, then the system should save these preferences and apply them to future notifications without error.

Response tracking from suppliers after notifications are sent.

Given an automated notification is sent to a supplier, when the supplier responds to the notification, then their response should be captured and logged within the order management dashboard for future reference.

Comprehensive Analytics Reporting

"As a small business owner, I want to access comprehensive analytics reports on my orders so that I can make informed decisions to improve my inventory management and operational efficiency."

Description

Comprehensive Analytics Reporting will provide users with in-depth insights into their order management activities. This requirement focuses on developing an analytics dashboard within the Order Management Dashboard that delivers key performance indicators (KPIs), trends, and forecasts associated with order processing. By analyzing order volumes, fulfillment times, and customer feedback, small business owners can make data-driven decisions, identify bottlenecks, and optimize their inventory strategies for better efficiency and profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Order Management Dashboard and views the Analytics Reporting feature for the first time.

Given that the user is logged in the app, when they navigate to the Analytics Reporting section, then the dashboard should load within 3 seconds and display key performance indicators (KPIs) including total orders, average fulfillment time, and customer satisfaction score.

User analyzes trends in their order processing over the past month.

Given that the user is on the Analytics Reporting dashboard, when they select the 'Last 30 Days' filter, then the dashboard should update to show trends including monthly order volume and fulfillment times, with visual representations like graphs or charts.

User wants to identify bottlenecks in their order fulfillment process.

Given that the user is viewing the Analytics Reporting feature, when they click on 'Performance Insights', then the system should display a list of orders that exceeded the average fulfillment time along with the reasons for the delays, if available.

User assesses customer feedback related to their orders.

Given that the user is on the Analytics Reporting dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Customer Feedback' section, then the system should present summarized feedback scores and comments associated with recent orders.

User wishes to export the analytics report for further analysis.

Given that the user is on the Analytics Reporting page, when they click on the 'Export' button, then the system should allow them to download the report in CSV format successfully within 5 seconds.

User tests the analytics feature on a mobile device.

Given that the user is using the mobile app, when they access the Analytics Reporting section, then the dashboard should be fully responsive and all functionalities should be accessible without any design distortion across various screen sizes.

User compares order fulfillment metrics over different time frames.

Given that the user is on the Analytics Reporting dashboard, when they select the comparison option between 'Last Month' and 'Last Year', then the dashboard should display side-by-side metrics including order volumes and fulfillment times clearly labeled for both periods.

Multi-Channel Order Sync

"As a small business owner, I want to sync my orders from multiple channels into one dashboard so that I can manage my inventory without discrepancies across platforms."

Description

The Multi-Channel Order Sync feature allows users to synchronize their orders across various sales channels, both online and offline. This requirement ensures that all customer orders from different platforms are consolidated into the Order Management Dashboard, providing a single view of all active orders. By integrating with popular e-commerce platforms and physical point-of-sale systems, this feature empowers small business owners to manage their inventory more effectively and reduce discrepancies across channels, ultimately leading to improved customer service and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Successful synchronization of orders from an e-commerce platform to the Order Management Dashboard

Given an active e-commerce platform integration, when a new order is placed, then the order appears in the Order Management Dashboard within 5 minutes.

Viewing and managing consolidated orders from multiple channels in the dashboard

Given multiple orders from different channels, when the user accesses the Order Management Dashboard, then the user should see a combined list of all active orders with details including order ID, channel, and status.

Updating the status of a pending shipment across multiple sales channels

Given an order with a pending shipment, when the status is updated to 'Shipped' in the dashboard, then the status should reflect across all connected sales channels in real time.

Identifying discrepancies in order quantities between sales channels

Given synchronized orders across channels, when a discrepancy in order quantity is detected, then the dashboard should highlight the affected order and provide a notification to the user.

Integration with a physical point-of-sale (POS) system to capture in-store orders

Given an active integration with a POS system, when an in-store order is processed, then the order should be synchronized and displayed in the Order Management Dashboard immediately.

Real-time notification for new orders from all connected sales channels

Given multiple sales channels are connected, when a new order is received, then the user should receive a push notification on their mobile app instantly.

Generating reports based on consolidated orders from different sales channels

Given a selection of order dates and sales channels, when the user requests a report, then the dashboard should generate a detailed report summarizing orders, including totals and statuses for each channel.

Sales Analytics Integration

Sales Analytics Integration combines real-time sales data with inventory levels, giving Small Business Owners insights into product performance directly from the app. This feature helps users make informed purchasing decisions based on sales trends, facilitating timely restocking and optimizing inventory turnover.

Requirements

Dynamic Sales Dashboard

"As a small business owner, I want to access a dynamic sales dashboard so that I can quickly identify sales trends and optimize my inventory levels in response to market demands."

Description

The Dynamic Sales Dashboard is a visually interactive feature that presents real-time sales data alongside inventory levels. It allows small business owners to view their top-selling products, sales trends, and seasonal fluctuations all in one place. By integrating seamlessly with InventaPro’s existing inventory management system, this dashboard facilitates comprehensive analysis of product performance, enabling users to make data-driven purchasing decisions. This feature is critical for optimizing stock levels, enhancing user experience, and supporting strategic planning in inventory management, ultimately leading to improved sales efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Real-Time Sales and Inventory Data on the Dynamic Sales Dashboard

Given the user is logged into InventaPro, when they access the Dynamic Sales Dashboard, then they should be able to see real-time sales data and current inventory levels for all products within the last 30 days.

Identifying Top-Selling Products

Given that the user is on the Dynamic Sales Dashboard, when they apply the 'Top-Selling Products' filter, then the system should display a list of the top 10 selling products based on total sales volume.

Analyzing Sales Trends Over Time

Given the user is using the Dynamic Sales Dashboard, when they select a specific time frame (e.g., last month or last quarter), then the dashboard should display graphs that illustrate sales trends over the selected time period, including revenue and units sold for each product.

Receiving Alerts for Stock Depletion

Given that the user has set stock level thresholds, when the inventory level for any product falls below the threshold, then the user should receive an alert notification in the Dynamic Sales Dashboard.

Generating Reports on Seasonal Fluctuations

Given the user wants to analyze seasonal sales patterns, when they access the reporting feature in the Dynamic Sales Dashboard, then they should be able to generate a report that showcases sales data for the current season compared to previous seasons.

Exporting Sales Data for External Analysis

Given the user is viewing the Dynamic Sales Dashboard, when they choose to export sales data, then the system should provide the option to download the data in CSV format without any loss of information.

Automated Restock Alerts

"As a small business owner, I want to receive automated restock alerts so that I can ensure my inventory is replenished before I run out of popular products."

Description

Automated Restock Alerts notify users when inventory levels fall below pre-defined thresholds or when sales velocity indicates the need for restocking. This feature ensures that small business owners avoid stockouts and maintain optimal inventory levels, helping them manage their supplies proactively. By leveraging AI-driven insights, the alerts can be customized based on product categories or sales predictions, providing a tailored experience that enhances operational efficiency. This functionality plays a vital role in maintaining inventory balance, ensuring consistent product availability, and ultimately boosting customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when inventory of a specific product drops below the predefined threshold after a recent sales surge.

Given the inventory level for Product A is at 5 units and the predefined threshold is set to 10 units, when sales velocity increases and units sold reach 6 in a day, then the user should receive an automated restock alert.

User customizes restock thresholds based on different product categories within the application settings.

Given the user accesses the settings for product categories, when the user sets a restock threshold of 20 units for Category X and 15 units for Category Y, then the thresholds should be saved correctly and reflect in the inventory alerts.

User receives automated alerts for multiple products when any of them fall below their respective thresholds during a defined time period.

Given the inventory levels for Product B is at 4 units and Product C is at 8 units, when both products fall below their predefined thresholds of 10 units, then the user should receive separate automated alerts for both products.

User successfully modifies existing restock alert settings for specific products in the application.

Given the user wants to change the restock threshold for Product D from 15 to 20 units, when the user updates the setting and saves changes, then the new threshold should be reflected in the system without errors.

User receives a summary report of all automated restock alerts sent over the last month.

Given the user requests the monthly report, when the report generated includes data about product alerts for the last month, then it should list all products and their alert history accurately.

User experiences the automated restock alert feature under varying sales velocities.

Given the inventory for Product E is at 10 units, when the sales velocity increases to 10 units in the next 24 hours, then the user should receive an automated alert indicating the need to restock based on sales predictions.

User has the option to disable automated restock alerts for selected products in their inventory.

Given the user chooses to disable alerts for product F, when the user saves changes, then the system should stop sending restock alerts for Product F while continuing to send alerts for other products.

Sales Performance Analytics

"As a small business owner, I want to analyze sales performance over time so that I can make informed decisions about product offerings and marketing strategies."

Description

Sales Performance Analytics is a robust analytical feature that aggregates sales data to provide insights into overall sales performance, enabling users to measure their business growth over specified periods. It will allow small business owners to conduct comparative analyses of product categories, identify underperforming items, and discover insights into consumer buying behaviors. This feature will be integrated with InventaPro's existing suite of analytics tools, providing a comprehensive view that aids in strategic decision-making and optimizing marketing efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Performance Dashboard Access

Given a user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Sales Performance Analytics feature, then they should see a dashboard displaying real-time sales data and performance metrics for the selected period.

Comparative Analysis of Product Categories

Given a user has accessed the Sales Performance Analytics feature, when they select two or more product categories, then they should be able to view a side-by-side comparative analysis of sales performance for those categories over a specified time frame.

Identification of Underperforming Items

Given a user is utilizing the Sales Performance Analytics feature, when they view the sales data for their inventory items, then they should receive automated alerts on items that have underperformed based on predefined thresholds, such as sales volume or revenue.

Consumer Buying Behavior Insights

Given a user views the Consumer Insights section within Sales Performance Analytics, when they analyze the purchasing patterns over time, then they should be able to identify trends, peak buying times, and popular products among their consumer base.

Exporting Sales Analytics Reports

Given a user wants to share sales performance data, when they select the 'Export' option in the Sales Performance Analytics feature, then they should be able to download a comprehensive sales report in CSV and PDF formats.

Integration with Other Analytics Tools

Given that Sales Performance Analytics is integrated with the existing InventaPro analytics tools, when a user accesses a report, then they should be able to view data seamlessly merged from different analytics sources without discrepancies.

User Permissions for Analytics Access

Given a company has multiple users, when an admin manages user roles, then they should have the ability to grant or restrict access to the Sales Performance Analytics feature based on predefined user permissions.

Custom Reporting Tools

"As a small business owner, I want to create custom reports that focus on the metrics that matter most to my business so that I can easily track performance and make data-driven decisions."

Description

Custom Reporting Tools empower users to create tailored reports based on various sales and inventory parameters. Small business owners can configure their reports to analyze specific metrics such as sales volume, revenue, rate of inventory turnover, and other KPIs relevant to their business objectives. This feature enhances InventaPro's capability by giving business owners the flexibility to pull precise data that supports their unique business insights and strategies for growth, aiding in better financial planning and performance evaluation.

Acceptance Criteria

Using the Custom Reporting Tools to generate a report on sales volume for the past quarter.

Given a user is logged into InventaPro and has navigated to the Custom Reporting Tools, when they select the 'Sales Volume' report for the 'Last Quarter' and click 'Generate Report', then the system should display a report that accurately reflects the sales volume data for all products sold in the last quarter.

Configuring a report to analyze inventory turnover rates for specific product categories.

Given a user is within the Custom Reporting Tools, when they select 'Inventory Turnover' from the metrics list, specify 'Product Categories' and choose a particular category, and then click 'Generate', then the report generated should show the correct inventory turnover rates for the selected product category.

Exporting a custom report to a CSV file for external analysis.

Given a user has successfully generated a custom report, when they select the 'Export' option and choose 'CSV', then the system should create a downloadable CSV file that includes all data from the report formatted correctly as per CSV standards.

Using the Custom Reporting Tools to compare sales performance across different timeframes.

Given a user selects 'Sales Comparison' from the reporting options and defines two different timeframes, when they generate the report, then the data should reflect accurate sales performance for both timeframes side-by-side for comparison.

Utilizing filters to narrow down the data in the custom report.

Given a user accesses the Custom Reporting Tools, when they apply filters such as date range, product name, and category before generating the report, then the report produced should only include data that matches the applied filters.

Saving a custom report configuration for future access.

Given a user has set up a custom report with specific parameters, when they select 'Save Configuration' and name the report, then the saved report configuration should be retrievable from the 'Saved Reports' section at any time.

Using the Custom Reporting Tools to create a visual dashboard of key performance indicators (KPIs).

Given a user navigates to the Custom Reporting Tools and selects the 'Dashboard' option, when they customize the dashboard with their selected KPIs, then the dashboard should accurately reflect the KPIs as visual graphs or charts as chosen by the user.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a small business owner, I want to integrate my e-commerce platforms with InventaPro so that I can synchronize my inventory levels and avoid sales discrepancies between online and offline channels."

Description

Integration with E-commerce Platforms enables seamless data synchronization between InventaPro and popular online selling channels. This feature allows small business owners to automatically update inventory levels based on online sales, preventing issues such as double-selling and stock discrepancies. With this real-time integration, users can maintain consistent stock across all sales channels, ensuring a smoother operational workflow and enhancing customer satisfaction through accurate product availability information. This feature is crucial for retailers operating both online and offline, strengthening their sales strategy and reducing operational overhead.

Acceptance Criteria

E-commerce Inventory Synchronization upon Sale

Given a product is sold on the e-commerce platform, when the sale is completed, then the corresponding inventory count in InventaPro updates in real-time, reflecting the new stock level without manual input.

Automatic Stock Level Update for Multiple Platforms

Given there are multiple e-commerce platforms integrated with InventaPro, when an item is sold on any platform, then all other platforms reflect the updated stock level within 5 minutes.

Validation of Sales Data Accuracy

Given sales data is synchronized between InventaPro and e-commerce platforms, when a user views the sales performance dashboard, then the data displayed must match the sales data from the e-commerce platform, showing consistency in reporting.

Error Handling for Inventory Update Failures

Given a failure occurs during the synchronization process, when the system attempts to update inventory levels, then an error message should be displayed, and an alert should be sent to the user detailing the issue.

Reporting of Stock Discrepancies

Given there is a difference between the InventaPro inventory and the actual stock on hand, when a user initiates a stock discrepancy report, then the system must generate a report listing all discrepancies with timestamps and associated sales data.

Real-time Alerts for Low Stock Levels

Given inventory levels fall below a predefined threshold, when the threshold is breached, then the system should automatically notify the user through email and within the app, recommending stock replenishment.

Visual Inventory Insights

"As a small business owner, I want visual inventory insights so that I can easily understand my inventory performance and make informed decisions about ordering new stock."

Description

Visual Inventory Insights provides graphical representations of inventory levels, sales data, and product performance metrics. This feature enhances user understanding by presenting information in an intuitive and easy-to-read format, allowing small business owners to quickly grasp key metrics and trends. It supports the decision-making process by highlighting areas requiring attention, such as slow-moving stock or high-demand products. This functionality not only improves data accessibility but also aids in efficient inventory management by guiding users in strategic purchasing and stock management decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales data visualization in the dashboard

Given I am a small business owner, when I access the Visual Inventory Insights feature, then I should see a graphical representation of my inventory levels alongside real-time sales data.

Highlight slow-moving products

Given I have products in my inventory, when I view the Visual Inventory Insights, then I should see a clear indicator for any slow-moving stock items, allowing me to take action on those products.

Showcase high-demand products

Given I have recent sales data, when I access the Visual Inventory Insights, then I should be able to view a separate section highlighting high-demand products for timely restocking.

Real-time inventory performance metrics

Given I use the Visual Inventory Insights feature, when I click on a product, then I should see detailed performance metrics such as sales velocity and stock levels in a user-friendly format.

Exporting visual insights for reports

Given I need to share visual insights with my team, when I utilize the Visual Inventory Insights feature, then I should have the option to export the graphical data in PDF or Excel format.

Mobile responsiveness of the insights feature

Given I am accessing the Visual Inventory Insights on a mobile device, when I navigate to the feature, then all visual representations should resize and remain readable on the mobile screen.

Supplier Connection Hub

The Supplier Connection Hub allows Small Business Owners to manage and communicate with suppliers directly through the mobile app. This feature fosters efficient collaboration, enabling users to place orders, request quotes, and discuss inventory needs, streamlining the supply chain process and strengthening supplier relationships.

Requirements

Direct Order Placement

"As a small business owner, I want to place orders directly through the app so that I can save time and ensure accuracy in my inventory management process."

Description

The Direct Order Placement requirement enables users to seamlessly place orders from their suppliers within the mobile app. This feature will include an intuitive order form that automatically populates with product details and supplier information, allowing small business owners to quickly submit orders and reduce the time spent on procurement. By integrating this capability, InventaPro enhances supplier relationships, minimizes the risk of errors, and streamlines the purchasing process, leading to better inventory management and improved cash flow.

Acceptance Criteria

User places an order for inventory from a supplier through the mobile app.

Given the user is logged into the app, when they select a supplier and enter the order details, then the order should be successfully submitted and a confirmation message should be displayed.

User attempts to place an order but omits required fields in the order form.

Given the user is logged into the app, when they try to submit the order form without filling in the required fields, then the application should display an error message highlighting the missing fields and prevent submission.

User wishes to view and edit previously placed orders.

Given the user is on the order history page, when they select an order from the list, then they should be able to view the order details and have the option to edit or cancel the order.

User needs to request a quote for a specific product from a supplier.

Given the user is on the supplier communication page, when they fill out the quote request form and submit it, then the system should send the request to the supplier and notify the user that it has been sent.

User wants to receive notifications for order status updates.

Given the user has placed an order, when the order status is updated by the supplier, then the user should receive a push notification alerting them of the status change.

User is evaluating supplier performance based on order history.

Given the user accesses the supplier performance dashboard, when they select a supplier, then they should see metrics related to order fulfillment rates, delivery times, and total orders placed.

User attempts to place an order for an item that is out of stock.

Given the user is selecting products to order, when they choose an item that is marked as out of stock, then the system should indicate the stock status and not allow the order to be placed.

Real-time Communication Channel

"As a small business owner, I want to chat with my suppliers in real-time so that I can swiftly address my inventory concerns and maintain optimal stock levels."

Description

The Real-time Communication Channel requirement implements a feature that allows small business owners to communicate with suppliers directly within the app. This communication can occur through instant messaging or chat functionality, fostering a collaborative environment to discuss inventory needs, negotiate prices, and resolve issues. This integration not only strengthens supplier relationships but also enhances responsiveness in the supply chain, ultimately improving operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to initiate a chat with my supplier regarding an urgent inventory shortage, so that I can quickly address the issue before it impacts my sales.

Given the user is logged into the Supplier Connection Hub, when they tap on a supplier's profile and select 'Chat', then they should be able to send and receive messages in real-time without delays.

As a small business owner, I want to receive notifications for unread messages so I can stay updated with supplier communications, ensuring I do not miss any important information.

Given the user is in the Supplier Connection Hub, when they receive a message from a supplier, then a notification should appear on their mobile device, and the chat icon should display a badge indicating the number of unread messages.

As a small business owner, I want to be able to attach pictures and documents in the chat with my suppliers for discussing specific inventory items, providing clear communication.

Given the user is in an active chat with a supplier, when they select the 'Attach' icon, then they should be able to add images or documents from their device without any errors or file size limitations exceeding 5MB.

As a small business owner, I want to search through my chat history with suppliers, allowing me to easily find past discussions on orders or quotes without scrolling through messages.

Given the user is in the chat interface, when they enter a keyword in the search bar, then the chat history should filter to display relevant messages containing that keyword.

As a small business owner, I want to edit or delete my messages in a chat, giving me the ability to correct mistakes or remove outdated information.

Given the user has sent a message in a chat, when they long press on the message, then options to edit or delete the message should be available, and the changes should reflect immediately in the chat.

As a small business owner, I want to be able to conduct a group chat with multiple suppliers to discuss joint orders or collaborations, increasing efficiency in communication.

Given the user is in the Supplier Connection Hub, when they create a new group chat and add multiple suppliers, then all added suppliers should receive the chat invitation and be able to participate in the conversation seamlessly.

As a small business owner, I want to ensure that my chat with suppliers is secure and my data is protected, so I can communicate freely without concerns about privacy.

Given the user is using the real-time communication channel, then all messages should be encrypted during transmission, and the app should comply with relevant data protection regulations.

Quote Request System

"As a small business owner, I want to request quotes from my suppliers easily so that I can make informed purchasing decisions based on competitive pricing."

Description

The Quote Request System requirement facilitates the process of requesting and managing quotes from suppliers. Users can select items, input quantities, and send request forms directly to suppliers through the app, making the procurement process more transparent and organized. This feature enhances decision-making by providing a clear overview of available offers and pricing options, allowing small business owners to choose the best deals that align with their budget and business strategy.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a quote request for multiple items from different suppliers through the mobile app.

Given that the user selects multiple items in the app, when they input the required quantities and press 'Request Quote', then the system should send a request to each selected supplier and receive confirmation of quote requests sent.

User views the status of their sent quote requests from within the app.

Given that the user has previously made quote requests, when they navigate to the ‘My Quotes’ section in the app, then they should see a list of quote requests with the corresponding statuses (e.g., Pending, Responded).

User receives a quote response from a supplier through the app.

Given that a supplier has responded to a quote request, when the user checks their notifications or the ‘My Quotes’ section, then they should see the quote details including pricing, delivery time, and any comments from the supplier.

User compares received quotes from multiple suppliers efficiently.

Given that the user has received multiple quotes, when they access the quote comparison tool, then they should be able to view all quotes side by side, highlighting key differences in pricing and terms.

User cancels a quote request before the supplier responds.

Given that a user has sent a quote request and wants to cancel it, when they navigate to 'My Quotes' and select a pending request, then they should be able to successfully cancel the request and receive a confirmation message.

User saves frequently used suppliers' contact information for future requests.

Given that the user wants to save a supplier's details, when they enter the supplier's contact information and press 'Save', then the system should store the supplier's details and allow the user to access them later when making new quote requests.

Supplier Performance Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want to track supplier performance metrics so that I can evaluate their reliability and improve my supply chain efficiency."

Description

The Supplier Performance Tracking requirement introduces a dashboard that summarizes supplier performance metrics such as delivery times, order accuracy, and product quality. By analyzing this data, small business owners can make data-driven decisions regarding supplier partnerships, negotiate better terms, and identify areas for improvement. This feature plays a crucial role in optimizing the supply chain and ensuring consistent inventory availability, ultimately impacting customer satisfaction positively.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Metrics Viewing

Given a logged-in user accesses the Supplier Performance Tracking dashboard, When they select a supplier from the list, Then they should see an overview of the supplier's delivery times, order accuracy, and product quality metrics displayed clearly on the dashboard.

Comparative Supplier Analysis

Given a logged-in user is on the Supplier Performance Tracking dashboard, When they view multiple suppliers, Then they should be able to compare performance metrics side by side for decision-making support.

Supplier Performance Reporting

Given a logged-in user wants to analyze supplier performance over a specific time frame, When they select a date range in the Supplier Performance Tracking dashboard, Then the dashboard should refresh and display updated performance metrics within that time frame.

Notification for Performance Issues

Given a logged-in user monitors supplier performance, When the metrics indicate a decline in delivery times or order accuracy, Then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the performance issue.

Exporting Supplier Performance Data

Given a logged-in user needs to share supplier performance metrics, When they select the export option in the Supplier Performance Tracking dashboard, Then the selected metrics should be successfully downloaded in a CSV format.

Integration with Purchase Orders

Given a logged-in user is tracking supplier performance, When they click on an order associated with the supplier, Then they should be able to view detailed order information linked to supplier performance metrics.

User Access Control for Supplier Metrics

Given an organization has multiple users, When an admin is managing user access, Then they should be able to restrict or grant access to the Supplier Performance Tracking dashboard based on user roles.

Inventory Integration with Supplier Orders

"As a small business owner, I want my inventory to update automatically when I place orders with suppliers so that I can have accurate visibility of my stock levels without manual tracking."

Description

The Inventory Integration with Supplier Orders requirement enables automatic updates to the inventory levels in real-time as new orders are placed and fulfilled. This ensures that stock levels accurately reflect current supplies, preventing overstock or stockouts. By integrating supplier orders directly with inventory management, this feature enhances the overall functionality of InventaPro, leading to smarter inventory decisions and a reduction in manual entry errors.

Acceptance Criteria

Order Placement and Inventory Adjustment

Given a supplier order is placed through the Supplier Connection Hub, when the order is confirmed, then the inventory levels in InventaPro should automatically update to reflect the new stock levels in real-time.

Order Fulfillment and Inventory Sync

Given an order is fulfilled by the supplier, when the fulfillment status is updated in the Supplier Connection Hub, then the corresponding inventory levels in InventaPro should adjust to reflect the new available stock.

Error Handling in Order Integration

Given an order fails during the update process, when an error occurs, then the system should log the error, notify the user through the mobile app, and maintain the previous inventory levels without changes.

Reporting Inventory Changes

Given inventory levels have been updated following the placement or fulfillment of supplier orders, when a user accesses the inventory report, then the report should display accurate and up-to-date inventory levels including recent changes.

Cross-Platform Inventory Synchronization

Given that InventaPro integrates with various e-commerce platforms, when a supplier order is placed, then inventory levels should remain synchronized across all linked platforms to ensure consistent stock visibility.

User Notifications for Inventory Changes

Given an inventory level has changed as a result of a supplier order, when the inventory changes exceed a defined threshold, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the change via the mobile app.

Audit Trail for Inventory Adjustments

Given any changes to the inventory levels from supplier orders, when an adjustment is made, then an audit trail should be maintained displaying the previous and new inventory levels, the date of change, and the user responsible for the adjustment.

Multi-Location Management

The Multi-Location Management feature offers Small Business Owners the ability to oversee inventory across multiple retail locations from a single app interface. This functionality facilitates visibility of stock levels and sales across all stores, empowering users to make strategic inventory decisions and optimize resource allocation.

Requirements

Centralized Inventory Dashboard

"As a Small Business Owner, I want a centralized inventory dashboard so that I can quickly assess stock levels across all my locations and make informed decisions about inventory management."

Description

The Centralized Inventory Dashboard requirement involves creating a comprehensive interface that allows users to view and manage inventory levels across all retail locations from a single screen. This dashboard will provide real-time data on stock availability, sales trends, and alerts for low stock situations. By integrating with existing inventory systems and synchronizing data across locations, this feature will enhance decision-making capabilities, improve operational efficiency, and enable users to respond quickly to changing inventory levels. Ultimately, this requirement aims to empower Small Business Owners to manage their stock effectively, reducing the risk of stockouts and overstock.

Acceptance Criteria

As a Small Business Owner managing multiple retail locations, I need to access a centralized inventory dashboard to view stock levels in real-time across all my stores during a weekly inventory review.

Given that I am on the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I select the 'View All Locations' option, then I should see a comprehensive list of all retail locations with their respective stock levels displayed clearly.

As a Small Business Owner, I want to be alerted for low stock situations when monitoring my inventory so that I can take timely actions to replenish stock.

Given that my stock falls below the predefined threshold for any item, when I look at the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, then I should receive an alert notification indicating which item is low on stock and its current quantity.

As a Small Business Owner, during a seasonal sale, I need to analyze sales trends on my Centralized Inventory Dashboard to make informed decisions regarding replenishing stock.

Given that I am reviewing sales data for the past month on the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I filter by 'Sales Trends', then I should see graphical representations of sales trends for each location, enabling me to identify which items need restocking or promotion.

As a Small Business Owner, I want to ensure that the data on my Centralized Inventory Dashboard is accurately synchronized with my e-commerce platform.

Given that I have made changes to stock levels on my e-commerce platform, when I refresh the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, then I should see these changes reflected accurately in real-time without discrepancies.

As a Small Business Owner, I need to have easy navigation within the Centralized Inventory Dashboard to quickly switch between locations and review inventory data efficiently.

Given that I am on the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I click on any specific store location from the dropdown menu, then I should be taken to a detailed view showing only the inventory data pertinent to that selected location.

As a Small Business Owner, I want to track historical inventory data to identify patterns and inform future purchasing decisions.

Given that I am using the Centralized Inventory Dashboard, when I select the 'Historical Data' view, then I should be able to see inventory data over a specified period, including trends and changes in stock levels for each location.

Automated Reorder Alerts

"As a Small Business Owner, I want automated reorder alerts so that I can proactively manage stock levels and avoid stockouts without having to monitor inventory constantly."

Description

The Automated Reorder Alerts requirement focuses on implementing a system that notifies users when stock levels fall below a pre-defined threshold. This functionality will incorporate predictive analytics to forecast demand based on sales patterns, enabling the system to send alerts in advance of stockouts. The alerts will be customizable, allowing users to set thresholds based on product categories or specific items. Integrating this requirement into the Multi-Location Management feature will ensure that Small Business Owners can maintain optimal stock levels across multiple locations, thereby minimizing lost sales opportunities and increasing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Reorder Alerts Triggering at Low Stock Levels

Given that a product's stock level falls below a user-defined threshold, when the system detects this condition, then an automated alert should be sent to the user's dashboard and via email notification.

Customizable Reorder Thresholds for Different Product Categories

Given that the user can define different reorder thresholds for various product categories, when a stock level for a product in any category reaches its threshold, then the system should trigger relevant alerts for that specific category.

Integration of Predictive Analytics in Reorder Alerts

Given that predictive analytics are used to analyze sales patterns, when the forecast indicates potential stockouts, then the system should proactively alert the user ahead of the expected stockout date.

User Interface for Managing Reorder Alerts

Given that the user accesses the settings for reorder alerts, when they modify any threshold level or notification preference, then these changes should be saved successfully and reflected in the system in real-time.

Historical Data Review in Alert Notifications

Given that alerts are triggered, when the user receives a notification, then they should have access to historical sales data and trends for the alerted product to make informed inventory decisions.

Multi-Location Alerts for Cross-Location Stock Levels

Given that the user manages inventory across multiple locations, when a product reaches reorder threshold in any location, then alerts should be generated for that specific location, along with a summary for all locations.

Location-Specific Inventory Reports

"As a Small Business Owner, I want location-specific inventory reports so that I can analyze the performance of my stock across different store locations and make informed buying decisions."

Description

The Location-Specific Inventory Reports requirement entails creating customizable reporting tools that allow users to generate detailed reports for each retail location. Users will be able to analyze inventory performance based on various metrics such as turnover rates, sales volume, and stock levels. These reports will enable Small Business Owners to identify trends, understand which products perform well in specific locations, and make data-driven decisions for future inventory purchases. This feature will integrate seamlessly with the centralized dashboard, allowing quick access to insights that drive strategic inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Generate a location-specific inventory report for Store A, analyzing sales data from the last 30 days to determine top-selling products and stock levels.

Given the user is logged into the InventaPro dashboard, When they select Store A and filter for the last 30 days, Then they should be able to generate a detailed inventory report that lists the top-selling products along with their sales volume and current stock levels.

Customize the report parameters to include turnover rates and sales volume for each product at Store B.

Given the user is viewing the inventory report options for Store B, When they select turnover rates and sales volume as report parameters, Then the generated report should display these metrics accurately alongside each product's details.

Export the location-specific inventory report for Store C in a CSV format to share with team members.

Given the user has generated the inventory report for Store C, When they click on the export button and select CSV format, Then the report should be downloaded successfully in CSV format, preserving all selected metrics and details.

Analyze trends in inventory performance over the last quarter for Store D to make future purchase decisions.

Given the user accesses the inventory report for Store D for the last quarter, When they analyze the trends, Then they should be able to view a graphical representation of sales trends and stock levels over the specified time period.

Identify underperforming products in Store E based on the generated inventory report.

Given the inventory report for Store E is generated, When the user reviews the report for products with low sales volume and high stock levels, Then the system should highlight these underperforming products for easy identification.

Inventory Transfer Functionality

"As a Small Business Owner, I want the ability to transfer inventory between locations so that I can quickly address stock imbalances and meet customer demand effectively."

Description

The Inventory Transfer Functionality requirement provides users with the ability to transfer stock between different retail locations directly through the app. This feature supports the management of inventory surplus or deficits across locations, as users can initiate stock transfers based on real-time inventory data. Users will be able to log the details of each transfer, including item quantities and transfer reasons, which will help maintain accurate inventory records. This capability enhances flexibility in inventory management and supports better responsiveness to customer demand across multiple locations.

Acceptance Criteria

Moving excess inventory from Store A to Store B to meet increased demand for a particular product.

Given the user is logged in and has access to multiple locations, when they select a product from Store A and enter the transfer quantity to Store B, then the system should successfully log the transfer with all details, including item quantity and transfer reason.

Transferring stock during a stockout situation at the receiving location.

Given the inventory levels of Store B indicate a stockout for a specific product, when the user initiates a transfer request from Store A, then the system should allow the transfer and update the inventory levels accordingly at both locations.

Tracking the history of inventory transfers between locations for reporting purposes.

Given the user navigates to the Inventory Transfer report section, when they request to view the transfer history, then the system should display all past transfers with details such as date, items transferred, quantities, source, and destination locations.

Notifying users of low stock levels before initiating a transfer.

Given the user attempts to initiate a transfer where the source location’s inventory is below a predefined threshold, when the user tries to proceed with the transfer, then the system should prompt a warning about low stock levels and confirm if they wish to continue.

Ensuring that only authorized users can perform inventory transfers.

Given the user is attempting to execute an inventory transfer, when they do not have the necessary permissions, then the system should deny the request and display an error message regarding lack of authorization.

Transferring stock with partial fulfillment indicates transferring less quantity than requested due to limited stock.

Given the user requests to transfer a quantity that exceeds available stock at the source location, when the user confirms the transfer, then the system should allow a partial transfer and document the remaining quantity not transferred.

User Role Management

"As a Small Business Owner, I want to manage user roles and permissions so that I can control access to inventory data and ensure that only authorized personnel can make changes to stock levels in the system."

Description

The User Role Management requirement empowers Small Business Owners to define user roles and permissions within the Multi-Location Management feature. This functionality will allow for a secure and organized approach to inventory management, where specific team members can be granted access to essential functions based on their roles. By enabling different access levels—for example, view-only access or full management capabilities—this feature enhances data security and improves operational workflows by ensuring that team members can only perform actions appropriate to their responsibilities.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role Creation for Inventory Management

Given an admin user is logged into the InventaPro app, when they navigate to the User Role Management section and create a new user role with specific permissions, then the new role should be saved and displayed in the user roles list with the correct permissions assigned.

User Role Assignment to Team Members

Given an admin user has created new user roles, when they assign a user role to a team member, then the team member should only have access to the functions and features permitted by that role as verified through their login credentials.

Editing User Roles and Permissions

Given an admin user is logged in, when they edit the permissions of an existing user role, then the changes should reflect immediately in the user roles list and be enforceable without requiring a system restart.

User Role Deletion and Impact on Access

Given an admin user has deleted a user role, when a team member associated with that role logs in, then they should be denied access and receive a notification of the role removal.

Audit Trail for User Role Changes

Given changes have been made to user roles by the admin, when they view the audit trail, then all modifications should be logged with a timestamp, user identification, and a description of the changes made.

User Role Hierarchies and Overlapping Permissions

Given multiple user roles exist with overlapping permissions, when a team member is assigned a new role, then their effective permissions should be a unified set that encompasses both roles without conflict.

Role Access Verification for Restricted Functions

Given team members with different user roles, when they attempt to access restricted functions in the application, then the system should accurately deny or allow access based on their assigned permissions.

Inventory Forecasting Tools

Inventory Forecasting Tools leverage historical sales data to predict future inventory needs based on seasonal trends and customer demand patterns. This feature aids Small Business Owners in making data-driven stock decisions, reducing excess inventory and minimizing stockouts through smarter replenishment strategies.

Requirements

Automated Demand Prediction

"As a small business owner, I want the system to automatically predict my inventory needs so that I can make informed decisions and avoid overstock or stockouts, ultimately increasing my sales and customer satisfaction."

Description

The Automated Demand Prediction requirement involves developing an intelligent algorithm that analyzes historical sales data, seasonal trends, and customer behaviors to predict future inventory needs. This feature should enhance the accuracy of stock level forecasting, allowing retailers to minimize overstock and stockouts. By integrating this requirement into the InventaPro inventory management system, small business owners can receive timely notifications and recommendations for stock replenishment, which supports data-driven decision-making and improves overall inventory efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated demand prediction for seasonal products during peak sale periods.

Given that the retailer inputs historical sales data for seasonal products, when the algorithm analyzes the data, then it should accurately predict demand for the upcoming season with at least 85% accuracy based on actual sales.

Utilizing automated demand prediction for routine restocking alerts.

Given that current stock levels are below the predefined threshold, when the algorithm processes the sales data, then it should notify the retailer of necessary restocking at least 7 days in advance to prevent stockouts.

Reviewing prediction reports for upcoming months.

Given that a retailer accesses the inventory dashboard, when the retailer reviews the demand predictions report, then it should display projected stock levels and suggested reorder quantities for each product for the next three months.

Integration of demand predictions with e-commerce platforms.

Given that demand predictions are generated, when they are synchronized with the retailer's e-commerce platform, then the online inventory should reflect accurate stock levels based on predicted demand within 15 minutes of prediction.

Evaluating accuracy of previous demand predictions.

Given that a retailer reviews historical demand predictions, when comparing those to actual sales figures, then the accuracy of predictions should meet or exceed 80% for all products over the past six months.

Receiving analytics on demand prediction effectiveness.

Given that demand prediction analytics are generated, when a retailer accesses the analytical reports, then it should display metrics such as prediction accuracy, stockout occurrences, and overstock volume within a user-friendly format.

Testing the algorithm's performance with varied datasets.

Given that diverse datasets are provided for testing, when the algorithm is run, then it should demonstrate consistent performance by achieving a minimum prediction accuracy of 75% across all tested datasets.

Seasonal Trend Analysis

"As a small retailer, I want to analyze seasonal trends in my sales data so that I can adjust my inventory and marketing strategies for maximum effectiveness, ensuring I meet customer demand at the right times."

Description

The Seasonal Trend Analysis requirement focuses on incorporating analytical tools that identify and assess seasonal purchasing patterns. This feature is crucial for small retailers as it allows them to prepare for fluctuations in customer demand throughout the year. By providing insights into historical sales trends during specific seasons, the system will enable users to adjust their inventory strategies accordingly, ensuring optimal stock levels during peak and off-peak periods.

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal Purchasing Patterns Review for Holiday Inventory Planning

Given that the user is analyzing past sales data for the holiday season, when they access the Seasonal Trend Analysis tool, then they should be able to view detailed insights on historical sales performance for at least the last three holiday seasons, including sales volume and inventory levels.

Adjusting Inventory for Summer Sales

Given that a small retailer is preparing for summer sales based on historical data, when they view the Seasonal Trend Analysis report, then they should see recommendations for optimal stock levels for summer products, segmented by specific categories (e.g., swimwear, outdoor gear).

Comparison of Seasonal Trends Year-over-Year

Given that the user wants to compare sales trends from one year to the next, when they utilize the Seasonal Trend Analysis feature, then they should be able to compare historical sales data side-by-side for multiple years, clearly indicating trends and fluctuations in customer demand.

Real-time Forecast Adjustments based on Current Sales Velocity

Given that a retailer experiences an unexpected spike in current sales, when using the Seasonal Trend Analysis tool, then the system should provide real-time suggestions for adjusting inventory orders based on this new sales data and historical seasonal trends.

Weekly Review of Seasonal Inventory Performance

Given that the retailer performs a weekly review of inventory levels, when they access the Seasonal Trend Analysis dashboard, then they should be able to see weekly updates on stock performance against historical seasonal averages for that week.

Integrated Dashboard View for Seasonal Trends and Inventory Levels

Given that the user wants an overview of seasonal trends in relation to current inventory levels, when they access the dashboard, then they should see an integrated view that visually represents how current stock compares to forecasted inventory needs for the upcoming season.

Feedback Mechanism for Seasonal Analysis Accuracy

Given that the user utilizes the Seasonal Trend Analysis feature, when they submit feedback regarding the accuracy of the insights provided, then they should receive confirmation that their feedback has been recorded and will be used to improve future forecasts.

Real-time Inventory Adjustments

"As a small business owner, I want my inventory levels to update in real-time with sales data so that I can have the most accurate information at my fingertips and make immediate replenishment decisions when needed."

Description

The Real-time Inventory Adjustments requirement involves creating functionalities that allow the system to provide immediate inventory level updates based on sales performance. This requirement aims to synchronize inventory data in real-time, reflecting sales activity from both online and offline channels. By implementing this feature, users can respond quickly to changes in customer demand, enhancing the accuracy of forecasting and stock level management.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Inventory Update after Online Sale

Given an online sale is made, when the payment is completed, then the inventory level should be updated immediately to reflect the sale in real-time.

Real-time Inventory Update after Offline Sale

Given an offline sale occurs, when the transaction is processed, then the inventory level must be adjusted immediately to ensure accurate stock reflection.

Inventory Dashboard Notification of Low Stock

Given that an inventory level falls below a pre-defined threshold, when the adjustment occurs, then a notification must be generated on the dashboard for the user to take action.

Sales Performance Sync Across Channels

Given that a sales transaction occurs in either an online or offline channel, when the inventory update is performed, then both channels must reflect the same stock level within one minute.

Historical Data Review for Adjustment Accuracy

Given the historical sales data is available, when reviewing the inventory adjustments, then the adjustments should correlate with at least 95% of the historical data trends.

User Access Control for Inventory Updates

Given multiple users have access to the system, when an inventory adjustment is made, then an audit log must track the user responsible for the adjustment in real-time.

Smart Replenishment Alerts

"As a small retailer, I want to receive alerts when my stock is running low based on predicted demand so that I can replenish items in time, preventing stockouts and maintaining customer satisfaction."

Description

The Smart Replenishment Alerts requirement entails developing a notification system that alerts users when inventory levels reach a predefined threshold based on forecasted demand. This proactive feature will help users manage their stock more effectively, as it minimizes the risk of running out of popular items. The alerts will be customizable to fit individual business needs, providing a personalized approach to inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification upon low inventory levels for a popular item.

Given that a product's stock level falls below the predefined threshold based on forecasted demand, when the system detects this condition, then the system should send a notification to the user via their preferred communication channel (email/SMS) within 5 minutes.

Customization of alert thresholds for individual products.

Given that a user wants to set custom thresholds for different products, when the user adjusts the threshold level for a specific product and saves the changes, then the system should retain these settings and apply them in generating alerts.

User receipt confirmation of smart alerts.

Given that a user receives a smart replenishment alert, when the notification is acknowledged by the user, then the system should record the acknowledgment and update the alert status to 'Acknowledged.'

Tracking the history of replenishment alerts.

Given that smart replenishment alerts have been generated over time, when a user accesses the alert history report, then the system should display a chronological list of alerts, including timestamps and product details.

Integration with e-commerce sales data for accurate forecasting.

Given that a user has integrated their e-commerce platform with InventaPro, when the system analyzes sales data, then the predictions for replenishment alerts should reflect actual sales patterns accurately within a variance of 10% of historical sales data.

Bulk modification of alert settings for multiple products.

Given that a user wants to update alert thresholds for multiple products at once, when the user selects the products and applies changes to their threshold settings, then the system should successfully update all selected products' thresholds without errors.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a small business owner, I want my inventory management system to integrate with my e-commerce platform so that I can have all my sales data in one place, leading to better forecasting and inventory control."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement focuses on developing seamless connections between InventaPro and popular e-commerce platforms used by small retailers. This integration is vital for achieving a synchronized view of inventory across multiple sales channels, which enhances the forecasting capabilities by providing a comprehensive picture of sales data. This feature will support improved inventory management and reduce discrepancies between online and offline stock levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Shopify for real-time inventory updates.

Given that the user has an active Shopify account and the InventaPro account is properly configured, when a sale occurs on Shopify, then the inventory level in InventaPro should automatically update to reflect that sale within 5 minutes.

Synchronization of inventory levels across WooCommerce and InventaPro.

Given that the user has linked their WooCommerce store to InventaPro, when a product's inventory is adjusted in InventaPro, then the corresponding inventory levels in WooCommerce should be updated and reflected accurately within 10 minutes.

Ability to view historical sales data from multiple platforms.

Given that the user is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the inventory forecasting section, then they should be able to view historical sales data aggregated from both online and offline sales channels, with clear visualizations and trends displayed over the past 12 months.

Automation of reordering based on predictive analytics.

Given that the inventory forecasting tool has analyzed historical sales data, when the stock level of a product falls below the predetermined threshold, then InventaPro should automatically generate a reorder notification to the user, recommending an optimal quantity based on forecasted demand.

Real-time reporting of stock discrepancies between platforms.

Given that the user is managing inventory across multiple e-commerce platforms, when a discrepancy between the stock levels reported in InventaPro and any connected e-commerce platform is detected, then the system should alert the user via email and within the dashboard within 2 hours of detection.

User training on using integration features.

Given that a new user has registered for InventaPro, when they complete the onboarding process, then they should have access to a tutorial that explains how to integrate their e-commerce platforms with InventaPro, with quizzes to validate understanding at the end of the training.

Testing the integration with an additional e-commerce platform after initial implementation.

Given that InventaPro has been successfully integrated with Shopify and WooCommerce, when an additional platform (e.g., BigCommerce) is configured, then all functionality should be replicated as per the existing integrations without any loss of data integrity or user experience.

User-friendly Dashboard for Insights

"As a small retailer, I want a user-friendly dashboard that displays my inventory insights clearly so that I can quickly understand my stock levels and make informed decisions with ease."

Description

The User-friendly Dashboard for Insights requirement aims to create an intuitive dashboard where users can easily access and interpret forecasting data and inventory insights. This feature will allow small business owners to visualize trends, adjust stock levels intuitively, and analyze the effectiveness of their inventory strategies. The dashboard should be customizable, enabling users to focus on the metrics that matter most to their business.

Acceptance Criteria

User Accessing the Dashboard for the First Time

Given the user has logged in for the first time, when they access the dashboard, then they should see a guided tutorial overlay that explains the main features and functionalities of the dashboard.

User Customizing Dashboard Metrics

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they select and adjust the metrics displayed through the customization options, then their selected metrics should persist across sessions without needing to reconfigure each time they log in.

User Analyzing Historical Trends

Given the user has selected a specific date range in the dashboard, when they view the trends, then all historical sales data and forecasting insights within that range should accurately display, updating in real-time based on data input.

User Adjusting Stock Levels from Dashboard Insights

Given the user is reviewing inventory insights on the dashboard, when they identify a stock level that needs adjustment and make the change, then the system should update the inventory count and reflect this change in real-time across all platforms.

User Receiving Alerts for Low Stock Levels

Given the user has set up low stock alerts for specific products, when the inventory for those products falls below the defined threshold, then the user should receive an email notification alerting them to replenish stock.

User Navigating Between Online and Offline Sales Data

Given the user is viewing sales data, when they switch between online and offline sales metrics, then the dashboard should seamlessly display the corresponding data without any lag or delays.

Dynamic Stock Metrics

Dynamic Stock Metrics provides real-time updates on key inventory performance indicators, allowing Inventory Analysts to monitor stock levels, turnover rates, and other essential metrics at a glance. This feature simplifies data access and enhances decision-making by offering immediate visibility into inventory performance.

Requirements

Real-time KPI Dashboard

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to see real-time updates on key inventory performance indicators in a centralized dashboard so that I can make informed decisions quickly and optimize stock levels effectively."

Description

The Real-time KPI Dashboard requirement involves the creation of a centralized display that showcases key inventory performance indicators in real-time. This dashboard will enable Inventory Analysts to monitor stock levels, turnover rates, and other essential metrics at a glance. The dashboard will be customizable to display the most relevant KPIs for each user, allowing for personalized insights. By integrating this functionality into InventaPro, users will benefit from immediate visibility into inventory performance, enabling timely decision-making and proactive stock management. The dashboard will update continuously using live data feeds from inventory systems, ensuring accuracy and relevance of the displayed information.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time visibility of stock levels during peak sales periods.

Given that an Inventory Analyst is viewing the Real-time KPI Dashboard, when they access the stock levels metric, then the dashboard should reflect the most current stock levels updated within the last minute.

Customization of KPI display for different user roles.

Given that an Inventory Analyst is a user with customizable dashboard settings, when they select their preferred KPIs, then the dashboard should display only the selected KPIs accurately and instantly.

Monitoring turnover rates for specific product categories.

Given that an Inventory Analyst is monitoring turnover rates, when they view the turnover rate metric on the dashboard, then it should show accurate turnover rates updated in real-time for the selected product categories.

Analysis of historical inventory performance over time.

Given that an Inventory Analyst wants to analyze historical performance, when they select a time range on the dashboard, then the dashboard should accurately update to reflect the historical KPIs for the selected time period.

Receiving alerts for low stock levels.

Given that an Inventory Analyst has set thresholds for low stock alerts, when the stock level for any item falls below the threshold, then the dashboard should display an alert notification immediately.

Accessing the dashboard on multiple devices.

Given that an Inventory Analyst accesses the Real-time KPI Dashboard on different devices, when they log in from a new device, then the dashboard should display the same live data and user settings as on their primary device.

Integration of live data feeds from inventory systems.

Given that the Real-time KPI Dashboard relies on live data feeds, when there is an update in the inventory system, then the dashboard should reflect the update within 30 seconds without manual refresh.

Automated Stock Alerts

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive automated alerts when stock levels reach predefined thresholds so that I can take action before running out of stock or experiencing excess inventory."

Description

The Automated Stock Alerts requirement will facilitate the setup of notifications for Inventory Analysts when stock levels reach critical thresholds. This feature will allow users to define specific stock level parameters and receive alerts via email, SMS, or in-app notifications, ensuring they are promptly notified of potential stockouts or overstock situations. By implementing this feature, InventaPro will enhance the user experience by streamlining inventory management. Alerts will be customizable, allowing users to determine the frequency and type of notifications they wish to receive. This will ensure that retail operations can be managed proactively and efficiently.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst receives a notification via email when stock level of a critical product falls below the defined threshold during business hours.

Given the stock level of the product is at critical threshold, When the threshold is crossed, Then an email notification should be sent to the Inventory Analyst with product details and current stock level.

An Inventory Analyst customizes notification settings for stock alerts to receive alerts daily instead of weekly for certain high-demand items.

Given the user configures daily alerts for high-demand items, When the stock level crosses the threshold, Then the user should receive an alert daily via their selected method (email, SMS, or in-app).

An Inventory Analyst checks the status of recent stock alerts through the InventaPro dashboard during a weekly inventory review.

Given that stock alerts were triggered in the past week, When the Inventory Analyst views the alert history in the dashboard, Then they should see a complete list of notifications with timestamps and stock status details.

The system sends an in-app alert to the Inventory Analyst when the stock level of an item goes above a set maximum limit.

Given the stock level exceeds the maximum limit, When the threshold is crossed, Then an in-app notification should be generated to inform the Inventory Analyst of the overstock situation.

An Inventory Analyst sets up a notification to receive stock alerts via SMS, ensuring they are immediately informed of any stock issues on the go.

Given the user selects SMS as their notification method, When the stock level hits the defined thresholds for any item, Then the system should send an SMS alert to the Inventory Analyst's registered mobile number.

An Inventory Analyst wants to temporarily disable stock alerts during a peak sales event to avoid notification overload.

Given the user disables alerts in the settings, When the stock level crosses critical thresholds during the peak event, Then no alerts should be sent until the user re-enables them.

An Inventory Analyst checks the frequency of stock alerts set for a particular product line to ensure they align with inventory management policy.

Given the user accesses the settings for stock alerts, When they review the frequency selected for notifications, Then it should reflect the user-defined parameters for that product line.

Inventory Performance Analytics

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to access advanced analytics on inventory performance so that I can identify trends and make data-driven decisions regarding stock management."

Description

The Inventory Performance Analytics requirement focuses on providing advanced analytical tools that will help inventory managers assess stock performance over time. This feature will include trend analysis, historical comparisons, and forecasts based on AI-driven algorithms. By utilizing these analytics, Inventory Analysts can gain insights into sales patterns, identify slow-moving items, and forecast future inventory needs based on historical data. The implementation of this requirement will empower users to base their inventory decisions on solid data rather than intuition, ultimately leading to improved stock turnover rates and reduced holding costs.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Real-time Inventory Metrics on the Dashboard

Given I am an Inventory Analyst logged into InventaPro, when I navigate to the Dynamic Stock Metrics page, then I should see real-time updates of key inventory metrics including stock levels, turnover rates, and low stock alerts.

Generating Inventory Performance Reports

Given I am an Inventory Analyst, when I request a report for inventory performance for the last quarter, then I should receive a comprehensive report that includes trend analysis, historical comparisons, and forecasts based on AI-driven algorithms.

Identifying Slow-Moving Items in Inventory

Given I am reviewing inventory performance, when I apply the filter for slow-moving items, then I should see a list of products that have not sold in the last 90 days, along with their corresponding turnover rates.

Forecasting Future Inventory Needs

Given I am analyzing historical sales data, when I run the AI-driven forecasting tool, then I should receive accurate forecasts of future inventory needs for the next quarter, based on past sales patterns.

Monitoring Stock Turnover Rates in Real-time

Given I am on the Dynamic Stock Metrics dashboard, when I view the stock turnover rates, then the data should be updated in real-time reflecting the most recent sales transactions.

Detecting Overstock Situations

Given I have set inventory threshold alerts, when inventory levels exceed the defined threshold for any product, then I should receive a notification indicating the overstock condition.

Analyzing Impact of Sales Promotions on Inventory Levels

Given I have implemented a sales promotion, when I analyze the inventory data, then I should be able to see a correlation between the promotion and any changes in stock levels and turnover rates during and after the promotion period.

Multi-channel Sales Synchronization

"As a Retailer, I want my inventory to be synchronized across multiple sales channels so that I can ensure accurate stock levels and enhance customer satisfaction across platforms."

Description

The Multi-channel Sales Synchronization requirement will enable seamless integration between InventaPro and various e-commerce platforms. This integration is crucial for small retailers to maintain consistent inventory levels across all sales channels, both online and offline. By automating the synchronization process, retailers can eliminate the risk of overstocking or stockouts due to discrepancies in inventory data. This will enhance overall operational efficiency, improve customer satisfaction, and support growth by ensuring that inventory levels are accurately reflected on all sales channels in real-time.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time inventory synchronization between the InventaPro system and an e-commerce platform when a sale is made.

Given a sale occurs on the e-commerce platform, when the sale is processed, then the inventory level in InventaPro should update within 5 seconds to reflect the new quantity available.

Monitoring stock levels across all channels from the InventaPro dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the dashboard, when they select the 'Inventory Overview' section, then they should see real-time stock levels for all channels (online and offline) displayed accurately.

Handling overstock and stockouts for a specific product category in sync with sales patterns.

Given a product category has been set to track, when sales data for that category triggers a stock level warning, then an alert should be sent to the inventory analyst within 10 minutes, indicating the necessary action.

Automating updates for stock levels after receiving new shipments from suppliers.

Given a new shipment has been processed in the InventaPro system, when the shipment is confirmed as received, then the stock levels should increase accurately in all connected e-commerce platforms within 2 minutes.

Reporting discrepancies in stock levels between InventaPro and any connected e-commerce platform.

Given the inventory level in InventaPro and the inventory levels on the e-commerce platform do not match, when a discrepancy is detected, then a report should be generated and notify the inventory analyst via email.

User accessibility to historical sales data for informed decision making.

Given the user accesses the Historical Sales section of the InventaPro dashboard, when they select a specific date range, then they should be able to view detailed sales history data that accurately reflects transactions within that range.

Ensuring mobile accessibility for real-time inventory insights.

Given a user logged into InventaPro from a mobile device, when they navigate to the inventory metrics section, then they should see an optimized view of real-time stock levels and alerts for low inventory.

Customizable Reporting Tools

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to generate customizable reports on inventory performance so that I can analyze data in a way that best fits our business needs."

Description

The Customizable Reporting Tools requirement involves creating a suite of reporting options that allow Inventory Analysts to generate tailored reports based on their specific needs. This feature will include options for various formats, filters, and output types, ensuring that users can assess inventory data in a manner that best suits their operational requirements. By empowering users to create customizable reports, InventaPro will facilitate deeper insights into inventory performance and trends, enabling more strategic planning and decision-making processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst generates a sales report to analyze stock turnover for the last quarter, focusing on the performance of seasonal items.

Given the Inventory Analyst selects the 'Sales Report' option and applies filters for the last quarter and seasonal items, when they click 'Generate Report', then a report is created that accurately reflects the specified filters and displays stock turnover rates.

An Inventory Analyst wants to view inventory levels by category to assess which categories may need restocking.

Given the Inventory Analyst selects the 'Inventory Levels by Category' report format and sets filters for specific categories, when they click 'View Report', then the report displays accurate inventory levels for the selected categories and allows for further drill-down into individual items.

A user needs to export a customized report detailing stock levels and sales performance for presentation to the management team.

Given the user customizes a report with selected metrics and date ranges and chooses the 'PDF' export option, when they click 'Export', then a PDF file is generated containing the accurate report with all selected metrics visually formatted for presentation.

An Inventory Analyst compiles a monthly inventory performance summary report for internal analysis.

Given the Inventory Analyst selects the 'Monthly Summary Report' with preset filters for the current month, when they generate the report, then the system provides a summary that includes total inventory sold, stock levels at the beginning and end of the month, and highlights any discrepancies or alerts.

An Inventory Manager requires a detailed report on items nearing their re-order point to prevent stockouts.

Given the Inventory Manager selects the 'Re-order Alerts' report and specifies a threshold for inventory levels, when they click 'Generate', then the report lists all items that are at or below the threshold, including suggested order quantities based on sales metrics.

An Inventory Analyst attempts to create a report comparing sales across different regions to identify trends and performance issues.

Given the Inventory Analyst selects the 'Regional Sales Comparison' report format and specifies regions for comparison, when they generate the report, then the output includes a clear comparison of sales figures and trends across the selected regions, enabling insights into regional performance.

Predictive Trend Forecasting

Utilizing advanced algorithms, Predictive Trend Forecasting analyzes historical sales data to predict future inventory needs. This feature empowers Inventory Analysts to adjust their strategies proactively, ensuring that stock levels meet anticipated demand and minimizing the risk of stockouts or excess inventory.

Requirements

Automated Data Synchronization

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want the sales data from our e-commerce platform and physical store to be automatically synchronized so that I can ensure the forecasts are accurate and timely, helping to prevent stockouts or overstock situations."

Description

Automated Data Synchronization ensures that historical sales data from both online and offline channels is automatically collected and consolidated for analysis. This requirement will enable Predictive Trend Forecasting to operate efficiently, relying on accurate and up-to-date data to generate reliable predictions. The integration of this feature within InventaPro will significantly enhance the accuracy of demand forecasts, reduce manual data entry errors, and save time for Inventory Analysts, allowing them to focus on strategic decision-making. Additionally, this synchronization capability will support real-time analysis, providing dynamic insights into changing market trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated collection and synchronization of historical sales data from online and offline channels for analysis.

Given that the system is set up for data synchronization, when historical sales data is generated from both online and offline channels, then the system should automatically collect and consolidate this data without manual intervention, ensuring 100% accuracy in the dataset.

Validation of real-time analysis and insights generated from synchronized data.

Given that data synchronization has been completed, when an Inventory Analyst accesses the dashboard, then they should see real-time insights generated from the integrated sales data, with a time lag of no more than 5 minutes after data collection.

Evaluation of data integrity and accuracy post-synchronization.

Given that the synchronization process has run, when historical sales data is analyzed, then at least 95% of the data points should match the original sales records, indicating successful data integrity during synchronization.

Ability to handle large volumes of sales data during synchronization.

Given that there are significant sales events (e.g., sale promotions), when historical sales data for the last month is synchronized, then the system should efficiently process and synchronize data for at least 10,000 transactions without performance degradation.

Automated alerts for data synchronization failures or inconsistencies.

Given that a data synchronization attempt is underway, when there is an error in data collection or consolidation, then the system should automatically generate an alert to the Inventory Analyst within 1 minute of the failure.

Integration of third-party e-commerce platform sales data into the system for synchronization.

Given that a third-party e-commerce platform is connected to InventaPro, when new sales data is recorded on the platform, then the data should synchronize with InventaPro automatically within 10 minutes, keeping inventory levels updated.

User interface feedback and logs during and after the synchronization process.

Given that the synchronization process is occurring, when the user checks the sync status on the dashboard, then they should receive real-time feedback on the progress of the sync and a completion log outlining any errors within 1 hour of sync completion.

Dynamic Reporting Dashboard

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to have a customizable reporting dashboard that displays real-time data on inventory performance so that I can quickly analyze trends and make informed decisions regarding stock levels."

Description

The Dynamic Reporting Dashboard aims to provide Inventory Analysts with a visually appealing and user-friendly interface that presents real-time analytics on inventory performance, including sales trends, stock levels, and forecast accuracy. This dashboard will integrate various data visualization tools, allowing users to filter and customize reports based on specific parameters such as time periods, product categories, and sales channels. This requirement is critical for making informed decisions based on actionable insights, improving overall inventory management efficiency, and enhancing the user experience for Inventory Analysts who need quick access to essential data.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Loading and Responsiveness

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard, When the dashboard is loaded, Then it should display within 3 seconds and remain responsive during interactions such as filtering and customizing reports.

Data Visualization Accuracy

Given an Inventory Analyst is viewing the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard, When they select a specific product category and time period, Then the dashboard should accurately reflect the sales trends and stock levels for the selected parameters based on the latest available data.

Custom Report Generation

Given an Inventory Analyst is using the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard, When they apply specific filters to generate a report, Then the dashboard should create a downloadable report in PDF format that matches the selected filters within 5 seconds.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

Given the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard is being used, When an Inventory Analyst synchronizes data from an e-commerce platform, Then the dashboard should accurately reflect updated inventory levels and sales data in real-time.

User Interface Intuitiveness

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard for the first time, When they navigate through the dashboard, Then they should complete at least three different report customizations without any additional training or assistance required.

Forecast Accuracy Display

Given an Inventory Analyst views the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard, When they examine the forecast accuracy section, Then the dashboard should display forecast accuracy percentages calculated from the last 6 months of sales data correctly.

Mobile Device Compatibility

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Dynamic Reporting Dashboard on a mobile device, When they attempt to view the dashboard, Then the interface should be responsive and all functionalities should be accessible within the constraints of the mobile layout.

Alert Notification System

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive alerts when stock levels are critically low or excessively high so that I can take swift action to address potential inventory issues before they affect sales."

Description

The Alert Notification System is designed to provide timely alerts and notifications to Inventory Analysts regarding significant changes in inventory levels, such as impending stockouts or excessive surplus inventory. This feature will utilize thresholds set by users to trigger notifications via email or in-app messaging. Its implementation will help professionals stay proactive in inventory management and make quick adjustments to ordering strategies as needed. The Alert Notification System not only serves as a safeguard against common inventory pitfalls but also increases responsiveness and agility in inventory operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst receives an alert notification when stock levels of a high-demand product fall below a predefined threshold, triggering immediate action to reorder stock.

Given an Inventory Analyst has set a low stock threshold for a specific product, when the inventory level falls below this threshold, then an alert notification should be sent to the Inventory Analyst via email and in-app messaging.

Inventory Analyst receives an alert notification when surplus inventory exceeds a specified level for seasonal products, allowing proactive inventory adjustments.

Given an Inventory Analyst has established a surplus threshold for seasonal products, when the inventory level exceeds this threshold, then the system should send an alert notification to the Inventory Analyst.

Upon receiving an alert notification, the Inventory Analyst is able to access relevant sales data immediately to inform their decision-making.

Given an Inventory Analyst receives an alert notification, when they click on the notification, then they should be directed to a detailed view of the relevant sales data associated with that inventory item.

Inventory Analysts can customize the alert thresholds for various products based on their unique inventory needs.

Given an Inventory Analyst is within the settings menu, when they adjust the alert threshold for a specific product, then the change should be saved and reflected in future alert notifications.

The notification system logs all alerts sent to ensure that Inventory Analysts can review actions taken based on these notifications.

Given an alert notification is sent, when the notification is logged, then an entry should be created in the system log indicating the time, type of alert, and the product associated with the alert.

Inventory Analysts receive a daily summary report that includes all alerts triggered in the previous day for their review.

Given an Inventory Analyst has subscribed to daily reports, when the report is generated, then it should include all alerts triggered in the previous day alongside actionable insights.

Predictive Analytics Engine

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want a predictive analytics engine that processes various data inputs to forecast future demand accurately so that I can prepare our inventory levels accordingly and respond to market changes effectively."

Description

The Predictive Analytics Engine serves as the core of the Predictive Trend Forecasting feature, utilizing advanced machine learning algorithms to analyze multiple variables affecting inventory needs, including historical sales data, seasonality, and market trends. This requirement is essential for delivering precise predictions about future product demand. The engine should adapt over time, learning from past decisions to refine its forecasting accuracy further. This feature will empower Inventory Analysts to establish data-driven strategies aimed at optimizing stock levels and maximizing sales opportunities with minimal risk of stockouts or overstock.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst accesses the Predictive Analytics Engine to forecast demand for the upcoming seasonal sale period based on historical sales data.

Given the Inventory Analyst inputs sales data from the previous year into the Predictive Analytics Engine, when the system processes the data, then it should generate a forecast report that predicts sales trends with at least 85% accuracy based on historical patterns.

An Inventory Analyst reviews the predictive trends generated by the engine for the upcoming quarter

Given the predictive reports generated by the engine, when the Inventory Analyst reviews all insights, then they should find actionable data that identifies at least three specific inventory adjustments necessary to meet forecasted demand.

The Predictive Analytics Engine processes new sales data to adjust existing forecasts.

Given that new sales data is uploaded to the system, when the Predictive Analytics Engine recalculates forecasts, then the adjusted forecasts should reflect the changes within two hours and maintain a forecast accuracy of at least 90% compared to actual sales.

Inventory Analysts use the forecasting engine to prepare stock replenishment orders.

Given the predictive forecasts generated by the engine, when the Inventory Analyst prepares stock replenishment orders, then the orders should align with the forecasted demand, ensuring that overstock levels do not exceed 10% of predicted needs.

The system adapts and improves its forecasting accuracy by learning from past decisions.

Given that the system has access to both historical sales data and recent outcomes, when the Predictive Analytics Engine executes its learning algorithm, then it should demonstrate a 5% improvement in forecasting accuracy over previous predictions after three iterations of learning with new data.

An Inventory Analyst checks the system's performance metrics after a forecasting cycle.

Given that the forecasting cycle has completed, when the Inventory Analyst accesses the system's performance metrics, then they should see a dashboard displaying at least five key performance indicators (KPIs) related to forecast accuracy, stock levels, and sales trends, all updated in real time.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an Inventory Manager, I want InventaPro to integrate with our e-commerce platform so that I can automatically receive real-time inventory updates without manual intervention, helping me maintain accurate stock levels at all times."

Description

Integration with E-commerce Platforms is a vital requirement that facilitates seamless data exchange between InventaPro and popular e-commerce solutions. It ensures that real-time data on product sales and inventory levels is automatically reflected in the inventory management system, allowing for accurate forecasting and stock management. This integration will improve operational efficiency and significantly reduce the time spent on manual updates, providing users with the advantage of up-to-date information that is critical for effective inventory decisions and enhancing the ability to capitalize on sales trends across platforms.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Shopify platform for automated inventory synchronization.

Given that a retailer has an active Shopify account, When a product is sold on Shopify, Then the corresponding inventory count in InventaPro should decrease automatically by the sold quantity in real-time.

Integration with WooCommerce for seamless order management.

Given that a retailer uses WooCommerce, When an order is placed on WooCommerce, Then the order details, including product SKU and quantity, should be updated in InventaPro automatically.

Integration with Magento for updated sales reporting.

Given that a retailer has configured their Magento account with InventaPro, When a product is returned on Magento, Then the inventory count in InventaPro should increase by the returned quantity immediately.

Managing stock levels in InventaPro in response to eBay listings.

Given that an item is listed on eBay, When the inventory level of that item drops below a predefined threshold in InventaPro, Then a low stock alert should be triggered and sent via email to the inventory manager.

Real-time inventory updates from multiple sales channels.

Given that a retailer has integrated both an online store and brick-and-mortar store with InventaPro, When a sale occurs in either channel, Then the inventory levels in InventaPro should reflect the sale within 5 minutes.

Ensuring accuracy of synchronized inventory data between platforms.

Given that the retailer has performed a manual inventory check, When comparing the inventory levels in InventaPro to those on the connected e-commerce platforms, Then the inventory levels should match within a 95% accuracy threshold.

User-friendly dashboard displaying integration status and error alerts.

Given that a retailer accesses the InventaPro dashboard, When the integration with any e-commerce platform fails, Then an error message should be prominently displayed on the dashboard for immediate resolution.

Visual Performance Analytics

Visual Performance Analytics transforms complex data into intuitive visual reports, highlighting patterns and trends in stock performance. By enabling Inventory Analysts to visualize critical metrics, this feature enhances understanding and supports data-driven decision-making.

Requirements

Data Visualization Tools

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to use data visualization tools to create custom reports so that I can easily identify trends and patterns in inventory performance."

Description

The Data Visualization Tools requirement entails the integration of advanced charting and graphing capabilities into the Visual Performance Analytics feature. This will allow Inventory Analysts to create customized visual reports that can display various metrics related to inventory performance, such as sales trends, stock levels, turnover rates, and demand forecasts. By being able to visualize data in different formats (e.g., bar charts, pie charts, line graphs), users will gain a deeper understanding of inventory dynamics, enabling them to make informed decisions that enhance stock management. This requirement is crucial for translating complex datasets into user-friendly visuals that support quicker and clearer analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst creates a customized visual report to analyze sales trends over the last quarter.

Given that the Inventory Analyst has access to the Data Visualization Tools and has selected the sales data, when they choose the 'Line Graph' option for visualization, then the system should generate a line graph displaying sales trends accurately for the selected quarter.

An Inventory Analyst wants to compare stock levels across different product categories.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is using the Data Visualization Tools, when they select multiple product categories and opt for a 'Bar Chart', then a bar chart should be displayed that accurately compares the stock levels of the selected categories side by side.

The Inventory Analyst needs to present inventory turnover rates to stakeholders using an intuitive visual.

Given that the Inventory Analyst has accessed the Data Visualization Tools, when they select 'Pie Chart' for turnover rates, then the system should create a pie chart that effectively visualizes the turnover rates for each product category, allowing for easy interpretation.

An Inventory Analyst analyzes forecasted demand for seasonal products over the next quarter.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is using the Data Visualization Tools, when they apply the 'Forecast' function and select 'Column Chart', then the system should generate a column chart that illustrates the forecasted demand for each seasonal product for the next quarter.

Inventory Analysts wants to review historical data for inventory performance over the past year.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is utilizing the Data Visualization Tools, when they request a report on 'Historical Performance' and choose 'Multi-Line Graph', then the system should produce a multi-line graph that shows historical inventory performance across different metrics over the past year.

An Inventory Analyst collaborates with a team to assess the current stock against sales forecasts.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is within the Data Visualization Tools, when they choose the 'Dashboard View' option, then the dashboard should display real-time stock levels against sales forecasts visually, aiding in collaborative decision-making.

Real-Time Data Updates

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want real-time data updates so that I can make timely decisions based on the latest inventory and sales information."

Description

The Real-Time Data Updates requirement ensures that the Visual Performance Analytics feature reflects the most up-to-date inventory and sales data as it changes. This functionality will provide Inventory Analysts with immediate access to current metrics without delay, enabling them to react swiftly to market fluctuations or stock changes. Leveraging real-time data updates will improve decision-making accuracy and responsiveness, which will ultimately reduce the risk of overstocking or stockouts. This requirement emphasizes the necessity for seamless data integration with various sales channels.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst accesses the Visual Performance Analytics dashboard during a peak sales period to monitor real-time stock levels and sales data.

Given an Inventory Analyst is logged into the InventaPro platform, when they open the Visual Performance Analytics feature, then they will see updated inventory and sales data within 5 seconds of the most recent change.

An Inventory Analyst receives an alert for a sudden increase in sales of a specific product, prompting them to check the Visual Performance Analytics for real-time insights.

Given an alert is triggered for increased sales of a product, when the Inventory Analyst views the Visual Performance Analytics, then the dashboard should display the most current sales data without any manual refresh required.

The Inventory Analyst reviews weekly performance reports and needs to validate that the data included is accurate and current.

Given the Inventory Analyst generates a performance report, when they compare the report metrics with real-time data in the Visual Performance Analytics, then the data points should match without discrepancies.

An Inventory Analyst is monitoring stock levels before placing a new order based on recent sales trends.

Given the Inventory Analyst accesses the stock level data in Visual Performance Analytics, when they view the stock metrics, then the system should reflect any stock level changes in real-time, allowing for accurate ordering decisions.

During a holiday sales event, an Inventory Analyst must quickly assess stock availability for multiple product lines.

Given the holiday sales event is in progress, when the Inventory Analyst accesses Visual Performance Analytics, then they should see a dashboard with live updates showing stock levels for all active product lines updated within 10 seconds of market activity.

Automated Reporting

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want automated reporting to save time on generating reports so that I can focus on analyzing data and making strategic decisions."

Description

The Automated Reporting requirement involves the creation of a system that automatically generates performance analytics reports at designated intervals (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly). This feature will save time for Inventory Analysts by eliminating the need for manual compilation of data and generation of reports. By automating the reporting process, users can focus more on analysis and strategy rather than routine tasks, thus enhancing productivity and strategic decision-making. The automated reports should be customizable to ensure they meet the unique needs of different retailers and stakeholders.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated reporting generation for daily performance analytics.

Given the reporting schedule is set for daily generation, When the designated time is reached, Then an automated performance analytics report is generated and sent to the specified email recipients.

Customizable report parameters for different stakeholders.

Given a user selects specific metrics to include in the report, When the user saves the report settings, Then the system retains the customization for future automated reports.

Integration with e-commerce platforms for real-time data.

Given the integration with the selected e-commerce platform is enabled, When the automated report is generated, Then the report accurately reflects the sales data from the platform within the defined reporting period.

Monthly summary report reflecting overall inventory performance.

Given the reporting frequency is set to monthly, When the first day of the next month arrives, Then an aggregated report of the previous month's inventory performance is generated and sent to designated users.

Error handling in report generation process.

Given there is an error in data retrieval from the database, When the automated report generation process is initiated, Then the system logs the error and sends a notification email to the administrator.

User-friendly interface for adjusting report frequency.

Given a user accesses the reporting settings, When the user selects a new frequency option and saves changes, Then the system updates the reporting schedule accordingly and confirms the changes to the user.

Accessibility of generated reports in different formats.

Given a user chooses to receive the report in a specific format, When the report is generated, Then it is available for download in the selected format (e.g., PDF, Excel).

Comparative Analysis Features

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want comparative analysis features so that I can identify seasonal patterns and make informed decisions regarding inventory adjustments."

Description

The Comparative Analysis Features requirement will facilitate the comparison of different inventory metrics over custom time periods. Users will be able to visualize side-by-side comparisons of performance data, such as sales of similar products, seasonal trends, and inventory turnover across different categories or timeframes. This functionality will help Inventory Analysts identify seasonal risks and opportunities more effectively, ultimately leading to better-stocked shelves and improved profitability. It's vital for the tool to provide flexible filtering and comparison options according to user preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst compares seasonal sales data for similar product categories to identify trends and adjust stocking strategies accordingly.

Given the user selects two product categories from the dashboard, When they set the comparison period and apply the filters, Then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of sales metrics for the selected categories, with visual indicators for any significant differences or trends.

User filters inventory turnover rates across different time frames to evaluate the performance of underperforming products.

Given the user specifies a custom time frame and selects categories for comparison, When they generate the report, Then the feature should present inventory turnover rates with graphical representations for each selected category, allowing for quick visual assessment.

Inventory Analyst needs to visualize the impact of promotional events on sales performance across similar products.

Given the user selects a specific promotional event date, When they choose similar products to compare, Then the system should illustrate, using charts, the performance metrics before, during, and after the promotional event for each product, enabling effective analysis.

User wants to evaluate the seasonal risk of stockouts by comparing historical sales data for peak seasons against current inventory levels.

Given the user accesses the comparative analysis feature, When they select historical data for peak season comparing it against current inventory levels, Then the output should highlight any potential risks of stockout with recommended action points.

Inventory Analyst needs to track the success of multiple products in a new category over the first quarter after launch.

Given the user specifies a comparison for products launched in the last quarter, When they generate the report, Then the system should provide comparative sales data of all products in the new category, highlighting top performers and underperformers with visual aids.

User-Friendly Interface

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want a user-friendly interface so that I can easily navigate the analytics tools without any prior training."

Description

The User-Friendly Interface requirement focuses on designing a clean, intuitive user experience for the Visual Performance Analytics feature. Enhancing the usability of the feature will empower Inventory Analysts of varying technical proficiency to navigate the tool with ease, helping them access necessary analytics quickly and efficiently. The interface should be visually appealing and facilitate easy data interpretation, ensuring that analysts can derive insights with minimal training. This requirement underscores the need for a responsive layout that works seamlessly across devices, such as tablets and desktops.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst navigates the Visual Performance Analytics feature to analyze stock performance trends during a quarterly review meeting.

Given the Inventory Analyst is logged into the dashboard, when they select the Visual Performance Analytics section, then the interface should load within 3 seconds and display an overview of stock performance metrics.

An Inventory Analyst uses the Visual Performance Analytics feature on a tablet while on-the-go to update stock levels based on sales data.

Given the Inventory Analyst has opened the Visual Performance Analytics on a tablet, when they interact with the touch screen to view metrics, then all interactive elements should be responsive and function without lag.

The Visual Performance Analytics dashboard is accessed by an Inventory Analyst who needs to compare stock levels from different periods.

Given the Inventory Analyst navigates to the comparison feature, when they select two distinct time periods, then the interface should visually present a side-by-side comparison of stock levels.

An Inventory Analyst provides feedback on the user interface of the Visual Performance Analytics after a training session.

Given the Inventory Analyst has completed training, when they rate the ease of use of the interface on a scale of 1-5, then at least 80% of users should rate it as a 4 or higher.

A new user accesses the Visual Performance Analytics feature for the first time to analyze stock data.

Given the new user opens the Visual Performance Analytics feature, when they follow the guided tour, then they should complete it with at least 90% of the essential functionalities understood within 10 minutes.

Customizable Dashboard Widgets

Customizable Dashboard Widgets allow Inventory Analysts to tailor their dashboard view to focus on the most relevant metrics and insights. This feature increases user engagement and efficiency by ensuring that analysts can quickly access the information they deem most critical to their roles.

Requirements

Drag-and-Drop Widget Customization

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to customize my dashboard using drag-and-drop widgets so that I can focus on the metrics that matter most to my analysis and decision-making process."

Description

The Drag-and-Drop Widget Customization requirement allows Inventory Analysts to effortlessly arrange their dashboard widgets according to their preferences. Users can easily add, remove, or reposition widgets on their dashboard with intuitive drag-and-drop functionality. This customization capability enhances user experience by facilitating quick access to vital metrics and tailored insights, ultimately boosting operational efficiency. It integrates seamlessly with the existing dashboard structure and real-time data updates, ensuring that analysts have a personalized workspace that reflects their most pertinent analytical needs.

Acceptance Criteria

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to rearrange my dashboard widgets to prioritize the most critical metrics during peak sales periods.

Given I am logged into my InventaPro account, when I click and hold a widget, then I should be able to drag it to a new location on the dashboard and see it repositioned immediately without refreshing the page.

As a user, I want to remove unnecessary dashboard widgets to declutter my workspace.

Given I have at least one widget on my dashboard, when I click the 'remove' button on a widget, then the widget should disappear from my dashboard without affecting other widgets.

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to add new widgets that display relevant metrics for my analysis.

Given I am on the dashboard, when I select a widget from the available options and click 'add', then the new widget should appear on my dashboard, displaying the selected metrics correctly.

As a user, I want my widget arrangements to be saved, so I don’t have to rearrange them every time I log in.

Given I have arranged my dashboard widgets, when I log out and log back in, then my previous widget arrangement should be restored exactly as I left it.

As an Inventory Analyst, I want to ensure that the widget data updates in real-time following any customization changes.

Given I have customized my dashboard with multiple widgets, when I make changes to the underlying data, then all widgets should refresh and display the updated metrics within a few seconds.

As a user, I want to see a confirmation message when I successfully save my dashboard customization.

Given I have rearranged or added widgets, when I click the 'save' button, then I should see a confirmation message indicating that my changes have been saved successfully.

Widget Filtering Options

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to filter the data within each dashboard widget so that I can analyze the information that is most relevant to my current inventory challenges."

Description

The Widget Filtering Options requirement provides advanced filtering capabilities for dashboard widgets. This feature enables Inventory Analysts to filter displayed data within each widget based on specific criteria such as date ranges, product categories, or stock levels. This functionality allows users to dive deeper into the data, examining trends and insights that are most relevant to their current tasks. By providing tailored views within each widget, this feature enhances the overall data analysis process and ensures that analysts can make informed decisions based on precise parameters.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst Needs to Filter Widget Data by Date Range for Analysis

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the customizable dashboard, When they select the date range filter on a widget, Then only the data corresponding to the selected date range should be displayed in that widget.

Inventory Analyst Wants to Filter Widget Data by Product Category

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the customizable dashboard, When they select the product category filter on a widget, Then only the products belonging to the selected category should be visible in that widget.

Inventory Analyst Requires Filtering by Stock Levels for Inventory Management

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the customizable dashboard, When they set the stock level filter on a widget to show low stock, Then the widget should only display items that are below the defined low stock threshold.

Inventory Analyst Expects Multiple Filters to Work Simultaneously

Given the Inventory Analyst has selected both a date range and a product category filter, When they view the widget, Then the displayed data should only reflect records that meet both filtering criteria simultaneously.

Inventory Analyst Tests Resetting Filters on a Widget

Given the Inventory Analyst has applied multiple filters on a widget, When they click the reset buttons, Then all filters should be cleared and the widget should display all data without any filtering.

Inventory Analyst Checks for Performance with Filters Applied

Given the Inventory Analyst has applied filters to a widget, When they analyze the performance of the dashboard, Then the system should respond within 2 seconds, ensuring smooth performance under filtered conditions.

Inventory Analyst Validates Filtered Data Accuracy within Widgets

Given the Inventory Analyst has applied a filter on a specific widget, When they cross-reference the displayed data with the source inventory data, Then all displayed data must match the criteria set by the applied filters.

Real-Time Data Sync

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to see real-time data on my dashboard widgets so that I can react quickly to changes in inventory levels and make informed decisions immediately."

Description

The Real-Time Data Sync requirement ensures that all dashboard widgets reflect the most current inventory data without delay. This feature keeps the dashboard updated with real-time information, allowing Inventory Analysts to make timely decisions based on the latest stock levels, sales trends, and forecasts. The integration with the cloud-based inventory management system guarantees that any changes in inventory or sales are instantaneously reflected, providing an accurate representation of the business state. This capability significantly enhances operational decision-making and responsiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time inventory updates for multiple locations during peak sales events.

Given that the inventory databases are integrated, When a sale is made at any location, Then the inventory levels across all dashboard widgets should update within 2 seconds reflecting the new stock levels.

Inventory Analyst reviews the sales forecast and adjusts stock levels accordingly.

Given that the dashboard widget displays current stock levels and forecasted sales, When an analyst accesses the dashboard, Then all data should be refreshed and accurate within 3 seconds of any changes in the inventory metrics.

Monitoring stock levels during a promotional campaign to prevent stockouts.

Given that real-time data sync is enabled, When an inventory level falls below the set threshold during a promotion, Then a notification should be sent to the Inventory Analyst in less than 5 seconds, and the dashboard should reflect the updated levels immediately.

Comparing historical sales data with current inventory to assess performance.

Given that an Inventory Analyst is viewing the dashboard, When they select the historical sales widget, Then the data should reflect all sales up to the last completed day and sync updates should be less than 5 seconds for any new sales data.

Integrating real-time data sync with popular e-commerce platforms during a high-volume sales period.

Given that the system integrates with e-commerce platforms, When a change in inventory happens due to an online sale, Then the dashboard should reflect this change in under 2 seconds to ensure data consistency across platforms.

Verifying the accuracy of inventory data displayed on the dashboard.

Given that the dashboard is displaying inventory data, When an Inventory Analyst cross-verifies the dashboard data with the backend inventory database, Then 100% of the displayed data should match the backend records.

Save and Load Custom Dashboards

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to save my dashboard configurations so that I can easily switch between different analysis tasks without losing my customized layouts."

Description

The Save and Load Custom Dashboards requirement allows Inventory Analysts to save their personalized dashboard configurations for future use. Users can create multiple dashboard layouts tailored to different tasks or projects and load them as needed. This capability streamlines the workflow by enabling analysts to switch contexts efficiently without having to recreate their preferred settings each time they log in. This feature promotes continuity and user satisfaction, ensuring that the dashboard remains a trusted tool in daily operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analysts log into InventaPro and navigate to the dashboard where they want to save their preferred layout for quick access in future sessions.

Given a customized dashboard layout, when the user clicks the 'Save Dashboard' button, then a prompt to name the dashboard appears, and upon entering a name and confirming, the dashboard configuration is saved successfully without errors.

An Inventory Analyst needs to switch between two different dashboard layouts while working on distinct projects with different metrics.

Given that multiple dashboard configurations exist for the user, when the user selects a different layout from the 'Load Dashboard' dropdown menu, then the new layout loads with all previously set preferences intact immediately without loss of data.

An Inventory Analyst is revisiting their saved dashboards after a week to continue their analysis from a previous session.

Given that dashboards have been saved previously, when the user accesses the 'Saved Dashboards' section, then all saved dashboard names are displayed, and the user can select any one to load, and it loads correctly with saved settings for easy analysis.

An Inventory Analyst accidentally overwrites a previously saved dashboard and wishes to retrieve the last version.

Given that a dashboard was saved and later modified, when the user clicks 'Restore Previous Version', then the dashboard reverts to the last saved settings prior to modification successfully without errors.

A new Inventory Analyst logs into the system for the first time and wants to familiarize themselves with the functionalities of dashboard saving and loading.

Given a new user account, when the user navigates to the dashboard, then an introductory prompt appears explaining how to save and load dashboard configurations with a link to a detailed guide, enhancing user onboarding experience.

Inventory Analysts have specific performance metrics they want displayed prominently, and they customize their dashboard accordingly.

Given the customizable options are available, when an analyst modifies the widget configurations and saves the dashboard, then the layout reflects the selected metrics accurately, ensuring that the customization feature meets user expectations.

An Inventory Analyst is using a shared account and wishes to verify that their personal dashboard does not interfere with other users' settings.

Given that multiple users can log into the shared account, when one analyst saves their dashboard, then it must be saved under their unique user profile, ensuring that each user's settings remain separate and intact without conflict.

Responsive Mobile Dashboard

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to access my dashboard on my mobile device so that I can stay updated with inventory data even when I'm away from my desk."

Description

The Responsive Mobile Dashboard requirement ensures that the customizable dashboard widgets are accessible and functional on mobile devices. This feature allows Inventory Analysts to view and interact with their dashboards on-the-go, ensuring that they can monitor inventory performance and make decisions from anywhere. The mobile interface will be optimized for various screen sizes, providing a seamless experience that maintains the integrity of the data presentation while adapting to mobile browsing constraints. This feature increases operational flexibility and supports real-time decision-making outside the office.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst accesses the mobile dashboard while on a sales floor to check real-time inventory levels.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is logged into their account on a mobile device, when they navigate to the mobile dashboard, then they should see all customizable widgets displaying real-time inventory data without orientation issues.

A retailer needs to adjust stock levels during a sale event from their mobile device.

Given that the mobile dashboard is opened on a smartphone, when the Inventory Analyst selects a customizable widget to update stock levels, then they should be able to successfully input new stock values and receive a confirmation of the update with no errors.

An Inventory Analyst reviews historical data trends on their mobile device while commuting.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is viewing the mobile dashboard, when they access the historical data widget, then they should be able to filter the data by date ranges and see updated visual graphs without lag or performance issues.

An Inventory Analyst checks notifications for low stock alerts while away from the office.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is on their mobile device, when they open the mobile dashboard, then they should see a notification alert for any stock that falls below the defined threshold displayed prominently on their dashboard.

An Inventory Analyst customizes their mobile dashboard layout on their tablet to prioritize certain metrics.

Given that the Inventory Analyst has selected the customization option on their mobile dashboard, when they rearrange widgets and save the changes, then the mobile dashboard should reflect the new layout correctly upon the next load without data loss.

An Inventory Analyst uses the mobile dashboard to compare online and offline sales data during a client meeting.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is logged into the mobile dashboard during the meeting, when they click on the sales comparison widget, then the data should accurately show a side-by-side comparison of online vs offline sales for the selected timeframe and be clearly readable.

An Inventory Analyst receives real-time updates while traveling about critical inventory metrics through the mobile dashboard.

Given that the Inventory Analyst has enabled notifications in the mobile dashboard, when critical inventory metrics change, then the Analyst should receive push notifications with brief details on their mobile device promptly.

Widget Performance Analytics

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to analyze the performance of my dashboard widgets so that I can determine which metrics are most useful and refine my dashboard layout accordingly."

Description

The Widget Performance Analytics requirement provides analytics tools to evaluate the performance of each dashboard widget. This feature allows Inventory Analysts to track usage metrics such as engagement frequency and data accuracy, offering insights into which widgets are most beneficial and which may require enhancements. By providing performance analytics, users can make informed decisions about their dashboard customization and functionality, ultimately optimizing their dashboard experience based on actionable data insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst views the Widget Performance Analytics to assess the engagement frequency of dashboard widgets after a week of usage.

Given an Inventory Analyst is on the dashboard, when they access the Widget Performance Analytics, then they should see a report detailing the engagement frequency for each widget over the past week, accurately reflecting usage data.

The Inventory Analyst reviews the data accuracy metrics of each widget on the Widget Performance Analytics page to determine which widget may need improvements.

Given an Inventory Analyst is on the Widget Performance Analytics page, when they view the data accuracy metrics, then they must see a percentage for each widget indicating the accuracy of the data presented, with a threshold set at 90% for optimal performance.

Inventory Analyst customizes their dashboard with widgets based on the performance analytics, aiming to optimize their workspace.

Given an Inventory Analyst has access to Widget Performance Analytics, when they select widgets based on their performance (high engagement, high accuracy), then they should successfully customize their dashboard with the selected widgets and save the configuration.

A report is generated to summarize the effectiveness of the top-performing and low-performing widgets over a month’s usage.

Given a month has passed since the widgets were deployed, when the Inventory Analyst runs the effectiveness report in Widget Performance Analytics, then they should generate a clear summary of the top-performing and low-performing widgets with usage metrics and recommendations for enhancements.

The Inventory Analyst observes real-time updates to engagement and accuracy metrics while continuously monitoring their dashboard.

Given an Inventory Analyst is actively viewing their dashboard, when any engagement or accuracy metrics change, then the corresponding data on Widget Performance Analytics should update in real time without requiring a page refresh.

Inventory Analyst seeks to compare the engagement metrics of two specific dashboard widgets to evaluate their effectiveness against each other.

Given an Inventory Analyst is viewing Widget Performance Analytics, when they select two specific widgets for comparison, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of engagement metrics displayed clearly for both widgets.

Actionable Insight Alerts

Actionable Insight Alerts notify Inventory Analysts of significant changes or anomalies in inventory performance, such as sudden drops in stock turnover or changes in demand trends. This proactive alert system helps analysts respond swiftly to potential issues, ensuring continuous inventory optimization.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Monitoring

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to have real-time visibility into current inventory levels so that I can make timely decisions on stock replenishment to meet customer demand."

Description

The Real-time Inventory Monitoring requirement enables Inventory Analysts to receive continuous updates on inventory levels, sales velocity, and turnover rates. This functionality ensures that retailers have a clear and up-to-date understanding of their stock status, helping them make informed decisions regarding stock replenishment or reductions. By integrating seamlessly with the existing dashboard, this feature supports proactive inventory management and enhances the overall efficiency of the inventory system, reducing the likelihood of overstock or stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

Receive alerts for significant inventory changes when stock turnover drops below a specified threshold.

Given I am an Inventory Analyst, When a stock turnover rate drops below set threshold, Then I should receive a notification alerting me of the change.

Monitor real-time updates on inventory levels to reflect changes in stock as sales occur.

Given I am logged into the InventaPro dashboard, When a sale occurs, Then the inventory level should update in real-time on the dashboard.

Provide alerts for demand trend changes that exceed a defined variance from average sales.

Given I am an Inventory Analyst, When demand trends change beyond a predefined variance from the average, Then I receive an alert notification detailing the change.

Ensure integration with e-commerce platforms for real-time inventory updates across channels.

Given I have configured the integration with an e-commerce platform, When a product is sold online, Then the inventory should deduct from both the online and offline stock levels instantly.

Allow Inventory Analysts to customize alert thresholds and parameters for specific products or categories.

Given I am an Inventory Analyst, When I set a custom alert threshold for a product, Then the system should respect this threshold and provide alerts as configured.

Log all alert notifications for compliance and historical analysis purposes.

Given I have received an alert, When I check the alert log, Then I should see a record of the notification along with details such as time and reason.

Enable a user-friendly interface for viewing and acknowledging alerts on the dashboard.

Given I am an Inventory Analyst, When I access the dashboard, Then I should see pending alerts in a user-friendly format that allows for easy acknowledgment and follow-up.

Customizable Alert Settings

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to customize my alert preferences so that I receive notifications that are relevant to my specific inventory management needs, minimizing distractions from non-critical updates."

Description

The Customizable Alert Settings requirement allows Inventory Analysts to tailor the types of alerts they receive based on specific thresholds or inventory performance metrics. This feature provides the flexibility needed for analysts to focus on critical issues relevant to their inventory strategy, enhancing their ability to respond effectively to changes. By allowing users to define their alert preferences, this feature increases the system's usability and effectiveness, ensuring that analysts are promptly informed about the most pertinent updates without being overwhelmed by unnecessary notifications.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst customizes alert settings for low stock levels.

Given the Inventory Analyst accesses the 'Alert Settings' page, when they select the 'Low Stock Level' option and input a threshold of 10 units, then the system should save this preference and send alerts for stock levels below 10 units.

Inventory Analyst adjusts alert settings for stock turnover rates.

Given the Inventory Analyst selects the 'Stock Turnover Rate' alert category, when they set a minimum turnover threshold of 5 units per week, then the system should send alerts for any weeks where the turnover falls below 5 units.

Inventory Analyst receives alerts based on customized settings.

Given the Inventory Analyst has configured alerts for low stock and low turnover rates, when inventory data triggers both conditions, then the system should send simultaneous notifications to the analyst’s dashboard and email.

Inventory Analyst modifies alert settings to include demand trend changes.

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the 'Alert Settings' page, when they check the box for 'Demand Trend Changes' and set the threshold for significant changes to 20%, then the system should confirm the preferences are updated successfully.

Inventory Analyst opts out of unnecessary alerts.

Given the Inventory Analyst has previously set alerts for various inventory metrics, when they uncheck the box for 'Low Stock Alert', then they should no longer receive notifications for low stock levels.

Inventory Analyst views and edits all alert preferences in one place.

Given the Inventory Analyst accesses the 'Alert Settings' dashboard, when they click on 'Edit Preferences', then they should see a comprehensive list of all current alert settings displayed clearly for modification.

Inventory Analyst confirms changes to alert settings and receives confirmation.

Given the Inventory Analyst saves changes to their alert settings, when they receive a confirmation message indicating successful updates, then those changes should take effect immediately without delays.

Integration with Analytics Tools

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to connect our alert system with analytics tools so that I can analyze performance trends in more detail and understand the root causes of alerted issues."

Description

The Integration with Analytics Tools requirement involves linking the Actionable Insight Alerts feature with various analytics tools, enabling Inventory Analysts to perform deeper analysis on inventory performance trends and anomalies. By integrating with existing analytical software, this feature supports comprehensive reporting and trend analysis, allowing users to correlate alerts with other data sets. This capability enhances decision-making by providing better context for the issues flagged by alerts, ultimately yielding insights that drive inventory optimizations and strategic planning.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with popular analytics platforms like Google Analytics, Tableau, and Power BI is successfully established by the users, allowing them to visualize alerts in those tools.

Given the action alert is triggered in InventaPro, when the user accesses Google Analytics, then the corresponding alert data should be available within the analytics dashboard.

Inventory Analysts require the ability to filter and customize alert views for deeper analysis across various time frames.

Given an Inventory Analyst logs into InventaPro, when they navigate to the analytics tool integration settings, then they must be able to filter alerts by date, product category, and severity.

The system should display actionable insights alerts correlated with historical data, enabling analysts to see past trends alongside real-time alerts.

Given a real-time alert is generated, when the Inventory Analyst accesses the integrated analytics tool, then historical performance data must be displayed adjacent to the current alert for comparison.

Alerts must be automatically logged in the analytics tool for audit and tracking purposes, ensuring that performance issues can be reviewed later.

Given an alert is generated in InventaPro, when the analyst views their analytics dashboard, then the alert should be logged with a timestamp and relevant details for future reference.

The integration must allow the Inventory Analysts to set up notification preferences to tailor which alerts are sent to their chosen analytics tools.

Given an Inventory Analyst is configuring their alert settings, when they select specific alerts for integration, then the preferences should be saved, and only selected alerts should sync with analytics tools.

The system must ensure that alerts generated do not duplicate in the analytics tools, maintaining clarity and accuracy in the data reported.

Given multiple alerts are generated for similar inventory issues, when checked in the analytics tool, then there should be no duplicate entries present for the same issue within a specified time frame.

Users should have access to training resources to help them understand how to use the new integration features effectively.

Given the rollout of the analytics tool integration, when the users access the help section, then they must find comprehensive tutorials and documentation on using the integration features effectively.

Historical Data Insights

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to access historical data analytics alongside alert notifications so that I can better understand trends and make informed predictive inventory decisions."

Description

The Historical Data Insights requirement enables the Actionable Insight Alerts system to leverage historical inventory data to identify patterns and predict potential future anomalies. This capability empowers Inventory Analysts to not just react to current issues but also proactively manage inventory based on anticipated variances. By analyzing past performance data, this feature provides valuable insights that enhance forecasting accuracy and inventory strategies, reducing the dependency on reactive measures and improving overall inventory performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical data is used to analyze stock turnover rates over the past 6 months for a specific product category, helping the Inventory Analyst identify trends and potential stockout risks.

Given that the Inventory Analyst has access to the historical data dashboard, when they select a product category and review the past 6 months of stock turnover rates, then they should see a visual representation of trends and anomalies that indicate potential future stockout risks.

Actionable Insight Alerts notify Inventory Analysts of critical changes, such as a drop in sales velocity for a key product based on historical data insights.

Given that the Actionable Insight Alerts system is active, when a significant drop in sales velocity for a key product (e.g., a decrease of 30% over a week) is detected, then an alert should be triggered and sent to the designated Inventory Analyst's notification center.

The system leverages historical data to predict demand for seasonal products during a peak season based on past performance trends.

Given that the historical data is available for analysis, when the Inventory Analyst initiates a forecasting report for seasonal products, then the system should generate accurate demand predictions reflecting a 95% correlation to actual past sales data during the same period.

Inventory Analysts receive actionable alerts for abnormal increases in stock turnaround observed through historical data analysis, triggering proactive restock strategies.

Given that the proactive alert system has been configured, when a significant increase in stock turnover (e.g., over 50% in the last 7 days) occurs, then an actionable alert should be sent to the Inventory Analyst to recommend restocking actions based on historical inventory levels.

Historical data insights assist Inventory Analysts in adjusting reorder points for better stock management based on changing demand patterns.

Given that the Inventory Analyst is accessing the reorder point adjustment tool, when they apply historical demand trend insights to adjust reorder points, then the system should recalibrate the suggested reorder points reflecting changes in demand trends accurately.

Mobile Notifications

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive inventory alerts on my mobile device so that I can respond promptly to inventory changes during off-site hours."

Description

The Mobile Notifications requirement ensures that Inventory Analysts can receive alerts on their mobile devices, allowing them to remain informed about inventory changes while on the go. This feature enhances responsiveness and enables time-sensitive decisions to be made from anywhere, thus improving operational efficiency. By integrating with mobile platforms, this functionality ensures that analysts are continuously connected to the inventory system, allowing for immediate action as needed based on real-time updates.

Acceptance Criteria

Receiving mobile notifications for stock turnover drops.

Given an Inventory Analyst is using the InventaPro mobile application, when a significant drop in stock turnover occurs, then the analyst should receive a push notification within 5 minutes of the event.

Notifications for unexpected increases in product demand.

Given an Inventory Analyst has an active account, when there is an unexpected demand spike for a product, then the analyst should receive a mobile notification detailing the product and percentage change within 10 minutes.

Alerts for low stock levels throughout the day.

Given that an Inventory Analyst has set up low stock thresholds, when any product falls below the defined threshold, then the analyst should receive an alert on their mobile device immediately.

Configuration of mobile notification settings.

Given an Inventory Analyst is logged into the InventaPro app, when they navigate to the notification settings, then they should be able to customize which alerts they want to receive (stock turnover, demand changes, and low stock alerts).

Receiving alerts based on location.

Given an Inventory Analyst has enabled location-based alerts, when they enter a designated area (e.g., store location), then they should receive notifications related to inventory changes at that location.

Testing mobile notifications under different network conditions.

Given the Inventory Analyst is in an area with poor connectivity, when a significant inventory event occurs, then the analyst should receive the notification when connectivity is restored within a reasonable time frame (15 minutes).

Viewing historical notifications in the mobile app.

Given an Inventory Analyst is using the InventaPro mobile application, when they access the notification history feature, then they should be able to view past notifications and their timestamps organized chronologically.

Historical Performance Comparison

Historical Performance Comparison provides a framework for Inventory Analysts to compare current inventory performance against previous periods. By analyzing this data, users can identify improvement areas, evaluate the effectiveness of strategies over time, and make informed adjustments for future inventory planning.

Requirements

Dynamic Period Selection

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to select different historical periods for analysis so that I can assess my inventory performance against relevant timeframes and draw meaningful insights to inform future planning."

Description

The Dynamic Period Selection requirement enables users to select specific historical timeframes for performance comparison, such as monthly, quarterly, or annually. This functionality allows users to tailor their analysis to focus on relevant periods that align with their business cycles or promotional events. By providing the option to compare custom periods against the current performance, the feature enhances decision-making capabilities, enabling inventory analysts to derive insights that are pertinent to their strategic planning and forecasting.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a specific month from the Dynamic Period Selection dropdown to compare inventory performance against that month of the previous year, enabling targeted analysis of seasonal trends.

Given the Dynamic Period Selection feature is displayed, when the user selects a month and clicks 'Compare', then the system should display inventory performance data for the selected month of the previous year alongside current performance metrics, allowing for direct comparison.

Inventory analysts want to assess performance between two distinct quarterly periods to evaluate the effectiveness of a recent promotional strategy.

Given the Dynamic Period Selection interface is available, when the user selects two different quarters and initiates the comparison, then the system should generate a comparative analysis report showcasing the performance metrics for both selected quarters, highlighting key differences.

A user examines annual performance metrics and realizes it's essential to compare a custom six-month period against the last year’s figures to identify trends and plan inventory for the upcoming year.

Given the option for custom date selection is enabled, when the user inputs a start and end date for a six-month period and clicks 'Generate Report', then the system should display comprehensive performance data comparing the selected custom period against the same time frame from the previous year, formatted for easy analysis.

A retailer's stock levels fluctuate throughout the year; hence, they wish to analyze inventory performance during holiday seasons over the past three years to fine-tune future marketing efforts.

Given the holiday period options are available, when the user selects holiday performance for the last three years, then the system should present comparative data for those periods, allowing the user to visualize performance trends over this crucial sales timeframe.

An inventory analyst is preparing a quarterly report for management and needs to use the Dynamic Period Selection to provide valid comparisons for the previous quarter's inventory performance.

Given that the analyst has accessed the quarterly comparison feature, when they select the last quarter from the Dynamic Period Selection interface, then the system must retrieve and display performance metrics for that quarter accurately and promptly.

Visual Performance Graphs

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to see visual graphs representing inventory performance over time so that I can quickly identify trends and make informed decisions based on visualized data insights."

Description

This requirement involves the implementation of visually intuitive performance graphs within the Historical Performance Comparison feature. The graphs will illustrate key metrics such as sales volume, stock levels, and turnover rates over selected historical periods. By integrating clear and visually engaging representations of data, it aims to facilitate easier comprehension of trends and anomalies, empowering users to quickly identify performance improvements or declines. The visual elements will contribute to a more interactive user experience and enhance the overall effectiveness of inventory analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing Historical Performance Graphs for Analytical Review

Given an Inventory Analyst is logged into InventaPro, when they navigate to the Historical Performance Comparison feature, then they should see an option to select specific historical periods for comparison.

Visual Representation of Key Metrics

Given that the user has selected a historical period, when the visual performance graph is rendered, then it must display sales volume, stock levels, and turnover rates accurately for the chosen periods without any data loss.

Interactivity of Performance Graphs

Given that the performance graphs are displayed, when the user hovers over any data point on the graph, then a tooltip should appear, providing exact numerical values and percentage changes for that data point.

Exporting Graph Data for Reporting

Given the performance graphs are visualized, when the user clicks on the 'Export' function, then the graph data should be downloadable in CSV format with all relevant metrics included.

User Preferences for Graph Display Settings

Given that an Inventory Analyst is viewing the performance graphs, when they access display settings, then they should be able to customize graph types (bar, line, etc.) and time intervals (weekly, monthly, yearly) according to their preferences.

Real-time Data Updates in Performance Graphs

Given that the performance graphs are displayed, when new inventory data is entered into the system, then the graphs should update in real-time to reflect the most current metrics.

Help and Documentation for Performance Graphs

Given that a user is viewing the performance graphs, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then a help section should appear, providing explanations for each metric displayed and guidance on how to interpret the graphs.

Automated Insights and Recommendations

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive automated insights and recommendations based on historical performance so that I can implement effective strategies without having to analyze the data manually."

Description

The Automated Insights and Recommendations feature leverages AI to analyze the historical performance data and provide actionable recommendations to users. Based on the performance comparisons, the system can suggest areas for improvement, stock adjustments, or strategic initiatives tailored to the business's specific performance history. This requirement not only reduces analysis time for users but also ensures that they receive intelligent suggestions to optimize inventory management practices, further enhancing the feature's value.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Analyst accessing Automated Insights and Recommendations after analyzing inventory performance from the last quarter.

Given the performance data for the last quarter, when the Inventory Analyst clicks on the 'Automated Insights' button, then the system should display at least three actionable recommendations based on the historical data.

User navigates through the dashboard to view performance comparisons between current inventory levels and previous periods.

Given that the user is on the Historical Performance Comparison page, when they select a specific date range, then the system should show a comparison of key performance indicators (KPIs) for that period against the current period.

Inventory Analyst receiving suggestions for stock adjustments from the Automated Insights feature after reviewing performance data.

Given the Inventory Analyst has accessed the insights section, when the system analyzes the historical data, then it should suggest adjustments for at least two stock items that are either overstocked or understocked based on past performance trends.

User wants to evaluate the effectiveness of inventory strategies implemented in the past year.

Given the user is in the Historical Performance Comparison view, when they select the strategy evaluation option, then the system should provide a detailed report showing the impact of each strategy on inventory performance over the last year.

User interacts with AI-driven suggestions for improving inventory practices based on analyzed data.

Given the suggestions are presented, when the user selects a recommendation, then the system should provide detailed steps on how to implement the suggestion and the expected impact on inventory levels.

Comparative Metric Filters

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to filter comparison metrics so that I can focus on the most relevant data for my analysis, ensuring that the insights are tailored to my specific needs."

Description

The Comparative Metric Filters requirement allows users to filter performance comparisons by specific metrics such as sales, inventory levels, or profitability. By focusing on the metrics that matter most to their evaluation criteria, users can refine their analysis to uncover deeper insights. This targeted approach helps streamline the decision-making process, ensuring that inventory forecasting and strategy adjustments are guided by the most relevant information available.

Acceptance Criteria

Comparing current sales data against the sales data from the previous quarter to assess the effectiveness of marketing strategies.

Given that the user is on the Historical Performance Comparison dashboard, when they apply the 'Sales' metric filter, then only sales data for the current and previous quarter should be displayed, and the comparison should include total sales figures and percentage change.

Analyzing inventory levels over the past six months to identify trends in stock availability and potential overstock situations.

Given that the user accesses the Comparative Metric Filters, when they choose the 'Inventory Levels' metric, then the system should present a graphical comparison of inventory levels for the last six months, allowing for easy visualization of trends.

Evaluating profitability metrics to identify which products have driven the most profit over the last year for making future purchasing decisions.

Given the user has selected the 'Profitability' metric, when viewing the comparative metrics, then the application should enable filtering by product categories and display insights on average profit margins alongside total profits per category over the last year.

A user wants to create a report that shows how inventory performance changes align with sales promotions implemented in the last three months.

Given that the user is preparing a report, when they apply the 'Sales Promotions' filter in conjunction with 'Sales' and 'Inventory Levels' metrics, then the resulting data should accurately reflect inventory levels and sales figures during the promotional periods for analysis.

Analyzing performance metrics in order to benchmark against industry standards for inventory management.

Given that the user is on the Comparative Metric Filters page, when they apply filters for industry-standard metrics, then the data should include benchmarks from recognized industry reports, facilitating direct comparison with their current performance figures.

Downloadable Reports

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to download reports summarizing my performance comparisons so that I can share insights with my team and maintain organized records for future reference."

Description

The Downloadable Reports requirement enables users to generate and export comprehensive reports summarizing their historical performance comparisons in various formats (e.g., PDF, Excel). This feature will allow analysts to easily share findings with stakeholders or reference them for future reviews. By facilitating low-friction documentation of performance insights, it enhances the usability of the Historical Performance Comparison feature and ensures that data-driven decisions are well-documented and accessible.

Acceptance Criteria

Analyst generates a PDF report summarizing the historical performance comparisons for the last quarter to share with their team during a strategy review meeting.

Given the analyst has selected the time period and report format as PDF, when they click the 'Generate Report' button, then a PDF report should be created and downloadable with the correct historical performance data for the selected period.

User exports an Excel report containing historical inventory performance data for the past year to perform further analysis in a spreadsheet.

Given the user selects the time period as the past year and the report format as Excel, when they initiate the report generation, then an Excel file should be generated with all relevant historical performance metrics and be available for download.

Inventory manager requests a report on the inventory turnover ratio from the last month to present findings to the upper management team.

Given the inventory manager selects the last month as the reporting period and inventory turnover ratio as the metric, when they request the report generation, then a comprehensive report should be created highlighting the turnover ratio and available for download in their chosen format.

A team member needs to compare performance metrics between two different time periods and share the insights with the marketing team.

Given the team member has chosen two distinct time periods for comparison and selected the desired performance metrics, when they click on 'Compare and Generate Report', then a report reflecting the comparison should be generated and made downloadable in both PDF and Excel formats.

User encounters an error when generating a report and needs to troubleshoot the issue for effective reporting.

Given the user attempts to generate a report and encounters an error message, when the error occurs, then the system must log the error details and provide the user with a clear message indicating the nature of the error and recommendations for resolution.

Analyst wants to ensure that reports are formatted consistently across different periods and metrics before sharing with external stakeholders.

Given that the analyst generates reports from various time periods and metrics, when the reports are generated, then they should adhere to a standardized formatting guideline that includes headers, footers, and a visual style consistent across all report types.

Integrated Supplier Insights

Integrated Supplier Insights feature gathers data related to supplier performance and integrates it into the inventory dashboard. This enables Inventory Analysts to assess supplier reliability in conjunction with inventory metrics, facilitating better decision-making around stock replenishment and supplier partnerships.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Metrics

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to view supplier performance metrics on the dashboard so that I can make data-driven decisions regarding stock replenishment and supplier reliability."

Description

The Supplier Performance Metrics requirement allows the Integrated Supplier Insights feature to track and display essential supplier data, such as on-time delivery rates, order accuracy, and lead times. This functionality offers Inventory Analysts the ability to evaluate supplier reliability based on quantitative data, thus enhancing stock replenishment strategies and optimizing supply chain decisions. By integrating these metrics directly into the inventory dashboard, users can make informed decisions, reduce stockouts, and foster better supplier partnerships, ultimately contributing to improved inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Metrics Display in Dashboard

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Integrated Supplier Insights feature, when they navigate to the supplier performance metrics section, then they should see on-time delivery rates, order accuracy, and lead times displayed clearly in a user-friendly format.

Accuracy of Supplier Data

Given that supplier data has been input into the system, when the Inventory Analyst reviews the supplier performance metrics, then the displayed metrics for on-time delivery rates, order accuracy, and lead times must accurately reflect the data of the last three months.

Integration with E-Commerce Platforms

Given that the Integrated Supplier Insights feature is used in conjunction with e-commerce platforms, when an order is placed, then the supplier performance metrics should automatically update based on the latest order data, ensuring real-time tracking of supplier performance.

Visual Indicators for Supplier Performance

Given an Inventory Analyst is reviewing the supplier performance metrics, when the metrics are displayed, then visual indicators (e.g., green for good performance, red for poor performance) should be present to quickly convey supplier reliability at a glance.

Historical Comparison of Supplier Performance

Given an Inventory Analyst wishes to evaluate supplier reliability, when they select different suppliers to compare, then they should be able to see historical performance trends for on-time delivery rates and order accuracy over the past year.

User Feedback on Supplier Performance Data

Given the supplier performance metrics are displayed, when the Inventory Analyst examines the data, then they should be able to submit feedback or comments on the accuracy or usefulness of the metrics provided.

Notifications for Poor Supplier Performance

Given that supplier performance metrics are being monitored, when one supplier falls below a predefined threshold for on-time delivery rates or order accuracy, then the Inventory Analyst should receive an automated alert notification.

Real-Time Supplier Feedback Loop

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to give real-time feedback to suppliers through the dashboard so that I can quickly address product quality issues and improve supplier relationships."

Description

The Real-Time Supplier Feedback Loop requirement facilitates a communication channel that allows Inventory Analysts to provide immediate feedback to suppliers regarding product quality and service. By enabling a feedback mechanism integrated with the inventory management dashboard, this feature promotes proactive management of supplier relationships. It ensures that suppliers are informed of any issues promptly, fostering collaboration for continuous improvement. This real-time integration is vital for maintaining high inventory standards and ensuring optimal supplier performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Real-Time Feedback from Inventory Analysts to Suppliers

Given an inventory analyst accesses the supplier feedback feature, when they enter feedback and submit it, then the feedback should be transmitted to the relevant supplier immediately and a confirmation message should be displayed on the dashboard.

Notification System for Supplier Feedback Confirmation

Given that feedback has been submitted by the inventory analyst, when the supplier receives the feedback, then they should also receive a notification summarizing the feedback including any action items within 5 minutes of submission.

Supplier Acknowledgment of Feedback Received

Given that feedback is sent to the supplier, when the supplier reads the feedback, then the system should log the acknowledgment and display an 'Acknowledged' status on the inventory dashboard.

Dashboard Display of Feedback Status for Analysts

Given the inventory dashboard, when an analyst views the supplier's feedback history, then they should see the status of each feedback entry (Pending, Acknowledged, Resolved) for each supplier along with timestamps.

Analysis of Supplier Response Times to Feedback

Given the feedback mechanism is active, when inventory analysts submit feedback, then the system should track and report the average response time of suppliers for resolution of feedback within a specified reporting period.

Escalation Process for Unresolved Feedback

Given a feedback submission is logged as unresolved for over 7 days, when an analyst checks the feedback report, then the system should trigger an escalation protocol to notify required team members for intervention.

Supplier Dashboards

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to see visual dashboards for each supplier so that I can quickly assess their performance and make informed procurement decisions."

Description

The Supplier Dashboards requirement creates a dedicated section within the Inventory dashboard that provides summarized insights on each supplier's performance. This includes visualization tools such as graphs and charts illustrating trends over time regarding delivery, quality, and pricing. This requirement enhances the overall functionality of the Integrated Supplier Insights feature by enabling quick assessments of supplier health and allowing for faster decision-making. Retailers can use this information to adjust procurement strategies effectively based on supplier performance trends.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Data Visualization

Given the Inventory Analyst is on the Supplier Dashboards section, when they select a supplier, then the system should display a visual representation (graphs and charts) of the selected supplier's delivery, quality, and pricing data over time.

Real-time Data Synchronization

Given the Supplier Dashboards section is open, when a change in supplier performance data occurs in the system, then the updated data should reflect in the dashboard within 5 seconds.

Historical Data Access

Given the Inventory Analyst is viewing the Supplier Dashboard, when they request historical performance data for a supplier, then the system should provide data for at least the past 12 months for delivery, quality, and pricing metrics.

Filtering Supplier Metrics

Given the Supplier Dashboards section is open, when the Inventory Analyst applies filters (e.g., date range, performance thresholds), then only the relevant supplier performance data should be displayed according to the selected filters.

Supplier Comparison Feature

Given multiple suppliers are displayed on the Supplier Dashboard, when the Inventory Analyst selects two or more suppliers to compare, then the system should generate a comparative analysis report highlighting differences in delivery, quality, and pricing.

User-Friendly Interface Assessment

Given that the Supplier Dashboard is accessed for the first time by an Inventory Analyst, when they interact with the interface, then they should be able to locate relevant supplier metrics within 2 minutes without assistance.

Alert System for Supplier Issues

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to receive alerts for supplier issues so that I can take immediate action to mitigate inventory risks."

Description

The Alert System for Supplier Issues requirement provides automated notifications to Inventory Analysts when supplier performance falls below certain thresholds. This feature is essential for promptly addressing issues such as late deliveries or excessive defective products. By integrating this alert system within the inventory management solution, users can tackle supplier-related problems before they significantly impact inventory levels and overall business operations. This proactive approach significantly reduces the risk of stockouts and enhances the reliability of inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated alert triggers when supplier performance metrics drop below acceptable levels.

Given an Inventory Analyst and a supplier with performance metrics defined, when the supplier's metrics fall below the predefined threshold, then an automated alert notification should be sent to the Inventory Analyst via email and within the dashboard.

Alert notifications can be customized based on the type of supplier performance issue.

Given the alert system settings, when an Inventory Analyst customizes the parameters for alerts regarding late deliveries or defective products, then the alert system should reflect these changes and send notifications accordingly.

Alerts should provide detailed information regarding supplier performance issues.

Given an automated alert has been triggered for a specific supplier, when the Inventory Analyst views the notification, then the alert should include details such as the type of issue, time frame of the issue, and action steps to address it.

The alert system should log all notifications for auditing purposes.

Given that an alert was sent to an Inventory Analyst, when the alerts are reviewed in the system's log, then all past notifications should be accurately recorded with timestamps and details of the triggered criteria.

Inventory Analysts should have the ability to mark alerts as resolved after taking action.

Given an active alert notification, when an Inventory Analyst resolves the issue, then they should be able to mark the alert as resolved in the system, which should then update the alert log to reflect this change.

Supplier Comparison Tools

"As an Inventory Analyst, I want to compare multiple suppliers based on performance metrics so that I can select the best options for my procurement needs."

Description

The Supplier Comparison Tools requirement allows Inventory Analysts to effectively compare multiple suppliers based on various performance metrics. By presenting a side-by-side analysis of key indicators such as cost, delivery times, and quality ratings, this feature aids in selecting the right suppliers for specific needs. This capability empowers users to make strategic sourcing decisions and minimize costs while maintaining quality standards. It enhances the Integrated Supplier Insights feature by providing analytical support for optimization in supplier selection.

Acceptance Criteria

Comparison of Supplier Performance Metrics by Inventory Analyst

Given an Inventory Analyst accesses the Supplier Comparison Tools, when they select multiple suppliers to compare and input relevant metrics, then the system displays a side-by-side comparison of cost, delivery times, and quality ratings.

Real-time Updates on Supplier Metrics

Given that an Inventory Analyst has used the Supplier Comparison Tools, when there are updates to supplier performance metrics, then the system automatically refreshes the comparison dashboard to reflect the latest data.

User Access Control for Supplier Comparison Tools

Given that an Inventory Analyst is logged into the system, when they attempt to access the Supplier Comparison Tools, then the system verifies their role and grants access only if they have the required permissions.

Export Supplier Comparison Analysis

Given an Inventory Analyst has reviewed the supplier comparison, when they choose to export the analysis, then the system generates a downloadable report in PDF format that includes all selected metrics.

Integration with Inventory Performance Metrics

Given an Inventory Analyst uses the Supplier Comparison Tools, when they compare suppliers, then the system displays relevant inventory performance metrics (e.g., stockout rates and turnover rates) alongside the supplier performance metrics for enhanced decision-making.

Visualization of Supplier Performance Trends

Given an Inventory Analyst is using the Supplier Comparison Tools, when they select a time period for analysis, then the system visualizes trends in supplier performance metrics over the selected timeframe using graphs and charts.

Product Details

Vision & Mission

Problem & Solution

Details & Audience

User Personas

Retail Reformer

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Growth Guru

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Data-Driven Decision Maker

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Seasonal Seller

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Product Features

Trend Analysis Insights

Requirements

Sales Trend Visualization

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Inventory Alerts

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Custom Reporting Tools

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Comparison

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal Forecasting Module

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Demand Alerts

Requirements

Real-Time Alert Configuration

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-Channel Demand Monitoring

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Stock Adjustment Suggestions

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User Role-Based Notification Settings

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Insights and Analytics

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Stock Adjustment

Requirements

Predictive Order Quantity Calculation

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Seamless Integration with E-commerce Platforms

Description

Acceptance Criteria